Quantcast
Channel: JazzProfiles
Viewing all 3897 articles
Browse latest View live

Gil Evans, Julian "Cannonball" Adderley and "The St. Louis Blues"

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.



“Cannonball runs away with the album [New Bottle, Old Wine: The Great Jazz Composers Interpreted by Gil Evans ]; his voice predominates. The scores sound like what Gil might have written for Charlie Parker if he had been unencumbered by the mishaps that occurred in his work with Parker in 1953. Gil tailored the arrangements to Cannonball's strengths — his warm sound, his bop-oriented cascading improvisations, and his unflagging energy.”
- Stephanie Stein Crease, Gil Evans Out of the Cool His Life and Music


Most Jazz fans are aware of the significant role that arranger-composer Gil Evans played in the seminal 1949 Birth of the Cool Recordings under Miles Davis’ nominal leadership and the larger, orchestral recordings that he made with Miles beginning with the 1959 Columbia release of Miles Ahead which was quickly followed by their collaboration on Columbia’s Porgy and Bess and Sketches of Spain.


But shortly before Gil began applying his “... imaginative and often startlingly daring orchestral concepts” in these larger projects with Miles, Gil weaved his magic with alto saxophonist Julian “Cannonball” Adderley for a Pacific Jazz recording entitled New Bottle, Old Wine: The Great Jazz Composers Interpreted by Gil Evans [CDP 7 46855 2].


As explained in the liner notes to the recording:


“As with the now classic Miles Davis collaborations this album is a joint effort between two giants of this music. Gil Evans and Julian 'Cannonball' Adderley. Gil has been since his early work with the Claude Thornhill band and the Miles Davis Nonet, a trailblazer and pacesetter with this imaginative and often startlingly daring orchestral concepts. Cannonball has, since his arrival in New York in the mid-1950's, established himself as one of the important musicians of our era irrespective of genre.


This album consists of compositions written by and/or associated with major figures in this music including Louis, Lester, Bird and Dizzy, all of whom transformed the aesthetic vis-a-vis the improvisor. The rest, W. C. Handy, Jelly Roll Morton, Fats Waller and Thelonious Monk are all important composers.”


The eight tunes on New Bottle, Old Wine are St. Louis Blues, King Porter Stomp, Willow Tree, Struttin’ With Some Barbecue, Lester Leaps in, ‘Round Midnight, Manteca and Bird Feathers.


And while all of them are magnificently arranged by Gil and memorably performed by Cannonball, St. Louis Blues has always remained my favorite largely for the reasons described in this excerpt from the liner notes:


“Cannonball with his ultra personal and warmly beautiful sound opens THE ST. LOUIS BLUES with an excellent paraphrase of the melody. The second chorus spotlights a background of trilling guitar and sustained chords vaguely reminiscent of Armstrong's "West End Blues'.'The next section, in minor, with muted brass and using substitute chords is especially beautiful and evolves into a Cannonball double time. Punching antiphonal brass undergird Cannonball s theme restatement and lead back to the original swing tempo. Check out Harvey Phillip's tuba on the restatement.”



Here’s more information about the evolution of this recording from Stephanie Stein Crease’s Gil Evans Out of the Cool His Life and Music which, incidentally, was the winner of the 2002 Deems Taylor Award for excellence on the subject of music [paragraphing modified]:


“...  George Avakian again became a key figure [for Gil's next recording project under his own leadership]. Avakian left Columbia in early 1958, warned by his doctor to slow down. His eight-year tenure as A&R director for jazz and international pop albums at Columbia Records had been literally gold-plated, and he left the label with a star-studded jazz roster. But Avakian seemed unable to stay out of the recording business. He was invited to form a partnership with West Coast producer Dick Bock, owner of the World Pacific label, with tempting conditions: fewer recordings, less bureaucracy, and the freedom to make quick decisions. Avakian accepted. World Pacific (Pacific Jazz), flourishing from the success of its recordings by the Gerry Mulligan Quartet with Chet Baker, now had an active on-the-scene jazz producer on both coasts.


Shortly thereafter, Avakian ran into Gil, who said that he had some ideas for an album along the lines of Miles Ahead. Gil wanted to feature Cannonball Adderley, an alto saxophonist with a joyous sound a la Charlie Parker, who had been getting a lot of attention as a sideman with Miles Davis; Cannonball was also between labels. Avakian suggested they could do something for World Pacific. The result was New Bottle, Old Wine, which was recorded in New York in four sessions in April and May 1958.


The album, subtitled "The Great Jazz Composers Interpreted by Gil Evans and His Orchestra," romps through jazz compositions by some of Gil's favorite composers and performers. It moves chronologically through pieces by W. C. Handy, Jelly Roll Morton, Fats Waller, Louis Armstrong, Lester Young, Thelonious Monk, and Dizzy Gillespie, and ends with Charlie Parker's rousing "Bird Feathers." Its buoyant mood contrasts starkly with the brooding beauty of Miles Ahead. The rhythm section—bassist Paul Chambers with Art Blakey or Philly Joe Jones on drums—delivers a powerful swing to the mid- and up-tempo numbers.


Cannonball runs away with the album; his voice predominates. The scores sound like what Gil might have written for Charlie Parker if he had been unencumbered by the mishaps that occurred in his work with Parker in 1953. Gil tailored the arrangements to Cannonball's strengths — his warm sound, his bop-oriented cascading improvisations, and his unflagging energy.


The arrangements were written for three trumpets, three trombones, French horn, and tuba; Cannonball, two other woodwind players, guitar, bass, and drums completed the fourteen-piece ensemble. Gil plays piano on Waller's "Willow Tree" and Monk's "'Round Midnight." The transition from "'Round Midnight" to "Manteca" renders the two pieces a suite, the latter performed with a relentless drive reminiscent of Gillespie's own late 1940s big band. Gil's arrangement of "Bird Feathers" by Charlie Parker opens with a unison-with-a-twist—flute, muted trumpet, and brushes, in this case—which brings out new facets of the composition.


In 1959 Evans recorded a sequel for World Pacific, Great Jazz Standards, produced by Dick Bock. (Avakian had moved on to start a pop division at Warner Brothers Records.) This album included some musicians new to Gil's work on record, notably drummer Elvin Jones and veteran tenor saxophonist Budd Johnson, who, along with most of the other musicians — Steve Lacy, Johnny Coles, Bill Barber, Jimmy Cleveland, Louis Mucci, and Al Block - would play and/or record with Evans frequently over the next few years. As a group they added as much substantive personality to Gil's music as did long-term members of Ellington's band. Gil, like Ellington, wrote expressly for his players, targeting them for certain pitches and effects, certain nuances. Their unique voices were inseparable from the character of the composite sound Gil was after.


Great Jazz Standards was recorded in February 1959, shortly after Gil played at Birdland for two weeks with approximately the same personnel. Gil again used "great jazz composers" to tie the album together and wrote arrangements for compositions by Bix Beiderbecke, Thelonious Monk, Don Redman, John Lewis, and Clifford Brown; the album includes one Evans original, "La Nevada" (Theme). This album, like New Bottle, Old Wine, was marked by a strong rhythmic drive not often associated with Evans's work, delivered on most selections by Elvin Jones's drums.”


You can sample the music from New Bottle, Old Wine: The Great Jazz Composers Interpreted by Gil Evans [CDP 7 46855 2]on the following video montage of images of old St. Louis which uses Cannonball and Gil’s expressive performance of St. Louis Blues as its soundtrack.



The Miles Davis 1948/49 Group - from "Modern Jazz" by Morgan and Horricks

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


For the longest time, I was under the impression that the primary treatments on the subject of West Coast Jazz or, if you prefer, Jazz on the West Coast, were contained in the books written on the subject by Ted Gioia, Robert Gordon and Alain Tercinet [in French; no English translation that I am aware of].

[Gordon Jack’s fine series of interviews with prominent West Coast Jazz musicians as contained in his Fifties Jazz Talk: An Oral Retrospective and the many articles and interviews by John Tynan the West Coast Editor of Downbeat during the 1950s and early 1960sare also important sources on the subject.]

When I mentioned this observation about the Gioia-Gordon-Tercinet West Coast Jazz trilogy in casual conversation with a friend whose knowledge of all-things-West-Coast-Jazz I greatly admire he replied:

“Of course you know about the chapters on the subject in Alun Morgan and Raymond Horricks Modern Jazz: A Study of Its Development Since 1939[1956, Gollancz; Greenwood, 1977]. And then there’s also Woody Woodward’s Jazz Americana[Trend Books, 1956].

While I “knew of” Woody’s book, but didn’t own a copy, I had no knowledge of the one by Morgan and Horricks. I was aware of Alun as something akin to the Senior Dean of British Jazz critics and authors and I knew of Raymond Horricks’ compilation of a discography on Gerry Mulligan’s music, but knowledge of their writings in tandem on the subject of Modern Jazz in general and West Coast Jazz in particular had eluded me until my buddy’s reference.

With a copy of the Morgan-Horricks book now in hand and a paperbound version  of the Woody Woodward’s work on the way, I thought it would be interesting to share Alun and Raymond’s thoughts on the evolution of West Coast Jazz in a contiguous, three-part blog based on the relevant chapters from their book.

A caveat at the outset: in these racially sensitive times, one wonders about categorizations such as “White Musician” and “Negro Musician” with the connotation that the latter is superior to the former.

I suppose that it is too much to be hoped for that one day, those who play this music will simply be referred to as Jazz musicians, but in the context of the times in which the Morgan-Horricks book was written - the mid-1950’s - these distinctions were still in vogue.

For many students of Jazz, the predominant style of Jazz that developed in California primarily between 1945-1965 had its beginnings in what have come to be known as the Miles Davis, Birth of the Cool recordings.

So let’s begin there with Alun and Raymond’s take on the significance of the 1948/49 Miles Davis Group and its relationship to the development of the “Cool” style of Jazz on the West Coast.

“In September 1948 New York's Royal Roost presented a nine-piece modern jazz unit led by the young Negro trumpeter Miles Davis. In comparison with the familiar attractions at the club this group had a most unusual instrumentation. With a front-line of trumpet, trombone, alto and baritone-saxophones, French horn and tuba, it represented the first real step beyond the confines of the unison-ensemble small group. Collectively the musicians had achieved a unique orchestral effect; a confirmation of the many experiments which haphazardly had contributed to the evolution of the modern movement in jazz. Miles and his fellows had created a new sound, at last a satisfactory co-ordination of the ideas growing from the Minton theorists. Even today the group represents the highest artistic level ever attained by the modernists.

Miles made one of the worst financial flounders in the history of jazz. As a regular unit the group's duration can be counted in weeks. Its music was incomprehensible to audiences seeking only the frenzy of jazz, its appeal so esoteric that the superior musical policy was hardly appreciated outside a small circle of musicians. Yet through just three recording sessions for Capitol (supervised by Pete Rugolo) Miles achieved an orchestral cohesion never to be equalled since by a modern jazz group. Greater individual solos have been created.  Certain musicians have succeeded in expressing more drive, more abandon, more of the vital emotional inspiration so necessary to jazz. For a representation of collective modern jazz, however, and for imaginative scoring to assist and accentuate the soloist, there the group's style climbs worthily on to its historical pedestal. Without destroying the essential elements of jazz it took on the careful preparation normally found  only in  chamber and symphony music.

The thought of forming such a group was conceived by Miles Davis during the summer months of 1948. Meetings with Gerry Mulligan, then a little-known arranger and baritone player with the Claude Thornhill band, brought the opportunity to discuss the idea in practical terms. With a strong emphasis on the written aspect of jazz Miles would obviously require a concentrated pool of arranging heads. Men capable of exploiting the new group to its fullest extent. In turn Mulligan and the Thornhill staff arranger, Gil Evans, assured the trumpeter of the wide possibilities offered by such a band. Ideas for scoring were legion. With the right musicians the plan could certainly take shape.

Gradually the three men brought their blue-print to the reality stage. Through several discussions, test sessions and hours of burning the midnight oil on experimental writing, a concrete policy was laid. Basically the need was for a medium-sized group, capable of supporting soloists with scored backgrounds after the fashion of a full orchestra. They wanted to improve jazz in written form but at the same time maintain an atmosphere of relaxation for the individual. It meant the innovation of a new ensemble sound, of contrasting section voicings within the front-line. Yet these respective changes were skillfully introduced without impairing in any way the force of the rhythm section. The beat had to be preserved because it holds the key to every form of jazz. There was a conventional rhythm section, using of necessity written parts, but not restrained in its punch behind the ensemble.

The final constitution of the band was determined by several important requirements. Without being a power-house group the front-line needed depth. Miles wanted a rich, full sound, mellow in its unison voicings, but prepared for definite contrapuntal designs within the arrangements. The baritone, French horn and tuba would increase the tonal depth, offering the arrangers an ensemble range of three and a half octaves. In the overall voicing the complement of light and deeper-toned instruments was perfectly balanced. Plenty of room was left for the arranger to stress light and shade while the melody instruments were not too unwieldy to be pushed and swung by the rhythm section. The tonal quality of the ensemble could be varied considerably by the distribution of the lead parts. Looking through the group's records one can distinguish marked changes in the arranger's attack on, say, Israel with a trumpet lead and Jeru with its two-saxophone lead. The richness of voicing remains common to both, but the former has a harder edge, a stronger impact which stiffens the entire ensemble effect.

In the main, of course, the orchestra reflected the subtle, devious approach originally advocated by Lester Young. The desire to occasionally leave the obvious road and explore the beautiful woods on either side. Yet as with Lester there was a certain natural warmth about the music. Its sounds were relaxed but never in the cold, detached sense that for several years was to envelop the younger white modernists. Miles might unconsciously have pointed a finger towards the cool style, yet the relaxation of his group was no mere affectation; it was only the logical outcome of the instrumental design being used. The ensemble was never allowed to drift listlessly through the orchestrations. Continually the arrangers were taxing its elasticity with complex scoring devices and new thematic material. Many jazz groups have developed a stereotyped style through the reins being completely in the hands of one arranger. Even the best musicians are very much at the mercy of their staff writers in this respect. (Exceptions, of course, are bands portraying the written work of truly gifted minds like Ellington, Carter and Redman.) Miles wisely avoided any possibilities of this pitfall, however, by having a varied panel of arrangers, each one able to present a different facet of the ensemble scope. The music never became a stagnant pool.

A group of this kind required an acute concentration from its musicians. The wide range of material naturally placed a limit on the men Miles was able to employ. To avoid becoming a precision machine, completely devoid of all musical emotion, the trumpeter aimed for musicians who from his own acquaintance he knew to be sincere. He sought sound technicians, alert to the increased complications of transcribed jazz, yet also men with a creative ability. There was no sensational collection of soloists. No high-priced stars to disturb the productivity of the group with their purple passions and egocentric gluttony for the spotlight. The musicians were competent readers, fully conscious of their role within the group. The recorded solo work was tasteful and free from exhibition. The fact that greater individual solos have been recorded is not meant as a derogatory remark about the group. Solo contributions maintained a high standard (Miles's own imagination in particular can hardly have been more vividly inflamed by a supporting group), and this aspect of the soloists is only pointed out to illustrate more clearly the make-up of the band. Virtuoso musicians of the Gillespie and Parker calibre had given way to the younger modernists, to musicians less matured in their outlook and therefore better suited to the group's pattern. Everything was calculated to place the most pliable material in the hands of the arranger. For the guiding light of the band unquestionably shone from its reservoir of scoring talent. If any solo weakness existed it was belittled by the collective produce of the band. No other modern jazz group has ever held such a strong writing staff.

At the outset the larger proportion of the scoring came from Gerry Mulligan. It was really the first definite step in the saxist's career. Previously he'd earned appraisal from musicians for his “Disc Jockey Jump” with Gene Krupa and a little scoring for Thornhill, but the seeds of his present reputation were sown through his work with the Davis band. Having taken an active part in the construction of the ensemble, Mulligan revealed a firm grasp of its value even on his earliest scores. He wasn't the most gifted mind ever to write for the group, but in the embryonic stage of the experiment he played the most vital writing part.

Mulligan's style represents a compromise between the extremes in jazz composition of Ellington and the white school of Bill Russo. He is basically a technical writer, with none of Ellington's racial romanticism or melodic invention. A composer concerned with strong group construction as opposed to sensitive material. Yet through this medium of technique he shares the Duke's gift for writing to offset the soloist. He keeps the musician at ease with his scoring; and although a far less talented creator his work seems to carry a conviction through to the soloist. There's a rhythmic pulse in his style which has defied all attempts to class him alongside the cold abstraction of Bill Russo. The arrangements of Mulligan carry a direct attack while those of Russo are moody and introspective. They have a swing which is often found lacking in the white arrangers.

At times the role of Gerry Mulligan's composition has been exaggerated in jazz. One cannot afford admittedly to discount the obvious qualities in his work with regard to precision and orchestral control. On the other hand, Mulligan as a composer is still only a miniaturist. He is gushing with ideas regarding presentation, the actual execution of his thoughts, but his themes are limited by their own purely technical make-up. As yet they have not provided a basis for written jazz in extended form. Instead of blending into a strong melody they remain a collection of technical phrases. They cater for the soloist through the strength of their harmonic changes, but they lack the melodic beauty necessary for a logical expansion. Mulligan composes for a certain group of instruments; it's not always easy to convert his themes to other jazz groups. He is in approach the complete arranger. Here lies his real strength. The ability to cope with technical problems as they arise; to perfect the actual executive work of a group. As a baritone player he can be excused his tendency to overscore the reeds at the expense of the brass.  This mannerism has its advantage. The slight melodic content of his writing is rather enhanced by the sleek run of the saxophone voicings. It certainly seems that Mulligan is really more the engineer than the sculptor. When examining his work the arranging strength appears to dominate the actual composition.

Similarly Gil Evans's real value sprang from his understanding of the orchestra rather than from the creation of original material. Years of scoring commercial music had coated his style with a strong melodic sense, a gift for blending attractive voicings in his arrangements. In this respect Gil remained a continual asset to the group for the scoring of standard melodies. He could make alterations to the melodic lines without destroying the intrinsic beauty; create an elastic interpretation of a commercial theme to suit the style of the group. This is doubly evident in his scoring behind a vocalist. On the occasions that Kenny Hagood sang with Miles it was Gil Evans who carved the supports. He used the voice as he would a solo instrument. Hagood appeared to be surrounded, rather than backed by the group. Gil's scores are not content to occasionally stress points in the singing. They must continually be portraying the melody with him, blending tonally with his voice and adding richly-banked harmonies to the overall sound.

Other musicians had also contributed to the band's repertoire. Since coming to New York, Miles himself had studied at the Juilliard Institute and he began writing originals for the group. Single compositions came from Bud Powell, Cleo Henry and Johnny Carisi. Carisi, a little-known New York trumpeter, wrote the futuristic “Israel.” Like Emily Bronte's novel this solitary score was a masterpiece. Carisi gained the utmost effect from the contrast of sectional voices in a contrapuntal design. He tossed the theme around the ensemble like a ball, using mainly a trumpet lead, though continually playing brass against reeds, one moment swelling, the next retracting the volume of sound. Johnny arranged the composition himself for the group and presented the melody in a most dramatic light, with unusual rhythmic accents behind the sharply-defined main phrases of the theme. It is indeed unfortunate that Miles didn't record any further material by Carisi.

The trump card of Miles's arranging, however, came shortly after the group's inception. The trumpeter gained his one truly great composer in the person of pianist John Lewis. For whereas Gerry Mulligan has a competent mind for orchestral jazz, Lewis has all the gifts of a composer. While being well-versed technically, he has the imagination and the natural inspiration to create music worthy of expansion. He is the first composer since Ellington to write real jazz in extended form. His thoughts are often simple, at times invoking the serene beauty of the French Impressionists, but they may be developed along logical lines. John's writing with Miles gave one of the earliest pointers to the later developments of Negro jazz in New York. He dispelled the theory that written jazz must eventually incarcerate the natural feeling of the soloist. Intelligent writing can be sensitive to the needs of improvisation; John's orchestrations will have a scored part for every musician in the group, even to the rhythm section, and in the resulting sound not one musician will appear strained. The acute orchestral sense of Lewis provides a backing suitable to the musician. His scores have the same sympathy for Miles or Clifford Brown that Ellington's impart behind Cootie Williams. Like the Duke, his deep technical knowledge serves only as a gilt to the expression of ideas. The propensity for correctness, the orderly form of presentation, the minute detail of his construction—these elements in the make-up of John's style are the tools to model his creations. Being a sound technician increases the power of his portrayal. It is employed to develop not to submerge jazz. Every group for whom John Lewis writes appears to be illuminated by his ideas. The Miles Davis unit was no exception.

When selecting the musicians for the group Miles made no distinctions regarding colour. The men were required for a band pattern, not a prolonged jam session.  Considering that most musicians are normally reluctant to join experimental units, the response to the trumpeter's venture yielded a good harvest of rapidly developing soloists. The band represented a strong racial co-operation; probably the final alliance of any importance prior to the movement of modern white jazz to the West Coast.

The white musicians again came chiefly from the Claude Thornhill band. Mulligan on baritone, tuba player John Barber, bassist Joe Shulman and the young altoist Lee Konitz were the first to cross over to the new group. French horn player Sandy Siegelstein joined from Thornhill shortly afterwards.

Mulligan had already developed into a confident soloist at this time. His soft intonation became a familiar solo sound with the group and minimized the absence of a tenorman. Actually Gerry handles this normally unwieldy saxophone with the facility one might expect from a tenor. He slides lucidly through each register with the structural perfection so typical of his writing. Although it would be hard to imagine him unleashing the full emotional force of a great Negro saxophone player he does play with a beat. In a way he suffers from the elegance of his expression. Rather than risk one badly-phrased note he will abandon the gutty impetus of a baritone player like Harry Carney. Restraint can be an aid to beautiful phrasing, but too much of it can also withhold the feeling from a solo. The inspiration remains within the musician instead of being communicated through his playing to the listener. Taste and technique remain Mulligan's gods. He impresses the intellect as a fine musician, but fails to arouse the same excitement as a gushing, forceful blower like Charlie Fowlkes, the less technically minded baritone player with Basie.

Joe Shulman, really a disciple of the Tristano school, produced a strong drive behind the ensemble. Barber and Siegelstein were sound studio musicians, chosen to play the difficult written parts, and on record they blend well with the various voicings. Lee Konitz was perhaps a less happy choice for the group. The altoist was already infatuated with the cold, almost abstract style of improvisation. His playing was fluent but concerned entirely with technique for its own sake. The ideas displayed no strong melodic content. On record, at least, their ring is shallow. Even the tone has the limp, dewy tracery of a water-lily. Beautiful yet so fragile. When Konitz joined the Kenton orchestra several years later his style underwent a rapid change of face. He began to blow with a piercing tone; to swing instead of merely moving mechanically with the beat. Obviously the altoist was passing through an awkward phase while with Miles. He seems unsure of his true position in jazz and only rarely does his solo work flicker with inspiration.

Miles opened with Kai Winding, the Danish-born musician on trombone. Later he brought in Jay Jay Johnson, the greatest technician of the younger Negro trombonists. As with John Lewis's composition, Johnson uses his technique to create jazz. He swings all the time. He has a very direct attack as opposed to the poetic, fanciful flights of Benny Green. For the easy swing and tonal beauty he is slightly outclassed by Benny, though for range and swift articulation he is ahead of everyone. Johnson handles his slide with the apparent ease of a valve trombone.

Pianist Al Haig (like Kai Winding) only made the first recording session with the group. Shortly afterwards John Lewis took over the position. On drums Max Roach was reading the parts without difficulty. Nothing ever disturbed the precision of his playing. His beat remained a tower of strength behind the ensemble; light, relaxed, pliable to the rhythmic contrasts, yet swinging all the way.

Crowning the group was Miles himself, one of the most sincere soloists in modern jazz. A trumpeter whose artistic expression transcends all criticism of his technical shortcomings. It is true that Miles is dwarfed as a technician when ranked alongside the dynamic virtuoso Gillespie. He was quick to grasp the scored side of modern jazz and the new styles of phrasing, yet his trumpet lacks a powerful tone. His tone is soft, noticeably warm but clouded in comparison with the cutting edge of Gillespie's or Navarro's. This naturally reduces the impact of his top-register work. With continued practice Miles' technique today has improved beyond measure, as indeed his recordings with the younger New York school will show. At the time of the Capitol sessions, however, he found it difficult to blow a sustained high note. His phrasing was often clipped, staccato style as he avoided the longer melodic lines.

The group's arrangers recognized these drawbacks and avoided taxing his technique unduly. They conceived subdued backgrounds with organ-styled harmonies to cushion the natural relaxation of his playing. Given this support the trumpeter excelled himself. One can sense him feeling the expression of every note. The phrasing is precise but garnished by many beautiful ideas. Miles had a most fertile imagination. His logical development of a theme cannot be darkened by the technical faults. The inspiration given to him by the group greatly reduced the hesitancy of his early solos with Charlie Parker.

Miles first took the group into the Capitol recording studios on January 21, 1949. With him on the date were Mulligan, Konitz, Winding, Junior Collins (French horn), Barber, Haig, Shulman and Roach. They recorded four scores: “Godchild,” “Budo,” “Jeru” and “Move.”

“Godchild,” a composition of the modern pianist George Wallington, was arranged by Gerry Mulligan. From the opening bars of the theme the saxist draws back the curtains to reveal the complete ensemble range. The composition has an ascending main phrase and Gerry opens the score with the tuba, the deepest voice, leading the front-line, then moves the phrase to the lighter instruments so that the trumpet seems to fly upwards from the full ensemble. Miles must have been very impressed by this design, for he flows from the written line into one of his best recorded solos. A lyrical piece of invention, expressed with the normal subdued but feeling approach. It is interesting to note from the record how Mulligan has determined to obtain a maximum expansion of the composition. For the final thirty-two bars, instead of merely reiterating the opening chorus, he has conceived a new thematic statement, with an entirely different melody built over Wallington's chord sequence. This is a breach of jazz ethics which should occur more often. The imagination of an arranger ought not to be lazily curbed by the satisfaction of producing an original theme. If the composition is worthy of further development then the material should not be wasted.

The moody “Budo,” as its title implies, was officially composed by pianist Bud Powell. Bud also recorded the theme himself under the alias “Hallucinations.” Actually the piece has more structural tissue than is normally found in his pretty piano compositions. This bears out his own admittance that Miles helped to write the piece. With the exception of “Tempus Fugit,” Bud's piano themes have never really lent themselves as features for a group. We think Miles took a major part in composing this one. “Jeru,” on the other hand, can be easily identified as a Gerry Mulligan composition. This is one of the baritone man's typical swingers with its light reed voicing and smoothly-riding phrases. The supple movement of the ensemble is fully demonstrated here. Underlined by Max Roach's superb open cymbal work, the whole band swings along in complete concord.

John Lewis scored the fourth title, “Move,” a composition by drummer Denzil Best. His close interplay of the reeds and brass immediately gives the impression of a much larger band. “Move” is not a theme of great melodic power. It gives itself to orchestral exploitation essentially as a piece of impact; the rather plain phrases flimsily cover a series of strong rhythmic accents. John's score, poised perfectly on the beat, seems to incite every member of the group to uncoil and blow with remarkable force. The punching ensemble is most impressive for a smallish jazz group. Nothing is strained about the sound. The effect has the freedom of a head arrangement. With records of this standard it becomes very difficult not to admire the abilities of John Lewis in modern jazz.

On April 22, 1949, Miles recorded four further scores. With a reshuffle of musicians the personnel read as follows: Miles (trumpet), Jay Jay Johnson (trombone), Sandy Siegelstein (French horn), John Barber (tuba), Lee Konitz (alto), Gerry Mulligan (baritone), John Lewis (piano), Nelson Boyd (bass) and Kenny Clarke (drums). Nelson Boyd had played with the Gillespie big band in 1948. He joined Miles from Charlie Barnet. Although preferring a four-string bass to the more commonly accepted five strings, Nelson generates a powerful force behind the ensemble. His sure-fingered accuracy is yet another case to point of a fine musician playing in an artistic, but completely unappreciated group. Kenny Clarke, of course, was the foremost pioneer of the modern drumming system. In joining the band he renewed a long-standing musical association with John Lewis. Whilst in the Army Kenny had been the first modernist to recognize the pianist's writing talents. Later he'd introduced him to Gillespie. At the end of Dizzy's European tour of 1948 the drummer had stayed on in Paris to teach and record with some of the younger French musicians. This record date was his first important engagement after returning to the New York scene.

The scores used on the session were Gerry Mulligan's “Venus De Milo,” Johnny Carisi's “Israel,” John Lewis's “Rouge” and Cleo Henry's “Boplicity.” Lewis had also arranged the last-named composition. Mulligan again incited the leader to conceive a really fine solo with his “Venus De Milo” tribute theme. The piece has an attractive melody and the later trumpet improvisation does it full justice. In turn “Rouge” must have bubbled into a fountain of inspiration for Lee Konitz, because his sixteen-bar solo here is without question the happiest thing he ever recorded with Miles. The thirty-two bar opening theme portrays a well-balanced contrapuntal design between the deep and lighter toned instruments. It is a clever statement, every instrument being expertly woven into the complete tapestry. Even the middle-eight is a perfect fit. Instead of standing as a passage of sharp relief it traces in its final two bars a logical reintroduction for the main melodic line. The relaxation only arrives with John's subsequent piano solo—a simple, unruffled half chorus over light background harmonies from the front-line. Konitz follows, flashing into double time, then relapsing in favour of easy, legato phrases. Apart from the solo interest of the succeeding chorus by Miles it's worthwhile noting how John builds up the ensemble strength behind the trumpet, gradually stacking the instruments in preparation for the final theme statement. A closing point of interest is the skillful key modulation in the coda.

In contrast the rich tonal shading in the melancholy “Boplicity” reflects the sensitive touch of Lewis. Employing a thick voicing, dominated by the deeper sounds of the ensemble, the pianist succeeds in creating a mood of ultra-relaxation. His impression of serenity and shadows has been faithfully captured on the score-sheet. Towards the conclusion he takes a piano solo and even as an active band musician he continues the pattern of his mood. There are no thoughts of a technical flag-waver. Obviously he has deeply considered the atmosphere of the piece and constructed his solo in agreement with its solemnity.

The third and final Capitol session took place on March 13, 1950; organized in the aftermath of the band's complete financial failure. Throughout America modern jazz groups were trying to imitate the voicings and complex scores propagated by Miles, yet the public refused to appreciate the fountain-head. An ironic gesture. So typical of the crave for sensationalism in jazz. Musical value is ignored. Anything bizarre and pretentious is automatically swallowed. This session was Miles' swan-song as a leader, but still a tribute to his sincere ideals.

With him in the studio that day were Jay Jay Johnson, Gunther Schuller (French horn), John Barber, Lee Konitz, Gerry Mulligan, John Lewis, Al McKibbon (bass) and Max

Roach. McKibbon, another fine bassist, plays with a full, clean tone. He'd played on and off with Gillespie since 1947. Like Nelson Boyd he imparted a definite drive behind the group. Again four scores were used at the session: the two standards, “Darn That Dream” and “Moon Dreams,” Miles'“Deception” and Gerry Mulligan's “Rocker.” “Darn That Dream” has an impressive score built by Gil Evans around Kenny Hagood. It proves a most intelligent setting for the voice within a jazz group. While Kenny's expression of the melody remains the focal point of attention it appears to ride lightly with the ensemble in the manner of a solo instrument. “Moon Dreams” may also be a Gil Evans score, yet in parts one senses the methods of John Lewis again. There is that same blending of the deeper voices that John introduced with “Boplicity.” Principally it remains an orchestral feature. The solo work is limited to four bars from Lee Konitz and four from Mulligan. (Miles's trumpet is used sparingly as a lead instrument, occasionally playing accents to the wistful melodic line.) One central passage strongly recalls the Lewis touch. From Mulligan's solo the instruments assemble for an ascending phrase, then are one by one peeled away until only a sustained high note from Konitz remains; a thin, watery sound, quite the extreme from the rich ensemble which moments later engulfs it. “Deception” and “Rocker” use faster rhythms. The former has a complex interplay of instruments but reveals a chord sequence based on Shearing's “Conception.” Mulligan's tune is a thirty-two bar, with the main-eight revolving around a reiterated three-note phrase. For this score the saxist again built a second theme over the chord sequence. He features it in a central ensemble chorus, then breaks the pattern in eight bars of solo baritone to reintroduce the original melody.

Perhaps the most unfortunate feature of the band's dissolution lay in the section of its score-book which remained unrecorded. Several items like “Broadway Theme” (a Max Roach feature), John Lewis's “S’il Vous Plait” and another Evans-Hagood collaboration, “Why Do I Love You?,” were privately recorded during Royal Roost concerts. Yet part of the repertoire has presumably been shelved for ever. While so much musically sterile material was being recorded at a prolific rate by commercial groups the precious Davis book received only a coating of dust.

One of the most significant qualities of true jazz is its durability. The records we have by this short-lived band even today do not appear in the least dated by the latest developments in jazz. No one can claim to have advanced upon the Davis formula and yet still be creating jazz. Certain musicians have introduced new technical devices, but the frantic search for fresh sounds has not innovated a modern voicing to out-class the nine-piece unit of Miles. And while the band as an active force may have been silenced, its individual musicians have continued to infiltrate their ideas through to the newer experiments in jazz. Konitz, after having absorbed much of the Tristano influence, turned to a big band and stamped the cool alto style of the younger white modernists. Mulligan, via arranging for Kenton and Elliot Lawrence, made his way to the West Coast, where he innovated the designs for a piano-less quartet and a ten-piece group which partly followed the path of Miles' band. John Lewis laid the foundations for the written side of the New York school. Miles, Jay Jay and Max Roach began to shape the solo styles of the younger New Yorkers. The nine-piece unit was the last real act of co-operation by the white and coloured factions of the younger modernists. These factions have now gone their separate ways. As a result the racial affinity of ideas which came through the Minton movement has been torn asunder. The younger Negro modernists feel unable to participate in the trends of white technical development now growing on America's Pacific Coast. They are guarding more jealously the emotional elements of jazz in their search for advancement. In consequence the same separation of white and coloured jazz which existed with the swing era of the thirties has now returned.”

The West Coast School Of White Musicians And Its Soloists - from "Modern Jazz" by Morgan and Horricks

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


As I prepared this chapter for the blog as part of our continuing feature on their book Modern Jazz, I was amazed at how knowledgeable both Alun Morgan and Raymond Horricks were about the West Coast School, especially viewing if from far off England, and in some cases, their uncanny ability to put their finger on the pulse of many of the observations generally associated with the West Coast style of Jazz and its principal exponents to wit:


“There have been many critics who have opposed the use of the term "West Coast Jazz", claiming it was merely a coincidence that so much jazz talent was placed in the same area at the same time. Up to a point this assertion is correct, but it must be remembered that jazz can only progress and develop through influence and association. Over the years the close proximity of jazz musicians in Hollywood led inevitably to the passing on of ideas and means of expression and the subsequent creation of a style.”


Yet for all their insights and accuracies, there are a few startling omissions as well such as when the authors fail to include Frank Rosolino among the West Coast School’s trombone luminaries, Lou Levy from the list of pianists and also fail to reference two of its major drummers: Stan Levey and Mel Lewis.


They also make some egregious errors. For example, when they assert: “Larry Bunker continues to use the formulas laid down by Chico Hamilton with Mulligan;” with all due respect, in terms of both the technical ability to play the drums and the ability to swing on them, Chico couldn’t carry Larry’s drum sticks.


There also seems to be no corroboration from Jack Montrose on his role as “house arranger” for Pacific Jazz as Jack denied serving in that capacity when the question was put to him directly many years later at a Los Angeles Jazz Institute event.


Here’s more of Messrs Morgan and Horricks’ writing on the subject of “The West Coast School Of White Musicians And Its Soloists.”


“Towards The End of the forties the first signs heralding the large-scale move to the West Coast became apparent. In retrospect it is true to say that Stan Kenton was largely responsible for the formation of this new school, if not as a practising member then certainly as an influence and mentor.


He formed his first band to play an engagement at the Rendezvous Ballroom, Balboa, in April 1941 and since then his various orchestras have been formed and disbanded on the Pacific Coast. This inevitably resulted in a large number of musicians becoming available for club and studio engagements at the same time, men not necessarily natives of California but who found themselves there by force of circumstance. A contributory factor was the amount of work open to skilled musicians in film, television, radio and recording studios. For these engagements the ex-big-band members found themselves ideally suited, for their sight-reading and playing abilities placed them in an enviable position.


Having established a nucleus on the Coast, more and more jazz musicians began to gravitate towards the area. Slowly at first, then more rapidly, the centre of the recording world shifted its position across the continent from New York in the East to Hollywood and Los Angeles in the West.


The formation of "after-hours" clubs in the area was an inevitable outcome of the move, and in such places as The Haig, Zardi's, The Tiffany, The California and The Lighthouse in Los Angeles, and the Downbeat and Hangover in San Francisco, the new school of experimentalists was given the opportunity to develop and expand into a new and recognized entity.


Foremost amongst these establishments was The Lighthouse at Hermosa Beach, the club with which most of the new West Coasters became identified. It was here in 1948 [May, 1949?] that Howard Rumsey, a musician who had played bass in the earliest Stan Kenton band, gave the first of his many Sunday concerts. His task was not easy at the outset and the local following was slight. He persevered, however, and by 1950 had created a new jazz tradition in California. He became part owner of the club and helped in the production of a musically conducive atmosphere by his continued appearance on the stand with the visiting musicians.


The leaders of the West Coast movement comprised three ex-Kenton musicians. Of these trumpeter Shorty Rogers was the most well-known, for despite his youth he had had a wide and lengthy experience of working with and for jazz. One of his earliest jobs was in the band of his brother-in-law Red Norvo in the middle forties. Subsequently he played with Herman and Kenton as well as many engagements with studio bands and small jazz groups. The second founder member was drummer Shelly Manne, one of the most improved percussionists of recent years. He was stationed in New York during his service with the Coast Guard, and it was here that he played and recorded with Coleman Hawkins, Ben Webster, Charlie Parker and Dizzy Gillespie. His work with Stan Kenton was exemplified by a certain tenseness, although the seeds of his future inventiveness were evident in Kenton's composition Shelly Manne. The third musician was the versatile saxophonist Jimmy Giuffre, most often to be heard on baritone but almost equally facile on tenor and clarinet. He, too, had played in bands led by Woody Herman and Stan Kenton before settling down in California. It was around these three men, Rogers, Manne and Giuffre, that the main body of the school was formed and in the light of future development it was fortunate that each of the three recognized jazz's allegiance to the beat.


Amongst the remainder of the Stan Kenton sidemen who stayed in the Hollywood area were trumpeter Maynard Ferguson, trombonist Milt Bernhart, alto saxists Art Pepper and Bud Shank, tenor saxists Bob Cooper and Bill Holman and bassist Don Bagley. Other musicians of repute arrived on the scene after the initial confirmation of the new school and there is no doubt that the West Coast movement encouraged the development of many who might not otherwise have turned to jazz.


The regrettable feature of this rapid formation of the new jazz centre was the almost complete exclusion of coloured musicians from the clubs and recording studios. The Negro has always experienced difficulty in obtaining regular musical employment apart from the all-coloured touring bands and the local groups which have played in and around the Southern States. The continual prejudice against non-whites whittled the number of coloured musicians in California down to a very small percentage of the total. It is worth considering here the work of these few personalities.


First on the list comes the late Wardell Gray, who had managed to find employment for his small group at most of the Hollywood clubs, specializing in jazz played with a beat. His untimely and tragic death in the spring of 1955  robbed the jazz world in general and California in particular of a most respected and well-liked personality. Wardell was originally spotted by Benny Goodman at a 1947 Gene Norman concert in Pasadena and, after tours with Goodman and Basic, returned to the West Coast in 1950. Bass player Curtis Counce has achieved the near-impossible by becoming a member of the studio round, and there is ample evidence on record that his musicianly sound has helped many of the Hollywood studio-assembled bands to swing in a relaxed manner. Drummer Max Roach had made a brief but memorable visit to Rumsey's Lighthouse during the winter of 1953-54 and returned to the Coast later with Clifford Brown as co-leader of a Quintet. Pianist Sonny Clark became identified with the scene principally as a member of Buddy De Franco's rhythm section. The more gifted pianist Hampton Hawes has also played chiefly with white groups.


Harry Edison, a mainstay of the Count Basie band for many years, has figured on many sessions and played in the trumpet section of the Shorty Rogers band when it recorded a tribute to Basie. The resulting long-playing record, titled Shorty Courts The Count, did not, however, contain any solos by Edison, which would seem to indicate that a golden opportunity had been missed. Edison played a successful engagement at the Haig club, in the summer of 1953, as the alternating attraction to the Gerry Mulligan Quartet. Tenor saxist Dexter Gordon and drummer Larry Marable had both worked for long periods with Wardell Gray, the former's association dating back to the original Chase success recorded for Ross Russell's Dial label in 1947. Falling into this same category is Teddy Edwards, another tenor player who first gained prominence in the middle forties and, in 1954, played at a few West Coast concert dates with the Max Roach-Clifford Brown unit.


Drummer Chico Hamilton was born in Los Angeles and worked with Charlie Barnet, Lester Young, Duke Ellington, Count Basie and Lena Home before becoming the first drummer in the Gerry Mulligan Quartet. With Mulligan he set and maintained a very high standard, particularly with his crisp brushwork. Finally, Frank Morgan an alto saxist with an incisive tone and an inherent sense of swing who recorded with Teddy Charles's West Coasters. Morgan later moved across country to New York at a time when most trans-American jazz traffic was in the reverse direction.


These are the most prominent non-white musicians to have worked on the Pacific Coast. Without them the new jazz which has been created there would have already become stagnant, for no true and lasting jazz development has yet occurred which has not been fostered or helped by Negroes.


The white musicians are legion and have constituted the vast majority of the jazzmen in the area. Shorty Rogers is an omnipresent influence either through his scoring or his playing. His own solo work rarely fails to swing and is typified by a welcome and extrovert sense of humour. After Rogers the most outstanding soloist on trumpet is Chet Baker, who was given his chance in the original Quartet formed by Gerry Mulligan. Subsequently he left to form his own group, and his association with the West Coast was severed except for visits occasioned by his touring schedule. Chet specializes in a warm-toned approach to trumpet jazz, heard to best advantage on slow ballads. His success with Mulligan on the recording of My Funny Valentine was repeated on record with his own Quartet versions of Imagination and Moon Love. In common with many other trumpeters who had gone before him, he attempted to broaden his expression by singing. His vocals are not without interest, although their value should not be overstressed.


Maynard Ferguson gained notoriety with his high-note effects for Charlie Barnet and Stan Kenton. His establishment on the Coast gave him greater opportunities to play jazz, principally at The Lighthouse, and when restricted to the normal register of his instrument he produces a style of playing close to that of Shorty Rogers. A second Rogers disciple possessed of an even less-inhibited approach than Shorty is Don Fagerquist. Don, of Swedish-American extraction, possesses the qualities necessary for big-band work and he figured in both the Gene Krupa and Les Brown trumpet sections for lengthy periods. His solo work is constructive and exciting in the better sense of the term.


Dick Collins will be remembered as the trumpet mainstay of the Dave
Brubeck Octet. In common with other Brubeck associates he studied at Mills College under the modern French composer Darius Milhaud. He continued his studies under Milhaud in Paris and made his first jazz records there with Kenny Clarke for French Vogue. He has worked subsequently with many styles and sizes of bands from Alvino Rey to Woody Herman, and his association with the West Coast appears to have been more by accident than design. The first new trumpeter of distinction is Jack Sheldon, who has worked at The Lighthouse, recorded with Jimmy Giuffre and also with a Quartet under his own name. Tonally his approach is close to the Rogers style, but his solos are constructed with softer outlines.


A feature of the Pacific Coast style is the accent placed upon adaptability and versatility. Shorty Rogers has experimented with flugel horn, while trumpeter Maynard Ferguson took up the valve trombone. This latter development was occasioned by the work of Bob Enevoldsen, a sincere and gifted musician who gave the piston-operated trombone a new lease of life in jazz. In addition, Bob has recorded on tenor saxophone and double bass and is capable of playing trumpet as well as most of the reed instruments.


Furthermore, he has been responsible for several simple but effective arrangements. Another important valve trombonist is Bob Brookmeyer, a native of Kansas City and an inhabitant of the West Coast by choice. His work both with Stan Getz and Gerry Mulligan placed him before the jazz public, and the later recordings under his own name show the steady development of his own musical personality. His style is founded upon a firm love of the Count Basie principles, namely that jazz must swing all the time.


Stu Williamson, younger brother of pianist Claude Williamson, added the valve trombone as a double to his main instrument, the trumpet. On the more conventional slide trombone Milt Bernhart is the oldest-established member of The Lighthouse group, with an expressive and emotional approach to his solo work. The rich tone heard on such recordings as Solitaire with Kenton has become familiar on many small group recordings, notably Decca's "Jazz Studio Two" session. Herbie Harper, from Texas, played trombone in the Charlie Spivak band which worked in California during the nineteen-forties. He remained in Hollywood after Spivak's 1946 engagements and then became one of the first to join the coveted circle of studio men. His jazz playing is represented on two long-playing records under his own name for the Nocturne label, a third issue under the leadership of drummer George Redman for Skylark and a four-title session for the Trend label with clarinettist Abe Most. The records reveal him as a dependable if somewhat predictable soloist with a warm tone and an ample technique.


Turning to the reed instruments it becomes evident that this category has been a firm favourite with the West Coasters. The modern jazz movement had previously placed the accent on tenor and alto through the work of Lester Young and the late Charlie Parker, and it was no doubt these earlier influences which contributed towards the large-scale use of the saxophone. The clarinet did not seem suited to the West Coast style and there is probably no significance to be read into this virtually complete forbearance. Jimmy Giuffre used the clarinet for solo work, to heighten the Basie atmosphere in Shorty Courts The Count. In addition, he took solos on his own LP and on "Jazz Studio Two" revealing a soft-toned approach not completely in keeping with his forceful, robust work on tenor and baritone. Abe Most, a one-time Les Brown musician, recorded for Hollywood's Trend label and produced four titles which gave rise to much exaggerated praise and an attempt to foster Most as the replacement for Benny Goodman.


The first alto soloist of note in the new Hollywood school was Art Pepper, the principal jazz soloist with Kenton for several years. Despite the advent of several new arrivals, each hailed as a sensation, Pepper has emerged catalytically as the best in a highly competitive field. His natural and free sense of swing contains more of the true jazz spirit than many of his contemporaries. His solo work on record is as impressive with either large or small groups, for his playing imparts a sense of presence and personality. With Kenton he recorded his longest and best feature, the arrangement by Shorty Rogers which was named after Art himself. His Quartet and Quintet LPs for Discovery are most enjoyable, as are his solos, on both alto and tenor, with Shorty Rogers on Victor/H.M.V.


Bud Shank was a contemporary of Pepper in the Stan Kenton organization and, consequently, was accorded few solos. It was his later work on record with the Gerry Mulligan Tentette and the Afrodesia feature with Shelly Manne on Contemporary that confirmed him as a soloist rather than merely a good section man. His versatility has been demonstrated on many occasions, for he is a capable musician on tenor and baritone saxes and in 1953 he commenced the serious adaptation of the flute to jazz. In this respect he was not as successful as some of his East Coast contemporaries who had attempted the same task. The unusual flute sound neither helped nor hindered the first LP volume by guitarist Barney Kessel, and the subsequent flute and oboe duets between Shank and Bob Cooper have formed a more useful contribution to jazz. His best flute solo will be found on the Nocturne LP under his own name, the composition being Lotus Bud written by Shorty Rogers.


Herb Geller comes nearest to the standard set by Pepper as a jazz soloist pure and simple. His broad-toned alto has graced many recorded performances and his contribution to "Jazz Studio Two" places him well above his colleagues as a musician of sincerity and deep-seated jazz feeling. In comparison with Geller the work of Lee Konitz (who was resident in Hollywood for a time) and Paul Desmond sounds anaemic. Konitz became less introspective in his musical outlook during his term of service with the Stan Kenton Orchestra, for he was lucky enough to play in one of the most swinging bands ever to have played under the Kenton baton. Desmond's work has been almost inseparably linked with the playing of Dave Brubeck and as a complementary voice to Brubeck's piano style he is irreplaceable.


Lennie Niehaus, yet another Kenton alto player, exhibits enormous potential and is possessed of a prodigious technique. His first recordings for the Contemporary label were extremely impressive by virtue of Niehaus' length of melodic line, purity of tone and sense of swing. Despite these attributes his playing lacks the elusive jazz quality which would make him the equal of Pepper or Geller.


The tenor saxophone has attracted an almost equally large following. Jimmy Giuffre has used the instrument frequently, for it is ideally suited to his sense of humour. He indulged in excursions into the rhythm-and-blues field by way of his Big Girl and Big Boy recordings although he is capable of turning in more serious work when the occasion demands. His own LP on Capitol indicates that the tenor is his second best instrument and it is the larger baritone that gives him a better means of expression.


Bob Cooper concentrates on tenor apart from his occasional use of oboe and English horn. His solos have always been well constructed and competently played with a-tone reminiscent of the woodwind family. He acknowledges the influence of the Stan Getz school although he is by no means a complete copyist. On his instrument he is a greater technician and perfectionist than another ex-Kenton tenorman Bill Holman. Holman's solo playing contains more punch but less lightness and grace and it is for his arranging that he is most noteworthy.


Both Zoot Sims and Stan Getz have been identified with the West Coast in the middle fifties, Sims by virtue of his engagement with Stan Kenton and his subsequent settlement in California while Getz was a frequent visitor at the head of his Quartet and Quintet.


Jack Montrose is a more genuine West Coast jazzman, developing into a soloist after some years of work principally as an arranger and composer. He became staff arranger for Richard Bock's Pacific Jazz label and wrote for several Chet Baker and Bob Gordon sessions.


Bill Perkins qualifies for inclusion in this chapter despite his long association with the Woody Herman band. Perkins created the smooth tenor solo to be heard on Blues for Brando played by the Shorty Rogers Orchestra (H.M.V.).


Lastly, Dave Pell, a musician who has been heard most frequently as a member of the Les Brown band. Pell headed a most musicianly Octet for recording purposes using arrangements by Rogers, Marty Paich, Johnny Mandel and Wes Hensel and his smooth, sophisticated sound has been a pleasing addition to Hollywood's jazz scene.


The larger baritone saxophone was placed very firmly in perspective by Gerry Mulligan during the autumn of 1952 when he came to the West Coast. Around this instrument he formed a Quartet completed by trumpet, bass and drums and proved immediately that as a solo instrument the baritone had few if any, drawbacks. His playing undoubtedly influenced Bob Gordon, who took up the instrument and who played it in preference to the tenor whenever he was able. He made great progress and was soon given the opportunity to record an entire LP for Pacific Jazz under the title Meet Mr. Gordon. He may be heard almost equally well on the George Redman album for Skylark. As has been noted previously Giuffre plays baritone very successfully, as do both Geller and Shank. On one notable occasion in the Victor recording studios Shank, Art Pepper and Giuffre all played baritone on the Shorty Rogers recording of Sweetheart of Sigmund Freud.


There have been many critics who have opposed the use of the term "West Coast Jazz", claiming it was merely a coincidence that so much jazz talent was placed in the same area at the same time. Up to a point this assertion is correct, but it must be remembered that jazz can only progress and develop through influence and association. Over the years the close proximity of jazz musicians in Hollywood led inevitably to the passing on of ideas and means of expression and the subsequent creation of a style. This is particularly notable in a study of the pianists. The earliest identified keyboard artiste in the new school was Joe Albany, who aroused a great deal of interest by virtue of his work on some records with Lester Young for the Aladdin label. Most musicians who followed were enthusiastic about his early work and acknowledged the influence of his playing on their own work.


One of the first pianists to work at The Lighthouse after the foundation of the Sunday concerts there by Rumsey was the Negro Hampton Hawes. He was already known in the area and had recorded with Teddy Edwards and Herbie Harper for the Rex label. Of all the pianists to follow none have played with the same amount of uninhibited swing as Hawes. His earlier work with Negro musicians gives him an advantage over his contemporaries. Frank Patchen figured on some of the earlier concerts at The Lighthouse with Shorty Rogers' Giants and was replaced by Russ Freeman. Freeman became an established West Coaster relatively quickly, largely due to his work with the Chet Baker Quartet. His facile playing contains more than an element of the glibness associated with much of the Hollywood school. More so than ever before in jazz, the head has become master of the heart. Technically Freeman's playing is excellent and on record he is best heard in the company of Shelly Manne, principally on the Contemporary LP they made together and also on the long Night Letter for Emarcy.


Marty Paich has developed from an unspectacular pianist into a more important soloist and arranger. He studied under Mario Castelnuovo-Tedesco, the modern composer, and took a degree in composition at Los Angeles Conservatory of Music. All this did not prevent him from working with Shorty Rogers, where his economical, Basie-like style was ideally suited to the big band. He commenced writing in 1953 and representative examples will be found in Contemporary's Shelly Manne Vol. 2 (Dimension In Thirds) and "Jazz Studio Two" (Paicheck).


Claude Williamson arrived on the West Coast scene in 1953 when his discharge from the American Forces coincided with Russ Freeman's departure from The Lighthouse. Claude was not, however, an unestablished jazzman at this time, for in 1949 he had recorded a piano feature with Charlie Barnet under the tide Claude Reigns which brought him some measure of prominence. His earliest jazz influence was Teddy Wilson and his own playing later reveals a neat and orderly approach. While he has not the percussive driving force of Russ Freeman his work is hallmarked by an omnipresent tastefulness and a delicate sense of touch. He was one of the first to record for the "Kenton Presents Jazz" series on Capitol and may also be heard on the Bud Shank-Bob Cooper flute and oboe LP. His own composition for this latter album, Aquarium contains the inherent sense of elegance and delivery which makes his own playing so readily identifiable.


The remaining West Coast pianists of note include Maury Dell (who may be heard on George Redman's Skylark LP), Pete Jolly, who recorded first with Frank Rosolino and Shorty Rogers before being given a solo session for Victor, and Lorraine Geller, wife of Herb Geller. The list would be incomplete without mention here of Dave Brubeck. Brubeck now became the centre of his own esoteric school and his importance is assessed in the following chapter. As a technician he has improved slowly over the years, commencing with a touch sorely lacking in sensitivity and developing later into a musician better qualified to translate his own ideas into tangible form.


The remaining rhythm-section musicians are headed by the "veterans" Shelly Manne and Howard Rumsey. The formation of the Gerry Mulligan Quartet in 1952 emphasized the importance of the double bass as the pivot instrument. The work of Bob Whitlock and Carson Smith in this field pointed the way to future developments. Bassists previously content to mark time realized the true potentialities of their instruments, and the authoritative lines set down by both Whitlock and Smith caused a minor revolution. Joe Mondragon and Harry Babasin, both of whom had been resident in Hollywood for some years, reassessed their own importance and fell in with the new movement. Not since the days of Jimmy Blanton had the bass assumed such a position of respect and arrangers commenced to write in special parts for the instrument. At last it was realized that the correctly chosen notes played by the bass could imply a complex chord pattern.

Failing the availability of first-class musicians capable of choosing the unusual but accurate notes for themselves then the obvious solution was to score in the bass as a necessity to the strength of the group. Inspired by the success of the earlier exponents, new musicians such as Monty Budwig took their places behind the unwieldy but masterly instrument. In addition, Harry Babasin re-introduced his experiments with the 'cello in jazz. He had first recorded with this instrument on a Dodo Marmarosa session for Dial during 1947. With the founding of his own record company, Nocturne Records, he again placed the 'cello to the forefront as an interesting though not widely accepted jazz voice.


The leading guitarist resident on the Pacific Coast has been Barney Kessel, although he has hardly been a true West Coaster. After his unique contribution to Charlie Parker's 1947 record date and his stimulating work on Gene Norman's "Just Jazz" concerts, Barney became a familiar figure with the touring "Jazz At The Philharmonic" unit before making his home in Hollywood. He made two well-recorded albums for Contemporary under his own name, the first with Bud Shank, the second with Bob Cooper. His work on each places him at the very top of the list of performers on his instrument and his influence upon other guitarists is immediately apparent.


Howard Roberts was born in Arizona and came to jazz by way of "Country and Western Music"; in many ways his musical life being along parallel lines so his East Coast contemporary Johnny Smith. His resident Hollywood berth in the fifties has been with the Bobby Troup Trio, but when the occasion demands he is transformed into a dependable and accurate jazz soloist. He recorded with Bob Cooper in Capitol's "Kenton Presents" series and with the "Jazz Studio Two" and "Jazz Studio Three" assembled by Decca. He may also be heard on Bob Enevoldson's Nocturne LP and the Pacific Jazz album under Chico Hamilton's name. Laurindo Almeida, a Brazilian, got his first chance in jazz with the Stan Kenton Orchestra after the war and has been unrelenting in his attempts to wed jazz and Latin-American rhythms into a cohesive musical pattern. Although not a true jazz musician his work is extremely interesting and he has recorded several long-playing records for Capitol, Pacific Jazz and Coral.


On drums the tower of inspirational strength is Shelly Manne. The standard set by him is remarkably high and it is not surprising to find that he has few serious rivals. Larry Bunker continues to use the formulas laid down by Chico Hamilton with Mulligan and has also proved his worth as a vibes player on record with the Harry Babasin Quartet (Nocturne). Roy Harte came West from Brooklyn in the middle forties to work in a series of bands, including the Vido Musso group, which included Jimmy Giuffre and Stan Getz. His work in the recording studios is notable principally for its quantity, although his playing on jazz dates is good if somewhat unspectacular in comparison with Manne. Drummers Bobby White, Gene Gammage and George Redman have also contributed to the West Coast scene.


Finally to the vibraphone players, led by the veteran Red Norvo. Norvo has been associated with jazz since the late twenties, and his continued progress with the younger elements is not easy to understand. His original contemporaries had remained in the swing groove which they had helped to excavate, yet Norvo is capable of playing with his Trio (completed first by Tal Farlow and Charlie Mingus, and later by Jimmy Raney and Red Mitchell) without any apparent anachronistic drawbacks. He had been associated with Hollywood for some years and following his tour of Europe at the beginning of 1954 he returned to his home in the West and cut a series of records with studio assembled bands for Victor using arrangements by Shorty Rogers. Cal Tjader was the first drummer with Dave Brubeck and he doubles vibes effectively. It was on this latter instrument that he gained an entry into the George Shearing Quintet and developed an appetite for Latin-American rhythm experiments. Teddy Charles came West from New York and stayed for a couple of years. His "New Directions", which had startled some of the East Coast enthusiasts, are a long way from jazz and despite his attempts to fit the Hollywood school successfully, he remains, like Brubeck, the leader of a small school beyond the pale of the larger West Coast movement. He has recorded exclusively for Prestige and was, in fact, the company's Pacific Coast representative before returning East in 1954.


These, then, are the principal actors on the West Coast jazz stage. Their music and its value as a contribution to jazz progress will be assessed in the following chapter.”

The Composers of the West Coast School - from "Modern Jazz" by Morgan and Horricks

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


In a passing conversation with Gordon Jack, author of Fifties Jazz Talk: An Oral Retrospective and numerous essays for JazzJournal, I mentioned that I was in the process of putting together a three-part feature on Alun Morgan and Raymond Horrick’s Modern Jazz: A Survey Of Developments Since 1939.

He kindly sent along the following obituary that he wrote upon the passing of Raymond Horrick in 2005.

I thought it might be an interesting lead-in to this third and concluding part of the feature on the Morgan/Horrick collaboration on Modern Jazz as an indication, in the case of Horrick, of what excellent credentials were at work in the preparation of this book.

RAYMOND HORRICKS OBITUARY

Raymond Horricks was born on the 20th. April 1933 and was educated at the Xaverian College in Manchester. He was fluent in French and later studied for three years at the Sorbonne in Paris paying his way there as a waiter and a street sweeper.

He met Charlie Parker at the 1949 Paris Jazz Fair and returned to the city a few years later with Alun Morgan for the 1954 Jazz Fair, which featured Jonah Jones, Thelonious Monk and Gerry Mulligan. Two years later he collaborated with Alun on the book, Modern Jazz: A Survey Of Developments Since 1939.

In 1955 he joined Decca, where he worked for Peter Gammond who became a lifelong friend and it was thanks to Peter that he began writing sleevenotes for the Vogue Record Label. While with Decca he produced a number of recording sessions for Ted Heath many of which like The Creep, Siboney, Cloudburst, Malaguena and the Swingin’
Shepherd Blues became extremely popular. The latter, with an arrangement by Ken Moule became the band’s biggest hit reaching number 3 in the hit parade of 1958. He also produced Ebb Tide for Frank Chacksfield and Strawberry Fair and Pop Goes The Weasel for Anthony Newley.

Other artists that he worked with included Stanley Black, Mantovani, Edmundo Ross and Sir Thomas Beecham. He didn’t neglect his first love and over the years produced many jazz records for Alan Clare, Victor Feldman, Tony Kinsey, Bill Le Sage and Don Rendell. One of his very best albums featured Ronnie Ross and Alan Ganley with The Jazzmakers which has long been out of print but is now available again on Collectables.

In 1962 he transferred to the Pye label and had further hits with Johnny Keating’s Theme From Z Cars and Joe Brown’s A Picture Of You which became Number 1 in July 1962.

That year he produced Frank Sinatra’s Great Songs From Great Britain arranged by Robert Farnon on Reprise, and the following year he was in the control booth again for Sammy Davis Salutes The London Palladium also on Reprise.

He wrote extensively for magazines like Crescendo, Jazz Journal and Jazz Monthly and his books include works on Stephane Grappelli, Quincy Jones, Gil Evans, Miles Davis, John Coltrane and Gerry Mulligan – with a complete discography of commercial and private recordings included in the latter.

Ray’s interests ranged far beyond jazz because in recent years he also published books on Cardinal Richelieu, Sir Christopher Wren and
Napoleon’s, Marshal Ney.


On the 5th. March 2005 Raymond Horricks suffered a fatal heart attack at his home on the Isle Of Wight. He is survived by his ex-wife Sheila and his daughter Gabrielle whose Godfather was Ray’s old friend, the late Britt Woodman.


- Gordon Jack        

“IT BECAME OBVIOUS at an early stage in its history that West Coast jazz was to fall under the influence of composers and arrangers to a greater extent than almost any comparable school. Bearing in mind the personalities who helped to found and further the growth this was not surprising. Both Shorty Rogers and Jimmy Giuffre had reputations as writers long before the beginnings of The Lighthouse gatherings. Rogers had commenced his arranging career with the first Herman Herd when he played in a trumpet section with such men as Neal Hefti, Pete Candoli and the late Sonny Herman. Giuffre gained prominence with a later Herman band when his Four Brothers score set a new style for sax. section voicings. It is no exaggeration to say that Giuffre's conception of a reed team with a tenor lead was the first real contribution in this direction since the overwhelming influence of the clarinet-led reeds of the Glenn Miller Orchestra.

Rogers' style of writing became evident with his contribution to the Woody Herman and Stan Kenton libraries. Keen and Peachy, the original backing-on record to Woody's Four "brothers, reveals a fast, driving ensemble with the accent placed very firmly upon the swing and power of this singular band. The later More Moon,Keeper of the Flame and Tha's Right for the Capitol label some eighteen months afterwards contain the same basic elements. With the experience of Duke Ellington before him, Shorty had written for a definite group of musicians with their personalities and capabilities in mind. Similarly, when he wrote Jolly Rogers, Round Robin and, in particular, Art Pepper for the Kenton Orchestra the finished products were evidently designed for the performers.

Giuffre's first, and for some years his only successful composition was Four Brothers, which he wrote in 1947. This has been the fundamental difference between Giuffre and Rogers. With his solitary work Giuffre had created a minor revolution in big-band circles which has lasted for many years, while on the other hand Shorty merely produced a succession of good vehicles for the newer swing bands. When the establishment of the new Pacific Coast school became a fact it was Rogers who was responsible for the quantity production of compositions and arrangements, works invariably commissioned for particular recording sessions by particular bands.

Giuffre's output lagged behind by comparison and the scores he produced fell into three main categories. Firstly, the straightforward numbers which could be, and often were, interpreted by more than one band. Into this first division may be placed Four More, Four Others, Four Mothers, Pesky Serpent, Indian Club, Out of Somewhere and Safari. Secondly, the light-hearted excursions into the rhythm-and-blues field, notably Big Girl and Big Boy, which Jimmy's own slap-tongued, dirty-toned tenor played so well on record. Thirdly, the more serious compositions in which Giuffre became the controlling mind with the chosen musicians employed solely to interpret the composer's score. On record examples of this third subdivision of talent will be found in Fugue (Contemporary Shelly Manne Album No. 1), Alternation (Shelly Manne Album No. 2) and Sultana (Capitol album under Giuffre's own name). In addition, his longer composition Evolution was performed at Carnegie Hall during 1954.

In these later writings Giuffre has aimed at the atonal approach, that is where each instrumentalist is provided with a predetermined line. The resultant counterpoint gives the composition its harmonic content by virtue of the interweaving lines. Undoubtedly Giuffre's skill as a student has placed him above the vast majority of the remaining West Coasters, but on hearing some of his more advanced writings the inevitable question arises, is it jazz? His work should never be belittled, for he is not content to fall into line with the general trend of progress, it is simply that his experiments have taken him to the limit and sometimes beyond the confines of jazz as such.

If Giuffre could be introvert in his musical concepts then Rogers became the almost complete antithesis. With a small or large group under his leadership he can make stimulating, foot-tapping jazz which comes near to transcending the artificially created barriers between styles. The first true West Coast album of any importance was issued under the name of Shorty Rogers' Giants (Capitol) and forms an accurate picture of the earlier Lighthouse sounds. It will be noted immediately that despite the scored-in sections the group swings on all six tracks. The voicing of the instrumentation (trumpet, tenor, alto, French horn, tuba and rhythm) is not unlike the sound produced by the 1948/49 Miles Davis band, but here the resemblance ends. There are no attempts to create the fresh, inventive music of the East Coast group; the Giants are content to play swinging jazz with the soloists predominating in importance over the ensemble.

An aspect of this record, and one which was to diminish rather than increase on subsequent Hollywood sessions, is the feeling of happiness and carefree abandon, particularly in the leader's playing. Few soloists of this school have managed to sound so completely at ease as did Shorty Rogers and Art Pepper on that Capitol session. Some consciously-contrived improvisations lead to stultifying solos in which the last elements of swing have been removed as if by a vampire. Fortunately the leading soloists have recognized the vital importance of a beat to jazz and it would be unfair to level any criticism on this score against all the West Coasters.

Shorty's work packing the biggest punch in more than one sense of the term will be found on his first big-band Cool and Crazy LP for Victor, recorded in 1953. His writing for the various sections of the band, in particular the brass, was always masterly and the eight big-band scores saw the fruition of his experiments in this direction. The precise section work brings to mind the impact associated with Kenton's more lively bands and a perusal of Shorty's personnel reveals a generous helping of ex-Kentonites. The success of the hard-blown trumpets is due to the tireless energy of Maynard Ferguson who occupies the position of section leader. His previous playing was too often of an exhibitionist nature, but with Shorty's studio band it is evident that his true worth has been discovered. Sometimes playing with his fellows, sometimes a complete octave above, his power and accuracy stimulates the gathering into playing with a fire which is all too often missing on other sessions. In addition, the never-flagging drive of Shelly Manne's drums pushes the entire band in a far better manner than Shelly had done with either Herman or Kenton. It was unfortunate that when Shorty Rogers was given the opportunity of recording an album tribute to Count Basie some of the earlier zest was notable by its absence.

Rogers turned to Latin-styled rhythms for inspiration on several occasions, never once without a large degree of success. His earlier Viva Zapata (Contemporary) pointed the way towards the later La Mucura, Chiquito Loco, Mambo Del Crow, etc., stimulating exercises deriving much of their success from Marine's competent and authentic drumming effects.

Most of Shorty's work is immediately identifiable on record not only by its instrumental voicing but also by virtue of the fact that the majority of the compositions are designed for medium or fast tempos. In the earlier days of the West Coast movement it was unusual to hear any Rogers works at slow tempo and the first breakaway from this convention was the Afrodesia feature for Bud Shank with Shelly Manne (Contemporary). Later examples of Rogers’ ballads include Bunny and Pirouette (Victor Giants album), Lotus Bud and Jasmine (Bud Shank Nocturne LP). His simple, swinging figures have assumed a character of their own exemplified not only by his Swing Shift, Short Stop, Morpo and many others but also evident in the arrangements he wrote for the Dave Pell Octet sessions for the Trend label.

His sallies into the wider field of experimentalism have been fewer than Giuffre's although his Shapes, Motions, Colours for Shelly Marine's second Contemporary LP reflects an enquiring musical mind. Before leaving the music of Rogers and Giuffre one final recorded example should be mentioned. It is the album recorded in September 1954, under the self-explanatory title "The Three", for Lester Koenig's Contemporary label. Here the basic elements of West Coast jazz were assembled and given carte blanche choice of music. There is no better proof that as far as these three important founders are concerned, Jazz on the West Coast has run its course, for the music in this album is a far cry from the earlier experiments. Were it not for the known sincerity of all three the album might well be dismissed as pretentious, for the us of such devices as the whole tone scale on Three on a Row revives unpleasant memories of Kenton's fall from grace. As it is, "The Three" give a clear indication that the West Coast movement has passed the highest point of its trajectory and is in danger of falling into a morass of sterility and ostentation.

The third composer-arranger is not a true member of the new West Coast school although his influence, first in Hollywood and later throughout the jazz world has been lasting. Gerry Mulligan came West in the early part of 1952 after being an important member of the New York jazz circles for some years. Apart from his work with the Miles Davis band he had arranged for and played with the orchestras of Elliot Lawrence, Claude Thornhill and Jerry Wald and had taken part on several small-band recording sessions. The most important of these was the date for the Prestige label in September 1951 when he assembled a group of his own choosing and recorded six of his own compositions plus a marathon blues played by Gerry, Allen Eager and the George Wallington-led rhythm section entitled Mulligan's Too.

The germ of his later piano-less Quartet idea was already taking shape in his mind when he left New York. As he wrote in his album notes to the first Mulligan Quartet LP on Pacific Jazz:

"The idea of a band without a piano is not new. The very first jazz bands did not use them; how could they? They were either marching or riding in wagons. I was first made aware of the possibilities of a piano-less rhythm section by Gale Madden, and I agreed with her wholeheartedly that to have an instrument with the tremendous capabilities of a piano reduced to the role of crutch for the horn solo was unthinkable."

With the deletion of the piano from the jazz group the bass assumed a more important role for, in addition to keeping time, it was now more than ever essential for the bass player to choose his notes with care and accuracy. In a unit with a larger instrumentation it would have been easier to gloss over the lack of harmonic guidance by scoring in some of the horns to give depth to the chord changes. Mulligan, however, elected to form a Quartet with only two front-line instruments. One of his chief reasons for the four-piece group was the original meeting between Gerry and a then little-known trumpeter named Chet Baker. Baker and Mulligan discussed the project and decided to attempt a tangible creation of their theory. Due to the original compatibility of temperament existing between the two the Quartet was a success. Gerry had chosen his men carefully and had turned the apparent limitations of the personnel into an asset by virtue of its non-restrictive and unified outlook.
The all-important bass part was handled first by Bob Whitlock and later by Carson Smith. Each brought a new standard of bass playing not only to the Quartet but to the West Coast movement. The string instrument assumed its correct role as a pivot about which the unit functioned as a complete entity. The first drummer was Chico Hamilton, whose crisp brushwork can only be qualified by the description, perfect. Larry Bunker, who followed him, was confronted with the achievements of his predecessor and rose to the occasion manfully. [Nonsense. If truth be told, Chico is lucky that he didn’t have to follow in Larry’s footsteps because he would have lost his way, rapidly.]

The front-line instrumentalists worked always in complete accord. Baker's sensitive and mellow-toned trumpet was the ideal partner to Mulligan's forceful and always swinging baritone. Less than a decade before the mere idea of a baritone saxophone sharing the honours with a trumpet would have been rejected. Harry Carney's work with Ellington was, technically, above reproach, but not even a man of Carney's efficiency on this clumsy instrument would have considered the project with any degree of seriousness. Serge Chaloff proved that the baritone was something more than just an anchor to the reed section, now Mulligan showed the world that the big horn had enormous potentialities as a solo voice.

The majority of the Quartet's library was composed of Mulligan originals and the entire book was fashioned to fit the group by Gerry's own arranging talents. The first recording session was for Richard Bock's Pacific Jazz label, a company which was to set a new standard of recording fidelity in the field of small-group jazz. A second album was cut for the Los Angeles Fantasy label and then a subsequent return to Bock for a third LP on which four titles added alto saxist Lee Konitz. Lee, of course, had worked with Gerry in the Miles Davis band, but his addition to an already perfect Quartet was nothing more than an interesting break with routine.

In February 1953 disc jockey Gene Norman hired Mulligan's unit for a further Quartet album and a Tentette LP subsequently sold to Capitol. On this latter session Gerry augmented his regular group with a second trumpet, a trombone, alto, French horn, tuba and a second baritone sax. to produce a sound reminiscent of the Davis/Capitol band. On some titles he played piano himself in a slightly fumbling George Wallington style. Although interesting and successful in themselves the Tentette titles are not as inventive or as stimulating as the Quartet recordings. A direct comparison is possible on Walkin’ Shoes,, which Mulligan made with both groups. The original version (Pacific Jazz) is delightful with intriguing hints at the harmonies due to the instrumentation which limited every chord to three notes. On the Tentette version it is possible to hear the complete progression as opposed to the veiled implications. The result is, almost inevitably, an anticlimax: the warm intimacy of the foursome has been replaced by a certain stiffness due to the presence of the accomplished but unfamiliar musicians.

With the Quartet there were few occasions when the piano would have helped, so well had the formula been conceived and applied. On notably rare exceptions to the general rules it became necessary to fill out the harmonies behind a soloist, usually trumpeter Chet Baker. On record, both Darn That Dream and My Funny Valentine (Pacific Jazz and Fantasy respectively) are helped by the addition of extra notes sung by the bassist and drummer plus Gerry's own voice during his instrumentally tacit passages. The effect is unusual, almost ethereal, and certainly in keeping with the mood of the performances.

Mulligan did not, at this time, confine his arranging to the realms of his own Quartet but found time to write for a Claude Thornhill session for the Trend label (Five Brothers, Jeru and Poor Little Rich Girl) as well as contributing Young Blood to a new LP by Stan Kenton which had the generic heading "New Concepts of Artistry in Rhythm". The latter, in particular, has shown Gerry's fine grasp of big-band scoring at a time when his musical thoughts must have been filled with the problems of his own small group. He later arranged his own Walkin' Shoes for Kenton and turned in a few more scores on standards, two of which, Crazy Rhythm and I've Got You Under My Skin were recorded by the band.

Towards the middle of 1953 Gerry suffered a number of personal setbacks, one of which placed him outside the musical scene for some months. In this interim period Chet Baker left to form his own group (and let it be said here that his best solos on record remained those to be heard with the Mulligan Quartet despite a subsequent variety of settings and surroundings under his own name). When Gerry returned to the jazz world early in 1954 he reformed his Quartet with a completely altered personnel. In place of Baker he employed valve trombonist Bob Brookmeyer while the bass and drums were handled first by Bill Anthony and Frank Isola respectively and, later, Red Mitchell in place of Anthony. It was this latter Quartet which he brought to the 3rd Paris Jazz Fair in June 1954 and it was at once noticeable that Gerry was aiming at a re-creation of his recorded success even to the extent of typing Brookmeyer to Baker's previous solos. This may be taken as the culmination of the Quartet formula, for Gerry has since expressed the desire to disband and to write for a larger group of his own. Nevertheless, the importance of the Mulligan formula cannot be over-emphasized and its effect on rhythm sections in particular has proved of lasting value.

The fourth West Coast musician of major importance has been Dave Brubeck. Brubeck's music is more esoteric than the majority of the Rogers-Giuffre-Mulligan output and his influence has extended little beyond the confines of his own musical circle. In this respect he may be considered to be the Pacific Coast equivalent of New York's Lennie Tristano. His studies at musical colleges and with the modern composer Darius Milhaud gave him a good grounding. This earlier training has been carefully emphasized by his adherents, but such a basic education is not unusual in the newer school of jazz musicians, as witness the formal education afforded to Bud Powell, Jay Jay Johnson and the late Fats Navarro.

Brubeck's success is, in retrospect, difficult to understand. His own piano playing was technically imperfect for many years and his earlier experiments were confined to a relatively limited area and audience. His close association with the Fantasy label enabled him to record with a greater freedom than might otherwise have been possible; the only conclusion to be drawn is that his quantity output on record coupled to his pleasant personality and complete musical sincerity won over a surprisingly large following. This should not be construed as meaning that none of his earlier work is of importance, for the reverse is the case. The first experiments with the Octet which contained trumpeter Dick Collins and altoist Paul Desmond produced provocative music with an obvious striving for the elusive road to progress. Dave's arrangement of The Way You Look Tonight for this group is an honest attempt at writing a jazz score which lasts for the majority of its three-minute length as opposed to the ensemble-solo sequence routine. The Octet was helped by the presence of tenorman Dave Van Kriedt, who was responsible for the scoring of Love Walked ln, September in the Rain and Let's Fall in Love as well as for the composition of Prelude and Fugue on Bop Themes, the latter containing one of the earliest attempts at writing a jazz fugue.

Financial and personnel reasons terminated the life of the Octet and the sound which was later compared with the voicing of the Miles Davis band was no more. Brubeck reorganized his musical ideas along piano-bass-drums lines and there are many representative examples of this era on Fantasy records. Not all the performances are successful, but the failures are in the minority. Brubeck's immature keyboard work at this time lacked gradation of touch and his apparent tendency to hammer home the piano, bass and drum parts on his own instrument made for distinctive, if somewhat repetitive music.

The addition of alto saxist Paul Desmond to this line-up seemed to coincide with a conscious attempt on Brubeck's part to improve his own playing. Later recorded examples give ample proof of the tremendous rapport existing between Brubeck and Desmond. The leader commences an idea, an inspirational flash, which is passed on to the horn player, who expands on it before passing the ball back into the piano court. One of the best examples of this kind will be found in the Fantasy "Jazz at Pacific College" album, where Brubeck and Desmond build convincingly and logically on the well-tried structure of Kern's All the Things You Are. The same LP contains a lovely example of Brubeck's improved solo playing as he extracts the full beauty of the melodic and harmonic qualities associated with Laura.

None of the remaining arrangers has assumed the importance of the foregoing personalities as large-scale West Coast influences. The work of Giuffre, Rogers, Mulligan and, to a lesser extent, the Brubeck coterie of musicians has been the stimulant behind the Hollywood movement to compose and arrange. Pianist Marty Paich scored You're My Thrill for the first Shelly Manne album and followed it up with his Love Walked In and I Married an Angel for Chet Baker's Columbia album. These together with the brief routines sketched out for Laura and Darn That Dream (Jazz Studio Two) are of a relatively straightforward and melodic nature. His first breakaway from convention came with his own composition Dimension in Thirds for the Shelly Manne Vol. 2 album, recorded in December 1953. In his album notes to this LP he implied that contemporary jazz writing is moving towards symphonic composition, making the pregnant statement:

"The future holds one important question: how will the jazz composer be able to integrate the sounds of Bartok, the rhythms of Stravinsky, the twelve-tone scale of Schoenberg and still maintain the most important element in jazz, to swing."

Despite these ominous words his own Paicheck for Jazz Studio Two (Decca) six months later proved to be basically a jazz composition in the true meaning of the term, and the nine musicians on the session found no difficulties in making it swing.

John Graas came to jazz via the Cleveland Symphony Orchestra, Tex Beneke and Stan Kenton. His French horn was used first as an instrument to add colour to an ensemble but, due to his continual contact with Giuffre, Rogers and the other leading West Coasters, his interest in jazz has been broadened to the extent that he is now taking extemporized solos with the Hollywood groups. When he recorded an LP under his own name for the Trend label he wrote some of the material for the date, including a work with a 6/4 time signature. For Herbie Harper's second Nocturne album he arranged Julie is Her Name and Indian Summer as well as composing Bananera and 6\4 Mambo. For Jazz Studio Two he wrote Here Come the Lions and Graas Point (the latter with a fugal section at the mid-point of the composition) and arranged Do It Again.

The interest in his work for this Decca date aroused more widespread enthusiasm than any of his previous attempts at jazz writing. The immediate outcome was yet a third twelve-inch LP in the Jazz Studio series, this time devoted entirely to Graas' compositions and arrangements. His predilection for 6/4 time is again apparent here with his work 6/4 and Even.
Mulliganesque and Rogeresque are clever imitations of the two writers’ styles while My Buddy, The Charleston and 12th Street Rag comprise the standard material. The remaining excerpts from Graas own Symphony No. i in F Minor are interesting reflections of a classically-trained mind turned to jazz.

Jack Montrose, a capable tenor soloist, has written for Chet Baker (Dot's Groovy and Little Duet] as well as a more advanced piece for Shelly Manne entitled Etude de Concert. In an album of experimental works by other West Coast composers Montrose's composition comes closest to being a genuine attempt to write a longer jazz work with a recognizable form. The theme is developed extremely well and the musicians as personalities are not subjugated by the composer. Montrose has said of the work: "Etude de Concert is first and last a jazz composition. The main objective I had in mind was that it must swing."

Bill Holman, the Stan Kenton arranger, has written prolifically for West Coast small groups in a style best described as midway between Rogers and Mulligan. His originals are marked by the possession of strong melodic lines and an easy atmosphere which rarely loses sight of jazz's main characteristics. He has written for his own "Kenton Presents" album on Capitol as well as similar LPs by Frank Rosolino and Sal Salvador. His writing is closer to the established jazz form than the output of his Kenton colleague Bill Russo, whose work verges dangerously near pretentiousness. Russo was responsible for three of the tracks on Shelly Manners first LP, one of which, Sweets, was dedicated to trumpeter Harry Edison.

The remaining composers and arrangers consist of musicians who have been encouraged to write by the activities around them. Tenor saxist Bob Cooper wrote some simple but effective lines for his own Capitol album, plus a pair of more advanced works, Jazz Invention for a Howard Rumsey Lighthouse album (Contemporary) ranks as his best and most inventive work with a calm, collected feeling and a sense of good taste. Divertimento for Brass and Rhythm, written for the second Shelly Manne album, does not quite attain the previous standard. Bob Enevoldsen wrote arrangements for his own Quintet session (Nocturne) and also for pianist-vocalist Bobby Troup (Capitol). Alto saxist Lennie Niehaus has produced some extremely effective writing for his Quintet and Octet sessions (Contemporary), the most striking original being Whose Blues, which contains two choruses of collective improvisation by alto, tenor and baritone. Johnny Mandel, a New York musician and arranger of note, has been identified with the West Coast movement since he moved to the Coast. Representative examples of his California work will be found in two Chet Baker albums; You Don't Know What Love Is, Love, The Wind and I Love You for the Columbia session with strings and Tommyhawk for a Pacific Jazz date.

In evaluating the West Coast scene, its music and musicians, an abundance of inventiveness and technique is immediately apparent. Never before has the jazz world experienced such large-scale enthusiasm over the written part or such a variety of attempts to further the path of progress. In themselves the experiments are rarely without some interest, but all too often the importance of the basic jazz essentials has been ignored either intentionally or unintentionally in the search for new ideas. The true development of the jazz idiom does not rest in the hands of the Hollywood musicians.”




Joe Caro and The Met Band - "Every Dog Has It's Day"

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


The music and members of Joe Caro’s Met Band remind me a lot of a New York version of the Los Angeles based group of musicians called The Wrecking Crew (sometimes referred to as the Clique or the First Call Gang, occasionally credited as the Phil Spector Wall of Sound Orchestra).

The Wrecking Crew was a loose-knit circle of Los Angeles' top studio session musicians whose services were constantly in demand during their heyday in the 1960s and early 1970s. Included in this group were Don Randi, Al De Lory, Carol Kaye, Bill Pitman, Tommy Tedesco, Irving Rubins, Roy Caton, Jay Migliori, Hal Blaine, Earl Palmer, Steve Douglas, and Ray Pohlman.

The Wrecking Crew was on records by Frank Sinatra, Nancy Sinatra, Jan & Dean, Sonny & Cher, Barry McGuire, and The Mamas & the Papas, They were sometimes used as "ghost players" on recordings credited to rock groups, such as the Byrds' debut hit rendition of Bob Dylan's "Mr. Tambourine Man" (1965), the first two albums by the Monkees, and the Beach Boys'Pet Sounds (1966).

All of these players were steeped in Rhythm and Blues and Jazz and, as a result, could bring an informed Rock beat to the music they were recording. They were also very aware of the new advancements in audio recording technology and this provided an added dimension to the contributions they were able to make to the music.

Much of the music they were recording was mixed, re-mixed, re-mastered, dubbed, over-dubbed, echoed, multi-tracked; none of which made these musicians uncomfortable. They were at home in the recording studios because they understood that the recording engineer and his/her assistants was going to play a huge role in the sound of the final product.

Although they were ridiculously busy in the studios, from time-to-time, members of The Wrecking Crew played casual gigs at parties, weddings and other special occasions for family members and friends. Lord knows they didn’t need the schimolies.

Often at these gatherings, they would take a hit song by a popular artist or rock group and give it a completely different spin: change the tempo; change the beat; embellish the chord progressions. They had the musical skills and abilities to play these recognizable tunes in a way that was uniquely their own.

Sadly, there are no commercial recordings of these reinterpretations by The Wrecking Crew [not to my knowledge, anyway].

Enter Joe Caro and The Met Band.

On their their new CD Every Dog Has It's Day [Innsbruck IRJC 148], as Chris Di Girolamo explains in his media release: “you hear classics from Bob Dylan, Jimi Hendrix and Carole King and one Great American Songbook standard and your first thought may very well be, I've never heard those songs played like that before! Then it occurs to you that the original compositions by Caro — the acclaimed guitarist and vocalist who's been an in-demand session musician in New York for decades — are equally exciting and original, pumped with soul and adrenaline and sharp arrangements and some of the most virtuosic musicianship imaginable! You immediately wonder, just who is this guy?!”

With a release date of October 6th, 2017, the editorial staff at JazzProfiles wanted to broaden the awareness of the new CD by guitarist Joe Caro & The Met Band, especially so for those with easy access  to the greater New York City area because of upcoming CD pre-release and release performances by Joe Caro & The Met Band featuring Joe Caro (guitar/ lead Vox) Aaron Comess (drums) Robbie Kondor (keys) Tom 'Bones' Malone (trumpet/ sax) Aaron Heick (sax) Mark Egan (bass)

Pre-Release Event with CD Signing / Meet & Greet
Wednesday, Oct 4th The Cutting Room, NYC
44 East 32nd Street 7:30pm (Doors open 7pm)

Joe Caro & The Met Band CD Release Event
Sunday, Oct 8th Rockwood Music Hall Stage 2
196 Allen Street, NYC 9:00pm (Doors open 8:30pm)

The album was produced, mixed and mastered by Grammy nominated and multi-platinum award winner, Roman Klun, at His House-Innsbruck Studios.


Two-for-the-Show’s Chris Di Girolamo media information sheet offer this description of the musicians and the music on Every Dog Has It's Day [Innsbruck IRJC 148].

“When you hear the cover songs on Joe Caro & the Met Band's Every Dog Has His Day—classics from Bob Dylan, Jimi Hendrix and Carole King and one Great American Songbook standard — your first thought may very well be, I've never heard those songs played like that before! Then it occurs to you that the original compositions by Caro — the acclaimed guitarist and vocalist who's been an in-demand session musician in New York for decades—are equally exciting and original, pumped with soul and adrenaline and sharp arrangements and some of the most virtuosic musicianship imaginable! You immediately wonder, just who is this guy?!

You've undoubtedly already heard his work. Caro has lent his talents to the likes of Bette Midler, Blue Oyster Cult,Carly Simon, Dr. John, Bobby McFerrin,Gato Barbieri, Michael McDonald, the Fania All-stars, Chaka Khan, Randy Brecker and many others. He's also toured with everyone from Jon Bon Jovi to the Eagles, James Taylor, Lenny Kravitz, Aretha Franklin, Crosby, Stills & Nash, and Stanley Clarke. Joe Caro has served in the house bands on TV shows such as The Late Show with David Letterman, Saturday Night Live and The Grammy Awards and done countless recording sessions for TV commercials and movies. In the '90s he formed BFD with drummer Steve Ferrone and bassist Will Lee, doing the NYC club circuit with live shows that featured guest artists including Donald Fagen, Pat Metheny, the Brecker Brothers, and Felix Cavaliere of the Rascals.

Caro has long been a regular on the New York underground scene, fronting an all-star band that included trumpeter Chris Botti, saxman Lenny Pickett, and Late Show drummer Anton Fig, performing every Tuesday night at the city's Metropolitan Cafe. What started out as a two-week gig went on for eight years and became the home base for many New York City session musicians.

Impressive indeed, but even that packed resume can't prepare the listener for the originality and sheer exuberance that permeates Every Dog Has His Day. The follow up to Joe Caro & the Met Band's 2013 Live in New York City and Caro's 2011 solo effort Home Alone, the new release utilizes several of the most renowned players on the NYC scene — including drummer Fig and Letterman bandleader Paul Shaffer contributing organ — on eight original tunes plus the aforementioned crisp new arrangements of Dylan's "Highway 61 Revisited," Hendrix's "Fire," Gerry Goffin and Carole King's "Natural Woman" and the Harold Arlen/Johnny Mercer nugget "That Old Black Magic."

Reviewing the Met Band's previous release, Blues Blast magazine wrote, "It is undeniable that Live in New York City is an excellent album, and it captures the energy and refined talent that Joe Caro and the Met Band brings to the stage."

That's all very true, but they were only getting started. Every Dog Has His Day truly takes this breathtaking collective to the next level.

For more information visit:


"Willie Dennis" by Gordon Jack

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


For all the harmful ways the Internet can be used, one of its many salubrious contributions to mankind is the manner in which it facilitates the coming together of people who share common interests.


Such is the case with Gordon Jack’s frequent appearances on these pages.


Gordon lives in England and we’ve never met. The internet and Jazz brought us together. Through this communications vehicle, Gordon has reached out on many occasions over the years to generously allow the editorial staff at JazzProfiles to present his masterful articles about Jazz and its creators.


We couldn’t be more grateful.


Gordon is the author of Fifties Jazz Talk: An Oral Retrospective and a frequent contributor to JazzJournal.


Willie Dennis was one of the great individualists on the trombone [Bill Harris, Jimmy Knepper and Frank Rosolino also come to mind in this regard].


Brian Priestly, the author of a critical biography on bassist Charles Mingus who had a penchant for bringing Jazz individualists into his various bands, offers this explanation of what made Willie Dennis’ style so unique:


“His playing is characterized by extreme agility and a legato style in which a combination of lip and slide movements is used to avoid conventional articulation by tongueing.”


Here’s Gordon’s take on Willie.


“It’s a long time ago but I still remember buying Gerry Mulligan’s 1961 Concert Jazz Band recording – A Concert In Jazz - and playing it almost ceaselessly over the next few weeks. Gary McFarland’s Chuggin was one of many gems and it featured trombonist Willie Dennis who was a new name to me at the time. Unlike his contemporaries who had mostly fallen under the spell of the great J.J.Johnson, his roots were clearly in the more expressive Bill Harris School. Almost free of articulation and barely seeming to tongue at all his use of slurs and glissandos created overtones as he moved between slide positions – often alternate slide positions.


Many years later I asked Eddie Bert who knew him well to explain how he did this: “Willie had a unique style and sound playing some notes out of the usual positions and doing something we call ‘Crossing the Grain’. The trombone has seven positions and each one has a series of overtones starting with an octave, then a fifth, then a fourth and a third and as you get higher the intervals are smaller. If you move quickly from the first position to the fourth for example you can play these overtones up high and ‘Cross the Grain’ which Willie did a lot”.


Willie Dennis (William DeBerardinis) was born on the 10th January 1926 in Philadelphia and was  mostly self- taught on the trombone. He began working with the popular Philadelphia-based big band led by Elliot Lawrence on the local WCAU radio station. He made his recording debut with Lawrence in 1946 on a 78 rpm single featuring vocalists Jack Hunter and Rosalind Patton. An interesting but short-lived addition to the band at that time was Mitch Miller on oboe. Dennis was on two broadcasts with Elliot later that year which have subsequently been released commercially – the Meadowbrook Ballroom in New Jersey and the Hotel Pennsylvania in New York City. In the late forties he also worked with Claude Thornhill and Sam Donahue but did not record with them.


Around 1951 he began studying with Lennie Tristano at his studio on 317 East 32nd Street in NYC joining a group of students that included Lee Konitz, Warne Marsh, Don Ferrara, Ted Brown, Billy Bauer, Peter Ind, Sal Mosca and Ronnie Ball. In his book Jazz Visions Peter Ind says, “Some of the most exciting musical times I remember were with Lee, Warne. Don and Willie playing some of those incredible lines composed by Lennie, Lee and Warne. Lennie recorded some of this music but I have no idea whether the tapes still exist.” Willie along with Marsh. Ferrara, Mosca and Ind would occasionally travel to Konitz’s house in Elmhurst, Long Island to rehearse. Lee once told me that he considered Willie to be a, “Wonderful trombonist and a lovely guy but I didn’t know him that well because he used to drink and hang out at places like Jim & Andy’s. Being a family man I didn’t hang out there.”


Regular work was scarce though and sometimes the musicians had to take day jobs. Ind and Konitz both worked occasionally in the mail-room at the British Information Office and Dennis took temporary employment as an attendant at the Museum of Modern Art. Coming from a relatively affluent background Marsh probably did not have quite the same financial pressures as the others but he did give occasional saxophone lessons. His father was the celebrated cinematographer Oliver T. Marsh whose credits included David Copperfield, A Tale Of Two Cities and The Great Ziegfield. Sal Mosca, Peter Ind and Don Ferrara taught throughout their careers and around 1955 Mosca gave piano lessons to a very young Bob Gaudio who wrote numerous hits for the Four Seasons.


We have Bob Sunenblick to thank for a fascinating insight into the trombonists’s work with Tristano. In 2014 Uptown Records released a previously unissued double CD of Tristano’s sextet performing at the Blue Note in Lennie’s home town of Chicago in 1951. The other members of the group on this historically important release were Lee Konitz, Warne Marsh, Buddy Jones and Mickey Simonetta. The billing on the illuminated marquee was, “Lennie Tristano With His Great Band and Slim Gaillard’s Trio”. An intriguing if somewhat incongruous combination which might explain the bizarre request for Tennessee Waltz which was a big hit at the time from a member of the audience. Presumably Peter Ind, Arnold Fishkin, Al Levitt or Jeff Morton who regularly accompanied Tristano were unavailable which explains the presence of Jones and Mickey Simonetta. Jones was playing bass with Buddy DeFranco at the time and went on to perform with Elliot Lawrence, Al Cohn, Joe Newman and Manny Albam among many others. The obscure Simonetta was a local drummer and his only other recordings were with Danny Bloc in 1953 and 1954.


Standards were always a rich vein of inspiration for the Tristano school and the 14 Uptown titles are either well known tunes or songbook contrafacts: Sound Lee (Too Marvellous For Words), Two Not One (I Can’t Believe You’re In Love With Me), Sax Of A Kind (Fine And Dandy), Background Music (All Of Me), No Figs (Indiana), Palo Alto (Strike Up The Band), Judy (Don’t Blame Me) and Tautology (Idaho). Just as an aside when Tristano announces Judy, “Written for a very nice lady” he does not inform the audience that he wrote it for his wife Judy Moore Tristano. There are two versions of All The Things You Are and it is worth pointing out what Jerome Kern’s sophisticated harmonies continue to mean to Lee Konitz. In a Down Beat interview he once said, “I could just spend the rest of my time playing All The Things You Are” and as if to stress that point again he told writer Andy Hamilton, “I mean that”. Willie’s powerful, choppy phrasing combines well with the more cerebral, vibrato-free work of Konitz and Marsh and he has his own ballad feature on These Foolish Things where he is centre stage. Reviewing the engagement in Down Beat, Jack Tracy called Dennis, “A fabulously facile musician who comes close to Warne’s and Lee’s standards.”


In September 1953 he made his first album with Charles Mingus on a live date with three other trombones in the line-up – J.J.Johnson, Kai Winding and Benny Green. It was essentially a jam session recorded on Mingus’ own Debut label at the Puttnam Central Club in Brooklyn. All four trombones stretch out at length and Willie certainly holds his own in this heavy company on numbers like Move, Wee Dot, Ow and Now’s The Time. When the album was reissued in 1964 Ira Gitler gave it three and a half stars in Down Beat. A month later Dennis performed with Mingus’ octet and is heard briefly on Miss Bliss.


In March 1956 he performed on Englishman Ronnie Ball’s first and only date as a leader in the USA. The pianist had arrived in New York in 1952 and immediately began studying with Tristano and for this recording he added fellow student Ted Brown to the front line on tenor. Wendell Marshall and Kenny Clarke who had worked with Tristano the year before were recruited to add their subtle uplift to the rhythm section. The leader included two of his originals Pennie Packer (a minor variant of Pennies FromHeaven) and Citrus Season (based on Limehouse Blues). This was Ted Brown’s first recording date and he contributed Feather Bed (You’d Be So Nice To Come Home To) and Little Quail (I’ll Remember April) to the repertoire. He also transcribed Lester Young’s famous 1940 Tickle Toe solo calling it Prez Says. Learning classic jazz solos was a regular Tristano teaching device and another good example of this practice is a 1957 Lee Konitz date with Don Ferrara. On Billie’s Bounce they play Charlie Parker’s four choruses from the 1945 date with Miles Davis. The unison is so perfect that one could be forgiven for thinking they must be reading it, however Ferrara confirmed to me they were actually playing from memory.


Later that year he did a tour with Charles Mingus in a group that included Bunky Green, Wynton Kelly and Dannie Richmond. They travelled across country playing Washington D.C., Los Angeles, San Francisco and Vancouver before returning to New York for a booking at Birdland. Willie then decided to leave Mingus to concentrate on studio work and recommended Jimmy Knepper as his replacement. 1957 was the year he proved to be an elegant spokesman for his instrument when Metronome published his essay – The History of the Trombone – in their March issue.

For most of that year he was a member of Woody Herman’s Fourth Herd sitting next to his original inspiration Bill Harris in the section. “The first time I heard Bill Harris” Willie once said, “I knew that he was the one who was doing anything new on the trombone. I went to hear that Herman band as many times as I could and bought all their records just to listen to that Harris sound. I knew it was the sound I wanted for my own blowing”.  He joined in January when the band appeared on the Jerry Lewis TV Show and stayed with Herman for most of 1957. Harris along with Jack Jenny was Herman’s favourite trombonist so Bill obviously took care of the trombone solos himself.


He joined Benny Goodman for a short European tour in May 1958 that included a week performing at the Brussels World Fair. Zoot Sims was in the band and after the tour he and Willie were invited by Joachim-Ernst Berendt to join Kenny Clarke for a concert in Baden Baden, Germany with some local musicians. The trombonist is heard on Blue Night, These Foolish Things, I’ll Remember April and Trottin’. Back in the USA he re-joined Woody Herman for a hugely successful three month tour of South America and the Caribbean under the auspices of the State Department. Early in 1959 he performed on Mingus’s Blues And Roots album and is heard on an infectious Wednesday Night Prayer Meeting. For the next year or so he was usually to be found working with Buddy Rich’s small group at Birdland with either Phil Woods or Seldon Powell as the other horn. He visited Brazil with Rich in 1960 which was the year he recorded a particularly fine album with the drummer titled The Driver along with Seldon Powell, Marky Markowitz, Mike Mainieri and Earl May. He is particularly impressive on Big Leg Mary, Straight No Chaser, Bloody Mary, Night In Tunisia and Miss Bessie’sCookin’. For all his brilliance in powering a big band it is sometimes forgotten what a sympathetic and very subtle drummer Buddy Rich could be in a small group situation.


Don Ferrara who was a charter member of Gerry Mulligan’s CJB told me how Willie came to join the band, “Gerry already had Bob Brookmeyer but he wanted another strong soloist in the trombone section so a couple of months before we left for Europe, Willie Dennis joined us and he was perfect. I had first met him when he was with Elliot Lawrence in 1948 and he was a very good friend of mine. He started studying with Lennie and his playing was just beautiful. He had very good chops and great time with a soft texture to his sound…he was very spontaneous immediately reacting to what was happening. He was also a very good cook and if you ate at his house you ate well.” Brookmeyer too was very happy to have him in the band, “Willie and I loved to work together. We tried to give him all the solo room we could on pieces that suited him, bearing in mind that I was the second banana and featured soloist. He was a very unusual player because he didn’t seem to tongue at all and I don’t know how he did that but he was wonderful to work with. Later on when Clark Terry and I had our little band (at the Half-Note) he would be quite happy if I sent Willie in when I had to have a night off. Of course Willie Dennis and Don Ferrara came from the Lennie Tristano school and all his students had a very individual voice”.


His first recording with the CJB was at a 1960 concert in Santa Monica. The band then travelled to Europe for performances in Gothenburg, Milan, Basel and Paris. His solo opportunities sitting next to Brookmeyer were just as limited as they had been with Woody Herman when Bill Harris was his section-mate. On their return to New York things changed a little. One of Brookmeyer’s regular solos was on Blueport but during a residency at the Village Vanguard he let Willie take the solo, “He played so individually and well…we had to give him something to play. He deserved it”. He stretches out inventively for eight choruses, perfectly at home despite the blistering tempo of some seventy bars to the minute. The following year the CJB recorded probably its most ambitious album (A Concert In Jazz) which included George Russell’s magnum opus - All About Rosie. Mulligan described Gary McFarland as  “A Godsend” and he contributed not only Weep but Chuggin’ to the date which was a notable feature for Dennis’ utterly relaxed, laid back sense of swing.


In 1961 he married singer Morgana King who had previously been married to Tony Fruscella. Willie had performed on her 1959 album (The Greatest Songs Ever Swung) and she had visited Brazil with him when he was there with Buddy Rich. The CJB’s last studio recording in 1962 featured Willie on Bridgehampton Strut. He carried on working with the band but it was becoming increasingly difficult for Mulligan to keep it on the road. Their last engagement was at Birdland in December 1964 not long before ‘The Jazz Corner Of The World’ finally closed down for business. By then Thad Jones had been added to the trumpets, Phil Woods had taken Gene Quill’s place on alto and clarinet  and the tenor solos were in the very capable hands of Richie Kamuca who was replaced by Al Cohn for part of the booking. Ira Gitler had this to say in a Down Beat review of an earlier CJB performance that year at Birdland, “If this band cannot work when it wants to, there is something very wrong with the state of music in the United States”.


Willie Dennis died when he was involved in a car accident in New York City on the 8th. July 1965. Eddie Bert gave me the details, “I saw him the night he was killed because we were both in Joe Harbor’s bar across the street from Birdland. There was a sailor there who was pretty juiced and kept asking if he could take Willie home. Eventually they left and the sailor was driving so fast in Central Park that he lost control and hit a tree sending Willie through the windscreen. He was killed instantly.” At the funeral there was a closed casket. Phil Woods, Gary McFarland and other friends of Willie’s established an annual scholarship in his name to the Ramblerny Music Centre near New Hope, Pennsylvania. Contributions were sent to the Willie Dennis Memorial Scholarship Fund c/o Jim & Andy’s.


Seven months after Willie Dennis was killed Gary McFarland presented a programme of new music at Lincoln Centre’s Philharmonic Hall in New York. It was performed by a nineteen piece band that had enjoyed the luxury of four days of rehearsals prior to the concert. The repertoire included Willie which was Gary’s tribute to his good friend and there is a hint of Chuggin’ in the coda. In Willie’s memory there was an empty chair in the trombone section."

WILLIE DENNIS SELECTED DISCOGRAPHY


LennIe Tristano: Chicago 1951. Uptown UPCD 27.
Jazz Workshop: Trombone Rapport. Prestige PCD 24097.
Ronnie Ball: All About Ronnie. Fresh Sound FSRCD 570.
Zoot Sims: The Lost Tapes. SWR Music 10170.
Charles Mingus: Blues & Roots. Atlantic CD1305.
Buddy Rich: The Driver. Wing MGE 26006.
Gary McFarland: Profiles. Impulse AS 9112.
Gerry Mulligan CJB: Mosaic MD4-221.





Paperback Edition of "How To Listen to Jazz" by Ted Gioia

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


With the arrival of the paperbound version of Ted Gioia’s How To Listen To Jazz - just in time for Christmas - [sorry, I couldn’t resist] - I thought it might be fun to reprise three, earlier reviews of the book when it first appeared: [1] my own JazzProfiles review, [2]the examination of the book by The Economist, and [3] The Wall Street Journal’s appraisal.


Isadora Johnson and her team at Basic Books were kind enough to send along a preview copy of the paperback edition, a book which the Washington Post asserts: “... fills an important gap by offering a sensible and jargon-free introduction to what Gioia calls ‘the most joyous sound invented during the entire course of twentieth-century music.’”


As far as Gift and Wish Lists are concerned, I’ve already given copies of Ted Gioia’s How To Listen To Jazz to a number of family members and friends and the almost unanimous reaction has been something along the lines of: “Thank you. Now, maybe, I’ll be able to understand a little of what you’ve been talking about all these years.”


Since it involved family and friends, all of this was said with love and affection, but it gave me pause and led me to wonder how difficult it might be for the uninitiated to understand the subtleties and the complexities of a music I’ve been listening to for over 60 years and which I made my living at as a professional musician during a number of those very same years.


Many Jazz devotees may also be in a similar position as regards family members and friends who nod politely when the subject turns to Jazz, but don’t really have a clue as to what you’re talking about when you bring up the topic.


I realize that finances are always a sensitive issue and that $25 bucks may be a lot of schimolies to pay for a hardbound book.


But now, with a paperbound version Ted Gioia’s How To Listen To Jazz that costs about two-thirds the hardbound retail price, availability and affordability may have aligned themselves in such a way as help bring a few, new converts to the music courtesy of gift copies from caring Jazz fans.

Goodness knows that the music could sure use a few, new friends.


© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


“A revealing story is told of bassist Charles Mingus, who led some of the most creative jazz bands from the 1950s into the 1970s. When one of his band members succeeded in playing an especially exciting solo that generated lots of applause from the audience, Mingus would yell at him: "Don't do that again!" ...eventually the perceptive musician would grasp the hidden profundity in the boss's warning.


When you play a crowd-pleasing solo, the temptation is to try to re-create the same phrases at the next performance, ....and the next one after that, and so on. But a kind of rigor mortis sets into jazz when improvisers start down that enticing path. Instead of capturing the heat of the moment, they are left trying to rekindle the embers of gigs long departed. "Don't do that again" may well be the most potent jazz mantra, a guidepost for the musician who seeks the highest peaks of artistic transcendence.”
- Ted Gioia, How To Listen To Jazz


Ted Gioia is a brave soul.


First he writes a History of Jazz, then has the temerity to revise it into a second edition and now he writes a book “telling” people how to listen to it!


Talk about asking for trouble in the contentious world of Jazz preferences and opinions [Just ask Ken Burns who is still digging out from under a pile of opprobrium for what he “omitted” in his PBS TV series about Jazz.].


However, despite the imperative implied in its title, Ted Gioia’s new book How To Listen To Jazz is anything but didactic or pedantic. His book is really about how one person learned to listen to Jazz and his effort to share these skills with others to help enrich their Jazz listening experience.


By way of analogy, the book is not so much a manual, but rather, a cookbook of recipes some of which may work for you.


And whether you have been listening to the music for many years or are new to Jazz and need help finding your way around its mysteries, Ted’s new book offers a host of insights, tips and suggestions that are sure to enhance your Jazz listening experience.


And “listening” is the operative term.


There are lots of ways to learn about Jazz for as the noted Jazz author Doug Ramsey has advised in Jazz Matters: Reflections on the Music & Some of Its Makers :


"You don't need a degree in musicology to understand the language of jazz. ... Jazz is based on the common language of music understood around the world. The listener, whether musician or non-musician, can learn the idioms and vernacular of the language. It is simply a matter of absorption through exposure. My only caveat is this: in the learning process, don't spend your time listening to imitators or second-raters." [Fayetteville: The University of Arkansas Press, 1989, p. 6]


Yes, but, how is this listening informed?


What are “... the idioms and vernacular of the language and who should I be listening to”?


What am I listening for; what is it exactly that I’m trying to hear?


Enter Ted Gioia’s new book - How to Listen to Jazz? [Basic, 253 pages, $24.99].


As Ted explains: “This book is built on the notion that careful listening can demystify virtually all of the intricacies and marvels of jazz. This is not to demean the benefits of formal music study or classroom learning. Yet we do well to remember that the people who first gave us jazz did so without much formal study — and, in some instances, with none at all. But they knew how to listen.


Ted’s new work is divided into seven chapters that explore [1] The Mystery of Rhythm, [2] Getting Inside The Music, [3], The Structure of Jazz, [4] The Origins of Jazz, The Evolution of Jazz Styles, [6] A Closer Look at Some Jazz Innovators and [7] Listening to Jazz Today. The book has an appendix that contains a listing of “The Elite 150, Early and Mid-Career Jazz Masters.”


I thought it might be fun to develop a synopsis of the insights and observations that I found helpful from a reading of Ted’s approach to listening to Jazz and to do this on a chapter-by-chapter basis to help provide a sense of the scope of the book.


Chapter One: The Mystery of Rhythm


As a former drummer, I have to fess up to a real bias here because I’ve always felt that the syncopated rhythms of jazz account for so much of jazz’s distinctiveness.


The Pulse (or Swing) of Jazz


“The first thing I listen for is the degree of rhythmic cohesion between the different musicians in the band. Some jazz critics might describe this as swing. Certainly that's part of it, at least in most jazz performances. But there is something more than mere finger-tapping momentum involved here. In the great jazz bands, you can hear the individual members lock together rhythmically in a pleasing way that involves an uncanny degree of give-and-take, but with a kind of quirkiness that resists specific definition. …”


“Can we pinpoint the essence of swing in the music of the premier jazz bands? One way of doing this is to listen to the same performance repeatedly and focus on different instruments with each repetition. If you are seeking out the secret source of swing, a good place to start is with the locking together of the bass and drums....”


This mysterious factor in a performance is hardly restricted to jazz. The 'secret sauce' behind many successful popular songs is the degree of cohesion between the individual musicians, the effortless blending of each individual's personal sense of time into a persuasive holistic sound.  … Even though jazz is a highly individualistic art form, and its leading practitioners are discussed in quasi-heroic terms, this crucial ingredient — my starting point in evaluating a performance - transcends the personal and resides in the collective.”


Chapter Two: Getting Inside the Music


Ted explains that the primary focus of this chapter is “What hidden factors distinguish a moving [Jazz] performance from a blasé one?” Or, put another way: “Let’s see what happens when we try to expand our listening skills and grapple with … [a] deep level of song. In the previous chapter, we looked at rhythm and swing. Let’s now move to an even more granular level of scrutiny, and look inside the individual notes and phrases.


The author’s granularity consists of an analysis of phrasing, pitch and timbre, dynamics, personality and spontaneity and how a practiced understanding of each of these factors can help the Jazz listener gain a deeper appreciation of what’s going on in the music.


A brief look at each of these reveals the following insights from Mr. Gioia:


[1] Phrasing - After listening for the sound of the band’s pulse or swing, the second and equally important thing to listen for “... is the way musicians shape their phrases. ... At this point, I start focusing more on the individual members of the group. Their skill at phrasing is especially evident in their improvised solos, but the superior jazz artist can stand out even when simply stating a melody or responding to the phrases of bandmates. …Even before these artists start improvising, merely when they are interpreting a written melody, they demonstrate their mastery and express their individuality.”


[2] Pitch and Timbre - “When we listen to a jazz performance, we rarely focus on the specific tones. They go by so fast, who can really study them?” Mr. Gioia eventually reached a point of “...  grasping how much can happen even within the narrow confines of a single note.” He learned that these …  “sound colorings were important to the power of the music.  This kind of tone manipulation went far beyond anything heard in classical or marching band music and accounted for much of the excitement and popularity of the jazz idiom.The jazz cats played dirty, and fans loved precisely that quality in the music.” Sidney Bechet, the great soprano saxophonist and one of the inventor’s of Jazz once said to a student: ‘I'm going to give you one note today. See how many ways you can play that note—growl it, smear it, flat it, sharp it, do anything you want to it. That's how you express your feelings in this music. It's like talking.’ “The mandate of the listener is the mirror image of this admonition. Don’t just listen to the notes; listen to what the great jazz artists do to them.”


[3] Dynamics - Ted defines dynamics as “ ... variations in volume of a note or a phrase.” …  To the outsider, dynamics must seem like the simplest aspect of music. Either you play louder or softer, or you stay the same. What can be so hard about that? Yet in the context of jazz, this is much more problematic than the outsider realizes. Jazz is a hot art form. It thrives on intensity. For better or worse, a macho aesthetic got embedded in its DNA at an early stage in its evolution. … Audiences burn out on unrelenting volume, whether it's a politician shouting out denunciations on the campaign stump, a preacher bellowing a lengthy fire-and-brimstone sermon, or an amateur jazz band full of testosterone and determined to conquer the world. … But I do want to hear jazz musicians make an attempt to control the dynamics, rather than letting the dynamics control the music.”


[4] The following is my favorite excerpt from the book because I know from personal experience that the following observation is true.  “Long ago, I reached a conclusion about jazz musicians that some might find highly controversial and others accept as so obvious that it hardly needs to be stated. I've never heard it mentioned, although I think it provides a highly useful perspective on listening to the music, so I will share it for your consideration. During my own apprenticeship years, I noticed that if I met musicians before I heard them perform, I could frequently predict how they would improvise. Their personality in off-stage interactions got transferred into how they approached their solos. A brash, confident person would play with assertiveness and flamboyance on the bandstand. The quiet, cerebral types would reflect those same qualities in their music. The jokester would impart a dose of humor to the performance. The sensitive and melancholy player would gravitate to songs that displayed these selfsame attributes. A jazz improvisation is, in a very real sense, a character study … or a Rorschach test.”  As Louis Armstrong exclaimed: Jazz is who you are!


[5] Spontaneity - “This final ingredient in the jazz mix might be the most important of them all, but it's devilishly difficult to isolate and describe. More an attitude than a technique, the element of spontaneity in the music rebels against codification and museum-like canonization. Indeed, the instant you try to hold onto it—to re-create the tones and phrases that spontaneity has imparted to a jazz performance—is the very second when it disappears. Yet this frame of mind, the openness to the creative possibilities of the present moment, is perhaps the defining aspect of the jazz idiom.”


Chapter Three: The Structure of Jazz


I think all of us at some point - experienced listener or novice - can really relate to the assertion that Ted uses to open this chapter - A JAZZ PERFORMANCE CAN BE CONFUSING TO THE UNINITIATED - because we were all “uninitiated” at some point in our listening-to-Jazz careers and as he notes in the following, the struggle continues.


“Even many hard-core jazz fans find aspects of the music mystifying.They struggle to identify a melody or discern an underlying structure to the music. Songs sometimes change direction suddenly and unpredictably. Different musicians in the band take charge at unexpected junctures — the focal point moves from saxophone to trumpet to piano to bass or other instruments—but seemingly without rhyme or reason.


What's going on here?


We've all heard that jazz musicians improvise. But does that mean they just make it up as they go along? Is it possible that there is no real structure to this music? Is jazz just a free-for-all, like those wild moments in TV wrestling when all rules are abandoned, the referee ignored, and every combatant goes for broke? Or is there method to this apparent musical madness? Is jazz more like a chess match—but played much, much faster—in which creative freedom is bound by rules and imagination must operate within carefully defined constraints?


In truth, jazz is a little like both those examples. …


Yet jazz has its own rules — although not repressive ones — and they can be elusive, hard to grasp, especially from the perspective of a newcomer to the music. But a serious fan can't really appreciate what happens during a jazz performance without some understanding of these structural underpinnings and how they are applied in practice.


The vast majority of jazz performances follow a familiar pattern. You might call it "theme and variations ."You can divide the song into three parts. First, the musicians play the melody (or theme). Second, they improvise over the harmonies of the song—with some or all of the performers taking solos (these are the variations). Third, the musicians return to the melody for a final restatement of the theme. Not every jazz performance follows this blueprint—and in some extreme cases, the musicians follow no set pattern—but more than 95 percent of the jazz music you will encounter in recordings or live concert will adhere to this theme-and-variations structure.


At this point, Ted devises a number of “music maps” to help guide the listener through the song structures of Duke Ellington’s Sepia Panorama, Jelly Roll Morton’s Sidewalk Blues and Dizzy Gillespie’s A Night in Tunisia.


As Ted explains: “By following music maps of this sort, newcomers to jazz begin to grasp that a style of music that initially sounds unconstrained and almost formless—the performers seemingly operating in the absence of rules, like gunslingers in a Wild West town without a sheriff—actually builds on a finely tuned balance between freedom and structure. Every jazz composer and band approaches this trade-off differently.”


Ted also offers these invaluable focal points: “Before moving on, let me offer a few more suggestions about how to improve your ability to hear the metric structure of jazz. First, when trying to get the 'feel' of the pulse you may find it easier if you follow the bass player. Most people assume that the drummer sets the beat for the band, and so they try to lock into the underlying beat by focusing their attention on the percussion. Perhaps seventy or eighty years ago, this would have been a smart listening strategy. But the drums in jazz have evolved away from timekeeping — in truth, much of the action in jazz percussion these days happens between the beats — and thus can serve as a confusing guide to those seeking something akin to a metronome for their listening sessions. Bassists in jazz are hardly immune to this evolution away from timekeeping, but they tend to be more straightforward in signaling the pulse in a song. In many instances, they will play on every beat, bar after bar — the so-called walking bass line — and this provides both a pleasing forward motion to the performance as well as a useful guide to those counting along in the audience.”


Chapter Four: The Origins of Jazz


In this segment, Ted steps back to help us understand the social and cultural context in which Jazz originated with a particular emphasis on how and why New Orleans was the birthplace of the music.


“Then as now, jazz musicians were scavengers and borrowers, visionaries who broke through the boundaries between highbrow and lowbrow, religious and secular, caste and clan. Historians of the music give the most attention to the influence of blues and ragtime on the evolution of early jazz, but a host of other styles and sounds played a role in the creation of this exciting new hybrid. The earliest jazz performers also took note of the sounds of the sanctified church, the stately music of concert halls and opera houses, the popular dance tunes played by string ensembles—indeed, anything that came to their attention and might excite an audience.


And here's the beautiful part of the story: jazz musicians still beg, borrow, and steal, only now they do it on a global basis.” …


“I don't think it's mere coincidence that jazz first emerged in New Orleans. I've devoted a considerable amount of time, over the years, to studying the conditions that spur cultural innovation and the dissemination of new artistic movements, and the emergence of jazz serves as the perfect case study in how these revolutions take place.” …


“Densely packed populations, many individuals coming and going via land and waterways, an overheated mixture of people recently arrived from different locales, informal settings where they intermingle in close contact, a culture and environment that emphasize communal activities and get-togethers— these are nightmare conditions for anyone trying to stop an epidemic, but they are the same ingredients that can spur world-changing artistic revolutions. …


“Jazz followed the same formula. New Orleans, at the time when jazz first appeared, was one of the unhealthiest cities in the world.” …


“All cities had to deal with public health risks, but New Orleans was especially dangerous, no doubt because of its particular mix of well-traveled residents, climate, population density, and poor local sanitation.


These selfsame conditions gave birth to jazz. No urban area on the planet offered a more diverse cultural mix during the years leading up to the emergence of jazz than New Orleans.”


The remainder of this chapter finds Ted explaining: what the blues is and what its importance is to the fabric of Jazz; how its infusion into Western lyric song structure in turn-of-the-century New Orleans constituted the beginning of the music we now recognize today as “Jazz;” how the next phase in the evolution of the music was shaped by the use of brass and reed instruments by New Orleans musicians to help create a “boisterous style of dance music;” how the injection of syncopation helped give Jazz its “mojo;” how the advent of ragtime music with  heavy emphasis on syncopation and the syncopation in the music of the pioneering Jazzman Jelly Roll Morton both coalesced to help bring into existence “... the unfettered creativity of New Orleans Jazz.”


In Chapters Five, Six and Seven, Ted takes us from the lecture hall across to the laboratory as we move away from theory to application; from the lessons of how to listen to Jazz to actively applying his recommended listening approaches to form a more discriminating appreciation of: the evolution of various Jazz styles, some of the more important Jazz innovators and how to listen to how Jazz in performance as it is being played today at clubs, festivals and concert venues.


Chapter Five: The Evolution of Jazz Styles


In this chapter, Ted catalogues Jazz styles into the following groups:


  • New Orleans Jazz
  • Chicago Jazz
  • Harlem Stride
  • Kansas City Jazz
  • Big Bands and the Swing Era
  • Bebop/Modern Jazz
  • Cool Jazz
  • Hard Bop
  • Avant-Garde/Free Jazz
  • Jazz/ Rock Fusion
  • Classical/World Music/Fusion
  • Postmodernism and Neoclassical Jazz


The distinguishing features of each style are outlined and a selection of recommended recordings is included.


Chapter Six: A Closer Look at Some Jazz Innovators


Here we find Ted taking another look at the evolution of the music, but this time with an emphasis on its innovators who include:


  • Louis Armstrong
  • Coleman Hawkins
  • Duke Ellington
  • Billie Holiday
  • Charlie Parker
  • Thelonious Monk
  • Miles Davis
  • John Coltrane
  • Ornette Coleman
  • Further Observation - A section that Ted introduces this way:
“I have focused on just a handful of jazz innovators in this chapter, and I apologize if I have left out a favorite artist or recording. My goal, however, is not to offer a comprehensive guide to major jazz performers—that would take up an entire book on its own—but to help you expand the capacity of your ears and construct listening strategies that bring you closer to the essence of each artist's work. If you want to move on to a more comprehensive survey of jazz musicians and performances, I suggest you supplement this volume with more in-depth studies — for example, my books The History of Jazz and The Jazz Standards, or other comparable works on these subjects.The goal in these pages is more one of connoisseurship and discernment. Think of it as akin to learning how to taste and savor wines, which may be assisted by some specialized knowledge, but can still be practiced by those lacking a degree in viticulture. Music is much the same. In hot music as in pinot noirs and cabernets, this cultivation of an informed taste is really the foundation for advancing more deeply into the subject.”


Chapter Seven: Listening to Jazz Today


“ANY READER WHO HAS FOLLOWED ME TO THIS POINT MIGHT BE forgiven for assuming that learning about jazz is a matter of listening to recordings. After all, most of the musicians addressed in the preceding pages are no longer performing in concert. Unless jazz clubs start booking holograms, we've lost our chance to watch them on the bandstand. But I make no apologies for devoting so much attention to artists who no longer work the circuit or appear at the leading jazz festivals. A listener in the current day can't develop an informed sense of the art form without paying close attention to the legacies of Armstrong, Ellington, Coltrane, and the other past masters of the idiom. A sympathetic scrutiny of their music is still the best starting point for a study of this sort. And to do this, of course, we must turn to the body of recordings they left behind.


But we also need to remind ourselves that these innovators were working musicians, who performed night after night in front of a constantly shifting audience, and that digital tracks or grooves in vinyl only capture a small part of what these artists created or embodied. The ideal way to experience jazz will always be firsthand, at the source, fully present at the moment of inspiration and realization. This is probably true for all kinds of music, but especially so for jazz, which places so much faith in spontaneity, in the belief that each performance should aim at creating a unique and irreplaceable epiphany for both artist and audience.


So this is the first reason you should care about jazz in the present day: you can experience it the way the music is meant to be experienced. In the flesh. As a ritual with its own expectations and covenants. …”


“Let me emphasize … [the] point by resorting to italics: every jazz style described in this book is still alive and flourishing on the bandstand. ...


“So I have made my attempt to simplify the extraordinary diversity and multiplicity of jazz today into these four themes: globalization, hybridization, professionalization, and rejuvenation. These trends are still unfolding, and with a degree of fluidity and unpredictability that suggests that they may still be in the early stages. Perhaps "trends" is a misleading term in this respect. These are more like inexorable forces that aren't likely to go "out of style" anytime soon. I suspect that these four forces will still shape the jazz idiom in exciting ways ten or twenty years from now.” …


“Which leads to my last bit of advice. I know that I have given a lot of it in the preceding pages, but I have one last nugget of wisdom to share. Don't take my word for any of this. Go out and hear for yourself. I've shared with you observations of a lifetime of listening to this music, but as the legal disclaimer always attests in these instances: your results may vary. I may have given you a recipe book, but the obligation is on your shoulders to do the cooking and tasting. And add some new dishes of your own. But that should be a pleasant responsibility.”


Following this chapter, as Ted explains:


“I provide an appendix a list of the "elite 150" jazz artists in early or mid-career who deserve your attention. But ... don't take it too seriously. View it merely as a representative sample of outstanding current-day talent, not an exclusive club.”


The publication of a new book about Jazz by Ted Gioia is a major event and we would all do well to participate in it through buying a copy of How To Listen to Jazz.


All of us would then also have the benefit of having in our possession a fun and informative book that helps enhance our Jazz listening pleasure, and Ted and his publisher would get the benefit of having a few, extra schimolies around with which to pay the rent and book a profit, respectively.


And who knows, another result of such an exchange might be more books about Jazz by Ted Gioia.


Now that would be a good thing.


© -The Economist, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


How to Listen to Jazz.
By Ted Gioia.
Basic Books; 272 pages;
$24.99 and £16.99


The following review of Ted Gioia’s new book How to Listen to Jazz appeared The Economist, April 23rd - 29th, 2016 edition and the editorial staff at JazzProfiles thought it would share it with you while it worked on its own review of Ted’s latest effort on behalf of Jazz.


How to distinguish good jazz from bad.


“JAZZ is not a popular art-form. To its many detractors, it amounts to little more than pretentious noodling, based as it is largely on improvisation. To others, it is simply mystifying. How can an entire genre be made up of playing, again and again, variants of show tunes that were mostly composed in the 19305 and 19408?
Ted Gioia understands why people find jazz so esoteric. The problem, as he sees it, is that no one has ever bothered to explain what "good" or "bad" jazz really is. Critics hold strong opinions on whether Charlie Parker or John Coltrane is the better saxophonist, but rarely do they explain "what they [are] listening/or". Mr Gioia's job is to teach jazz-lovers how to assess the music and persuade sceptics to give jazz a go.


Mr Gioia has produced a fascinating book. He takes the reader through the most important ingredients of jazz, explaining, for instance, how "swing" is more than syncopated, finger-tapping rhythm. A bass-player and drummer who sound comfortable in each other's company is one sure sign of swing. (Listen to Elvin Jones and Jimmy Garrison, playing with Coltrane, for instance.) Unlike amateur outfits that feel the need to overplay, the best groups can swing without playing many notes. In Keith Jarrett's trio, the pianist goes for long stretches without even using his left hand, but the listener barely notices until it reappears, upon which it makes the music sound even richer.


Most useful to the uninitiated, the book provides tips on what good improvisation really means. Bad players tend to rely heavily on a small number of rhythmic and harmonic patterns in their phrases-licks containing a certain number of notes, for instance, or a tendency to begin or end their phrases at a certain place in the bar. Listen to such an improviser for more than a minute or so, and "even novice listeners will perceive an inescapable monotony," says Mr Gioia. The best players, including Louis Armstrong and Miles Davis (pictured), never fall into such traps, however.


In his enthusiasm, Mr Gioia's analysis of improvisation sometimes veers into abstraction. Take his discussion of what he calls "intentionality", which he says is another crucial element of good soloing. He defines this as "a musical phrase that reveals the total commitment of the improviser" -hardly an illuminating description. Yet read the book within easy access of a music-streaming service or YouTube, and Mr Gioia's commentary suddenly feels much more useful. A middling trumpeter (say, one in a student band) appears to struggle against the music, and will finish a phrase upon running out of breath. Davis's phrases on the trumpet, by contrast, have a clear beginning, middle and end. No note is wasted and the accompanists seem to work around him. (For an excellent example of this, see his opening solo in "Spanish Key", recorded in 1969.)


Mr Gioia also delves into musical theory, in a way that will help both jazz neophytes and experts understand what they are listening to. The best jazz musicians do not worry much about producing clearly defined notes (the do-re-mi system that structures Western classical music). Instead they look to make particular sounds -bending notes and creating unusual timbres-which is a consequence of the heavy African influence on jazz. The emphasis on sound over notes is especially pronounced in Coltrane's late work.


Alongside the tips for listening, Mr Gioia's book gives a helpful overview of how jazz has evolved since its beginnings in turn-of-the-century New Orleans. Buddy Bolden, a cornet-player in the Big Easy of whose music there are no recordings, is credited by many with inventing "jass". Like the rest of the book, the majority of this discussion focuses on long-dead musicians (many of whom met untimely ends thanks to debilitating drug habits). As if to compensate for the book's backward-looking bias, at the end the author lists 150 contemporary jazzists "who deserve your attention".


How to Listen to Jazz is not a long book, but it emphasises a beautiful point about the genre, a point that applies to no other sort of music. When you see a live performance, you may be watching a 60-year-old musician playing a loo-year-old piece; but what is produced on stage has never been, and will never be, played again. Jazz is undoubtedly struggling, but as an introduction to why its remaining fans are so devoted, Mr Gioia could not have done a better job. Through him, jazz might even find new devotees.”


© -The Wall Street, copyright protected; all rights reserved.

I Hear a Rhapsody

Want to listen to ‘the most joyous sound invented during the entire course of twentieth-century music? Put on some New Orleans jazz.

HOW TO LISTEN TO JAZZ

By Ted Gioia
Basic, 253 pages, $24.99


A Review By
JOHN CHECK
May 19, 2016, The Wall Street Journal


“What’s the best way to listen to a Charlie Parker solo? Ted Gioia suggests singing along. In his satisfying new book, “How to Listen to Jazz,” Mr. Gioia recommends trying to “internalize” Parker’s style, which stood out for its virtuosity and angularity, by memorizing and singing even a small passage of one of his recordings. Such mimicry is precisely the course of study that was undertaken by the saxophonist himself when he was growing up in Kansas City and used to listen to recordings of Lester Young’s solos again and again, striving to copy them note for note. This virtual apprenticeship, as Mr. Gioia put it in a previous book, marked a “turning point in Parker’s musical development.”


A radiantly accomplished writer, a busy blogger and a pianist who has recorded several albums, Mr. Gioia conveys his passion for the music with vivid description and shrewd judgments, concentrating principally on the recordings made by jazz musicians rather than on details of their personal lives. (He writes about those in his “History of Jazz,” now in its second edition.) “Listening,” he holds, “is the foundation; everything else builds out of this starting point.”


Mr. Gioia traces the evolution of jazz styles and illuminates what is characteristic of each. New Orleans jazz, for instance, is marked by a “spontaneous counterpoint” of trumpet, trombone and clarinet against a three- or four-piece rhythm section. Issuing from this combination is “the most joyous sound invented during the entire course of twentieth-century music.” At first New Orleans jazz was a “team sport,” with each instrumentalist playing a more or less set role: a Joe “King” Oliver taking the melody on cornet; a Johnny Dodds supplying an embellishing line on clarinet; a Kid Ory pumping out an obbligato on trombone. Louis Armstrong changed all this. After he emerged in the early 1920s, jazz accorded greater emphasis to feats of individual daring.
Arising in the late 1920s, Chicago jazz, by contrast, is more “streamlined” and “relaxed.” A saxophone may replace the trombone in the lineup, and the drummer will sometimes play a shuffle rhythm, with each beat of the bar divided into long and short parts, a perfect inducement to dancing. Bix Beiderbecke, the golden-toned cornetist, was the leading figure in Chicago jazz, though saxophonist Frankie Trumbauer, too, merits mention. He influenced Lester Young just as Young influenced Parker.


Charlie Parker was, of course, the fountainhead of bebop (or modern) jazz, “a style that took no prisoners and made extreme demands on the performers as well as the audience.” If the paths of jazz and popular music intersected during the swing era (1935-45), they began to diverge during the bebop era. Jazz became increasingly a cognoscenti interest.


“How to Listen to Jazz” includes profiles of nine innovators who made lasting contributions to the music. These range from Armstrong (who “had the biggest impact of anyone”) to Billie Holiday (whose virtuosity was less flashy and “more qualitative and psychological”) to Duke Ellington (a pianist whose true instrument was his orchestra) to Ornette Coleman (who was spectacularly ill-served by critics and champions alike). Each profile concludes with a summary of select recordings showing the artist at peak power.


One of the best features of the book is a set of “music maps,” as Mr. Gioia calls them, that serve as a guide to individual recordings. The structure of Jelly Roll Morton’s “Sidewalk Blues” (1926) is shown to consist of nine isolable parts of varying length, each designated by letter name, along with a short description of what is taking place internally. Because of the pacing and juxtaposition of the parts, “Sidewalk Blues” produces a “dramatic moment of disjunction” near its midpoint that nevertheless sounds both “natural and aesthetically satisfying.” So good are these music maps that it is too bad there aren’t more of them.


The pleasure of “How to Listen to Jazz” is diluted slightly by the author’s tendency to denigrate specialized knowledge. “The deepest aspect of jazz music has absolutely nothing to do with music theory,” he writes. “Zero. Zilch.” But certain insights about structure and even meaning are obtainable only through the observation of specifically musical phenomena; for him to brush aside the associated vocabulary as “jargon” does a disservice to the complexity of the art.


That said, Mr. Gioia minimizes theory in order to maximize artistic personality, a topic about which he writes clearly and well. “Lesser musicians,” he notes, “. . . sometimes sound as if it’s the song that is playing them, rather than they who are playing the song.” By contrast, “with the master artist you never have any doubt who is in charge.” Drawing on his experience as a jazz pianist, Mr. Gioia mentions that if he met musicians before a performance, he “could frequently predict how they would improvise. “Their personality,” he concludes, “. . . got transferred into how they approached their solos.”


A point made in the last chapter is easy to overlook: The greats of jazz past were in their day working musicians, and what is preserved on record is a slight fraction of all the music they made. As someone with an admitted craving for new sounds, Mr. Gioia implores his readers to make the effort to listen to as much live music as possible. Jazz musicians of today are, “in many ways, better trained than their predecessors, especially in terms of assimilating techniques in a systematic and codified manner.” To this end, he includes an appendix listing 150 jazz masters at the beginning or middle of their careers. Regardless of the shape assumed by jazz to come, “you,” he writes, “will not be bored.””


[Mr. Check is an associate professor of music at the University of Central Missouri.]









Art Tatum - "Too Marvelous for Words" - James Lester

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


“By all the criteria of the nineteenth-century piano tradition, Art Tatum made himself into a piano virtuoso worthy to be compared to the best who have ever played. This achievement certainly did not come from years of hard labor under European-trained teachers, which is the usual route for concert pianists. It seems instead to have come from a very fine match between the opportunities the piano offers, on the one hand, and Tatum's innate sensitivities and gifts of coordination, on the other. Once he had been exposed to it and his mind had gotten its teeth into it, he was launched into a search for higher and higher levels of achievement, in the same way the great European artists had been.


He responded sensitively to the nature of the piano, as they had, and he arrived, probably independently, at many of the same ways of dealing with it as they had. His basic gifts, in other words, were world-class, and his gifts drove him to be the pianist he was. Tatum wove the virtuoso tradition and the jazz idiom together in his playing, from the early days of his development, and brought a previously unimagined level of playing into jazz.”
- James Lester, Too Marvelous for Words: The Life and Genius of Art Tatum



"The true genius is not helpfully communicative. … In reality, he lacks the key to verbal communication of his inner motivations, except within his art.   .   .   .  He does not seek self-knowledge, gives no account of himself, neglects and consumes himself.   .   .   .   He burns up, but does not defy the burning: rather, he ignores it. He does not see himself in relation to the world. He doesn't see himself at all."
- HILDESHEIMER, Mozart (on the difference between the true genius and the would-be genius)


“And so will someone when I am dead and gone write my life? (As if any man really knew aught of my life, Why even I myself I often think know little or nothing of my real life….)"                              
- WALT WHITMAN


“This book is dedicated to the hundreds of jazz musicians whose lives and contributions also deserve books but will probably never get them.”
- James Lester, Too Marvelous for Words: The Life and Genius of Art Tatum



Much of what Jazz musicians do goes up into the air, or, in today’s parlance, the ether. To say that their art is ephemeral would be an understatement in the extreme. The music is here one moment and gone the next. It seems sometimes that this is also the case with the Jazz musicians, too: here today gone tomorrow.


Mercifully, there are some book-length treatments of their music and careers; more and more it seems as Jazz moves more closely into the academic world. There are articles and interviews in the major music magazine that have focused on Jazz over the years, both at home and abroad:  Jazz Journal, Melody Maker, DownBeat, Metronome, Esquire, Playboy, JazzTimes, and a few others, come to mind.


I suppose, many Jazz musicians would prefer it this way: let the music speak for itself; it’s not about me.


But it’s hard not to wonder how they came to develop their marvelous talents and skills; to know more about the musician behind the music.


Phineas Newborn, Jr., who the eminent Jazz author Leonard Feather called one of the three greatest Jazz pianists of all time along with Art Tatum and Bud Powell, died a virtual unknown and was buried in a pauper’s grave in Memphis, Tennessee.  And, there is as yet, to my knowledge, no full length biography of Phineas [pronounced “Fine As”] and one wonders if there ever will be.


One of the main reasons that I started this blog was to do my part to provide some in-depth profiles to help remedy what James Lester underscores in his dedicatory statement to his biography of Art Tatum: “This book is dedicated to the hundreds of jazz musicians whose lives and contributions also deserve books but will probably never get them.”


Thank goodness for the tenacity [and temerity?] of James Lester for when he went looking for a biography of Art Tatum, who many consider to me the greatest Jazz pianist of all time, he couldn’t find one.


So, he decided to write one himself.


He explains how it all came to be in the following Introduction to Too Marvelous for Words: The Life and Genius of Art Tatum.


[Should you be in the mood to enhance your reading experience of this piece, rack up the 8 volumes of Art Tatum’s Solo Masterpieces [Pablo], set the controls on your CD changer for random play, pour yourself a glass of your favorite red plonk and sit back to enjoy what at some point in the process should be an out-of-body experience as all of your senses engage in the World of Art Tatum. There’s never been a “world” quite like it and I doubt that there ever will be one again.]


Introduction


“... a creature who, for all his fame. still stands in need of a tittle understanding." - LYTTON STRACHEY (referring to Shelley)


ART TATUM'S NAME is now a secure part of American popular culture, and almost everyone understands that to put someone on Tatum's level is to bestow the highest praise. A play reviewer can write: "Stoppard handles words the way that Art Tatum used to handle a keyboard," and the compliment is widely understood, even by people who never heard Art play the piano. More than thirty-five years after his death, his name is still a metaphor for excellence, and not just in America but the world over. I recently met a young jazz pianist and her mother, both from Azerbaijan in the former Soviet Union, and they were offended that I thought they might not know who Art Tatum was.


But who was Art Tatum?


In 1988 I set out to find a good biography of Tatum. I wanted to learn something about where such a giant had come from, who his own idols had been, what experiences had made him the figure I knew, what sort of a person he was, what sort of life he had when he wasn't playing. It astonished me to discover that no biography of Tatum has yet been published. No fellow pianist, no Jazz writer, no family member, in the thirty-seven years since his death, has yet undertaken a written record of his life. No wonder that if he exists at all for lovers of jazz he exists as a distant, an almost abstract figure, a black eminence waving his hands over the keyboard and thundering through the jazz world.
Art Tatum has not been forgotten, certainly not by the experts. Billv Taylor's 1983 book, Jazz Piano, has more entries in the index for Art Tatum than for any other name, and Gunther Schuller, in his 1989 hook, The Swing Era, Volume 2, gives more pages to Tatum than to any other soloist. The Smithsonian collection of recordings Jazz Piano, released in 1989, has more tracks of TatuirTs playing than of any other pianist. There are currently several concert pianists (for example, Steven Mayer) who pay their respects to Tatum by frequently playing transcriptions of his recordings in their programs, along with the standard classical piano repertoire. I recently attended a performance by Stanley Cowell, a significant post-Tatum jazz pianist, who devoted his whole concert to playing Art Tatum arrangements. Unfortunately there were far more of us in the audience over fifty than under forty; Cowell was preaching to the converted. (Cowell has gone on, incidentally, to compose a piano concerto dedicated to the memory of Art.)


But nothing has come along to tell us who he was. My aim has been to write the book I was unable to find in 1988, to do my best to answer the question of where he came from, and to put into a coherent narrative all the fragments of information about his life that now exist only in isolated sources and in personal memories.


My intent has not been to provide a reference work, documenting his career, the chronology of his public appearances, the dates and places of his recordings. I wanted to get the musician into focus as a person.


I regret that I didn't start sooner. There is some excellent material about Tatum, the musician, already in print. There is an admirable discography (Laubich and Spencer) and three technical analyses of his performance style (Howard, Howlett, and Schuller). Even the dedicated searcher, however, will turn up little about the people and events in Tatum's life. Several brief biographical sketches, most of which cover the same ground, can be found in chapter or magazine article form, and there are short paragraphs buried in other narratives. But each of these comprises only a few fragments of his story, and when I had read through them all I longed to find out how they
really fit together.


Tatum, I soon realized, was more a worthy than a promising subject for a biography - I was particularly interested in personal interviews with people who had known him or worked with him, of course, but 1988 was a very late date on which to start collecting living memories about Art Tatum. His contemporaries, those who were still with us, were in the general vicinity of eighty years old and were showing a marked tendency to shuffle off this mortal coil, all too often before I could reach them. One of his two living relatives and his widow, for reasons which I could never persuade them to reveal to me, were uncooperative.


Getting acquainted with people who knew Art personally, from early schoolmates to those who spent his last days with him, has been far and away the most enjoyable part of writing this book. Of course, there is often no hard evidence against which to evaluate personal accounts of incidents, and one either finds the account plausible or one does not. As an audience for many stories, I've found myself involved in a lot of what may be sifting fiction from fiction. If they were good stories, and not outrageously improbable, I have included them.


It is especially frustrating that there is no almost no record of the man's own report of himself, in his own words. No one I've talked to ever received a letter from Tatum, and his very limited vision makes it plausible that there may be no letters (although I can't be sure that his relatives don't possess some). Many potential interviewers saw him as a bit aloof and unapproachable  —and never approached him. Barry Ulanov knew and interviewed a large proportion of top Jazz figures in Tatum's era, but told me that he "gave up as fruitless any attempt to get a long narrative from him," as he would have liked to. The 1930s and '40s abounded with jazz greats who were more than willing to talk, and the reluctant or retiring ones got passed over. The few published interviews with Tatum have a curious quality; in them, he sounds genial and cooperative but gives almost no information in reply to the interviewer's questions. Without some expression of his own attitudes it is almost impossible to imagine his inner world, the place from which he emerged from time to time to astound us.


Musically, we don't need to know about that, but having it would let us feel much closer to the man. When I spoke about Art with Ellis Marsalis, a jazz pianist and teacher, and father of (among others) Wynton and Branford Marsalis, he remarked that no one could write about Tatum properly who hadn't "gigged," or worked as a jazz musician himself. I want to say here, at the beginning, something about my credentials for writing a biography of a jazz pianist.

The last time I wrote about jazz was in 1941. I was in the eighth grade and wrote a prize-winning essay on the "comeback" of Louis Armstrong. (Little did I realize that the comeback of which I wrote was to be onlv the first of several—it was in fact impossible to keep Louis down.) For my prize I chose a biography of W. C. Handy, composer of, among other things, the "St. Louis Blues" (St. Louis is my home town). I tell you this to make it clear that I am not a Jazz academic, not a jazz critic, not even an occasional contributor of articles on jazz in any form. My connection with jazz has been as an avid listener and as a moonlighting performer, on both piano and trombone.


Music in our household was determined by my mother's taste which ran to Wayne King and Guy Lombardo, the simplest and most pre-digested music of its time. I was a child during the Depression, and the radio in our house was generally tuned to those "sweet bands" that seemed to console America in that often sad era. Somehow I found my way to the right stuff by the time I was on the brink of being a teenager. I was buying (and I now confess to the world occasionally stealing) 78 rpm recordings of the Jazz bands of Will Hudson, Jimmie Lunceford, Count Basie, and other hot bands of the late 1930s, and listening secretly after bedtime to radio station WIL for the best jazz program on the air in St. Louis. Having started piano lessons at around age eight or nine, at my own instigation, I had found the world of "Pine Top" Smith, Meade Lux Lewis, Fats Waller, Teddy Wilson, and of course Tatum, by the time I was thirteen (not, I admit, without pausing briefly to pay attention to such society pianists as Eddy Duchin and Carmen Cavallero — blame it on my youth).


I have been playing semi-professionally since 1941. I think my first paid appearance as a performer was at a block party in the Italian section of St. Louis. I was on piano and the band was on a six-foot high platform in the middle of the street. We played with such vigor that my ringers bled under the nails (not for the last time). I learned boogie-woogie and it made me very popular at parties, but as time went on it was Teddy Wilson whom I tried more and more to sound like. I loved Wilson's crisp and polished style, the clarity and sparkle of his melodic lines, the variety and interest of his left hand, the tenths constantly in motion, and those crystalline runs that sounded so spontaneous and yet inevitable at the same time. His sophistication and rich musicality, and maybe also his introverted character, appealed to my own personality much more than did "getting into the gorilla bag" (the phrase is Oscar Peterson's) with boogie-woogie. Finally, there was the fact that Wilson sounded accessible to me. I could hear what he was doing, and with enough work it seemed it might just be within reach. Tatum, of course, never was within reach, and I turned to him purely for musical experiences and not for a model. Tatum was there to define the limits of the possible, as he still is.



Since then I have held union cards in six major cities, as a pianist and a trombonist. In an Army Special Services unit in 1946 I played lead trombone in the big band, piano in a small group featuring the tenor player Warne Marsh, and wrote the book of arrangements for the band. I did several arrangements for the George Hudson band in St. Louis, the pride of the black community there, and was introduced by Hudson as a potential arranger to Lionel Hampton. In more recent years I've played hundreds of dances and private parties, in big bands and in smaller groups. My unknowing mentor Teddy Wilson once heard me play and commented (so I'm told), "He really seems to know what he's doing"—faint praise, perhaps, but from such a source it meant worlds to me. (There is a line in a novel that describes how I sometimes feel about my own playing, in which one of the characters says about another: "He seems to know what he's doing even if he can't do it.")


My vocation has been elsewhere, as a psychologist, but I have gigged. Those are my "credentials" and combined with my interest in Tatum they have given me the brashness to pursue the writing of this book. At least it seems brash to me; as an editor of DownBeat once remarked to a feature writer, "Tatum is a really big subject."


ART TATUM, COMING from out of nowhere (this is not a slight on Toledo, Ohio, but a comment on the disparity between his background and his accomplishment), set a precedent and a standard by which generations of Jazz pianists could not escape judging themselves — even though by such a standard failure was almost guaranteed. Jimmy Knepper, the New York-based jazz trombonist, put this idea simply: "Tatum, Parker, and a few others got Jazz out of the simple stage and now it's imperative to be a virtuoso."


Tatum was indeed a virtuoso, on several levels, and there is absolutely no dispute about his technical brilliance. It is the element or his playing that is easiest to assess, since his playing practically demands to be measured against the standards of the whole Western tradition of the concert piano, and to my mind at least Tatum is best understood in the light of that tradition. Consider some educated descriptions of his playing:


“. . . almost every one of Tatum's performances is from a pianistic-technical point of view a marvel of perfection ... his playing must be heard to be believed, and in its technical perfection it is something beyond verbal description, at least this author's verbal capacities. The note-perfect clarity of Tatum's runs, the hardly believable leaps to the outer registers of the piano (he is not known ever to have missed one), his deep-in-the-keys full piano sonority, the tone and touch control in pyrotechnical passages clearly beyond the abilities of the vast majority of pianists to merely render the notes in some nominal way — these are miracles of performance which must be appreciated aurally." [Schuller, Swing Era, 482)


“Tatum's style was notable for its touch, its speed and accuracy, and its harmonic and rhythmic imagination. No pianist has ever hit notes more beautifully. Each one — no matter how fast the tempo — was light and complete and resonant, like the letters on a finely printed page. Vast lower-register chords were unblurred, and his highest notes were polished silver. . . . His speed and precision were almost shocking. Flawless sixteenth-note runs poured up and down the keyboard, each note perfectly accented, and the chords and figures in the left hand sometimes sounded two-handed. Such virtuosity can he an end in itself, and Tatum was delighted to let it be in his up-tempo flag-wavers, when he spectacularly became a high-wire artist, a scaler of Everests. Tatum's bedrock sense of rhythm enabled him to play out-of-tempo interludes or whole choruses that doubled the impact of the implied beat, and his harmonic sense — his strange, multiplied chords, still largely unmatched by his followers, his laving on of two and three and four melodic levels at once — was orchestral and even symphonic. [Whitney Balliett, Ecstasy, 113]


Listening to a really good pianist one might say, "I could never do that." But confronted with Tatum most musicians have said to themselves, "Nobody can do that!""To have heard him play," one pianist wrote, "was as awe-inspiring as to have seen the Grand Canyon or Halley's comet. . . ." It seems to me, however, that Teddy Wilson, a contemporary, close friend, and first-class player himself, put the paean to Tatum in its clearest form:

“Maybe this will explain Art Tatum. If you put a piano in a room, just a bare piano. Then you get all the finest Jazz pianists in the world and let them play in the presence of Art Tatum. Then let Art Tatum play . . . everyone there will sound like an amateur. Pianists with regular styles will sound like beginners. Art Tatum played with such superiority that he was above style. It is almost like a golfer who can hit a hole in one every time he picks up the iron. It was a special kind of ability he had. If I had to choose an all-'round instrumentalist, in a classical vein, or in a more modem vein, I'd choose Art Tatum.”


The famous Tatum runs are certainly what first jump out at you; they are, someone said, like the arc left against the night sky by a Fourth of July sparkler. They can dominate your attention, and they have given generations of pianists a sense of inferiority. But it has to be said, and then underlined, that to stop there is to miss most of what is significant about Tatum. As one record reviewer put it: "Art Tatum's performances demand much of the listener. He is not easy and cannot be fully discovered with one or two surface listenings. Of course, you get the gloss, the flash, his elegant sound. But there is so much more." What can be missed by a casual listener is the tremendous structural complexity in what he did, and the very advanced (for Jazz) harmonies that he used. (Chapter 7 includes a discussion of Tatum's performance style.)


Tatum's virtuosity is not for everybody, however. His dazzling command of the keyboard has been a wedge that has divided opinion about him. There has been a minority of critics who find in him an unnecessary ornateness or even floridity, a shallowness, "an excess of hyperbole." One of the most polite expressions of this point of view was that "his tendency to display his accomplishments sometimes gets in the way of a performance." The cultivation of virtuoso skill has always exposed players to the same criticism: NO SOUL. Performers back to Franz Liszt and beyond have suffered this criticism: decoration, not substance; effect, not content. In the case of Jazz musicians the complaint is that showy displays of musical athleticism take the place of musical thought and usurp the place of more significant improvisation. Jazz criticism is a murky, subjective thing, but one important criterion has always been originality; whenever skill seems to have replaced imagination, or prepared devices take the place of creativity, a reputation suffers. Because of his virtuosity, it has never been easy to judge Tatum by this particular criterion.


It is clear, though, that what Tatum did, as Knepper suggested, was considerably more than add one more to the variety of Jazz piano styles. His harmonic and rhythmic innovations affected the whole context for jazz playing, and not just for pianists. In the scope of his influence he is comparable to Louis Armstrong before him, and to Charlie Parker who came after. He is, however, impossible to categorize as to style — he seemed to develop along a track of his own even though he was thoroughly aware of the action on all the adjacent tracks. And he is difficult to assess clearly because it's hard to know what standards to apply. Whitney Balliett with his reliable deftness of language summed him up in 1968, and captured a central truth about Tatum's career : "No one ever knew exactly what he was or what to do with him. He was said to be the greatest Jazz pianist who ever lived and he was said to be not a Jazz pianist at all. He was admired by classical pianists ... by Jazz musicians, and by dazzled, tin-eared laymen. People poked fun at his ornate style . . . and then wept at his next brilliance . . . nobody has decided yet what kind of a pianist he was" [Balliett, Ecstasy, III). The clearest light can be thrown on Tatum, I think, if we see him as a displaced person, a kind of outsider, keeping alive an old tradition (piano virtuosity) in an alien country (Jazz).


In the descriptions of many listeners, hearing Art Tatum for the first time was somewhat like living through an earthquake — it astonished, it alarmed, it could shake one's foundations. Inflated as that may sound in the 1990s, when performance expectations are vastly different from what they were in Tatum's era, it was overwhelmingly true in the 1930s and 40s. Musicians traveling from city to city were already telling each other in the late 1920s about the unbelievable piano playing they had heard in Toledo, and he was well on his way to becoming a living legend before he made his first solo recordings in 1933. The impact on his listeners was made all the greater by the knowledge that Art Tatum was nearly blind.


I liken Tatum to an earthquake advisedly. Earthquakes are not only impressive but they can be destructive. I never heard anyone say that Tatum inspired him or her to play the piano. A really accomplished musician might find encouragement. Mel Powell, who had intensive classical training as a child and later won rave reviews as a teen-age pianist and arranger with Benny Goodman, told me his first experience with Tatum's playing was positive: "What it probably did was to encourage me to see that that kind of sheer instrumental virtuosity that I'd been cultivating in the other world of music not only had a place [in Jazz] but was the summit." More than a few-musicians, however, were anything but encouraged by him; Rex Stewart, who is best known for having become a star in Duke Ellington's trumpet section, reports that after his first encounter with Art Tatum he somehow felt he was inadequate at filling Louis Armstrong's shoes (with the Fletcher Henderson band of 1928), and he "toyed with the idea of giving up the horn and going back to school" (Stewart). Bobby Short, who is best known as an entertainer rather than a Jazz pianist but who is none the less talented for that, was once "stopped in his tracks" by Tatum:


“. . . one day Len [Short's manager] took me into Lyon and Healey's music store to listen to a Tatum record. His technique was like Horowitz's. He was a wizard, I listened to the recording and I was shocked to hell! When it was finished, the salesman said, "Do you play the piano, son?" Yes, I did. "Would you play for us?" I crossed over to the piano and sat down, and because I was so impressionable and depended on my ear for so much, found that I couldn't play the piano at all. Not a note. Tatum had undone me to that extent. I could not get my ringers to react to my mind, because mv mind was suddenly overflowing. I'd been stopped in my tracks.”  [Black and White Baby, 157-58]


The pianist Lennie Tristano noticed this phenomenon in some of his listeners and called it "kinesthetic paralysis." Even Oscar Peterson had to go through this experience. In an interview (with Andre Previn) Peterson described his very first encounter with the Tatum technique. In his teens his father — perhaps thinking that Oscar was getting too big a head about his playing ("I thought I was pretty heavy at school, you know—I'd play in all the lunch hours with allthe chicks around the auditorium.")—sat him down to listen to the Tatum recording of "Tiger Rag," one of Art's early recordings which simply blew everyone away, including the ascendant Oscar: "And, truthfully, I gave up the piano for two solid months; and I had crying fits at night." Oscar Peterson!? (In a different interview, with a Time researcher, Peterson said he gave up playing for three weeks. Whichever it was, Oscar was clearly shaken up.)


Some people who thought they were becoming piano players gave up the instrument for another; for example, Les Paul, the renowned guitarist, told me: "When I saw Tatum, and heard Art Tatum, I quit playing the piano. . . . I just sez, that's not for me. 'Cause this guy, I'll never be able to beat a blind black man playing piano like that. . . . This guy is just way, way too good, and he's got so much going." Everett Barksdale, who later had the little-envied job of playing guitar in Tatum's Trio in the '50s, heard him in Detroit in 1926 when he still considered himself a piano player: "This is unbelievable, I don't believe anybody can do that thing on the instrument," he remembered thinking, and "so that was the end of my piano career." And many of the pianists who kept going carried the scars for years; I have heard Johnny Guarnieri, who had an entirely respectable career as a jazz pianist, first in a small Artie Shaw group and later as a solo performer, say that he was fifty-five years old before he realized he didn't have to play like Tatum. Many pianists spent years of their careers "chasing after him," trying to reach his level of accomplishment, even trying to play exactly like him, to the detriment of tapping their own creativity or finding their own style.


Tatum's astonishing technique not only stunned jazz musicians (and paralyzed a few) but also won the admiration of some of the prominent concert artists, conductors, and composers of the day— such artists as Gershwin, Leopold Godowsky, Paderewski, and Rachmaninoff. Most important to Tatum, Vladimir Horowitz admired and praised him, often extravagantly. Itzhak Perlman, the violinist, said in a television interview that from the moment he first heard Tatum on record he "absolutely fell in love with him." When the great Soviet violinist David Oistrakh arrived in America, one of the first things he wanted to do was shop the record stores for Tatum recordings.


Gershwin "listened with rapture" to Tatum, especially when the songs were Gershwin's own, such as "Liza" and “I’ve Got Rhythm." He once gave a party especially for Tatum at his 72nd Street apartment in New York. One of the guests was the famous concert pianist Leopold Godowsky (from whom Fats Waller is alleged to have taken some lessons), and one who was there reported that "Godowsky listened with amazement for twenty minutes to Tatum's remarkable runs, embroideries, counter-figures and passage playing" (Oscar Levant, A Smattering of Ignorance, 195).


With the technical ability to make concert musicians pav attention, and with the improvisational creativity to make jazz musicians go anywhere to hear him (John Lewis of the Modern Jazz Quartet once spent $1000 in a week listening to Tatum on 52nd Street), he had the potential for being a giant in either world. What did he really want? How did he really see himself? There was no question in which world he would have to make his career. Partly because of his blindness (although we don't really know how much that handicapped him in learning composed pieces), but mainly because of the barriers a black musician faced in his time, Jazz offered Tatum the only viable way forward in music. He took it and ran.”




Gil Evans: The Arranger as Re-Composer, Parts 1 & 2 [From The Archives]

$
0
0


© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


“He was a mysterious man, as elusive and evanescent as his art. He could be maddeningly absent-minded; yet he could be closely attentive and solicitous, and you never quite knew how much Gil Evans was noticing about you. His childhood is an enigma, and there is even a question about his real name. Tall, lank, professional of mien, he was kind, self-critical, and self-doubting.”
Gene Lees

“The mind reels at the intricacy of his orchestral and developmental techniques. His scores are so careful, so formally well-constructed, so mindful of tradition, that you feel the originals should be preserved under glass in a Florentine museum.”
- Bill Mathieu [arranger-composer]

“His name is famously an anagram of Svengali and Gil spent much of his career shaping the sounds and musical philosophies of younger musicians. … His peerless voicings are instantly recognizable.”
- Richard Cook

“I bought every one of Louis Armstrong’s records from 1927-1936. … In every one of these three minute records, there’s a magic moment somewhere. Every one of them. I really learned how to handle a song from him. I learned how to love music from him. Because he loved music and he did everything with love and care. So he’s my main influence I think.”
- Gil Evans

In his book, Arranging the Score: Portraits of the Great Arranger, Gene Lees entitles his chapter on arranger-composer Gil Evans – He Fell from a Star.

As far as I was concerned, Gil could have come from anywhere.

I had no idea who he was until he magically appeared in my life one day courtesy of Pacific Jazz’s LP: - New Bottle Old Wine: The Great Jazz Composers Interpreted by Gil Evans and His Orchestra.

The album is a showcase for alto saxophonist Julian “Cannonball” Adderley who offers superb renditions of Gil’s arrangements beginning with St. Louis Blues and concluding with Charlie Parker’s Bird Feathers.

In essence, the eight treatments of Jazz classics on the album represent a salute to the first 25-years or so of Jazz composition and Gil weaves them together into a continuous “suite” through his use of transitional interludes, riffs and vamps.

The Gil Evans and His Orchestra part of the LP title is a bit of a misnomer because as Doug Ramsey explains, Gil “… never had his own full time band. For three decades he did his magical work with specially chosen musicians in studios and concert halls or with his once-a-week band at New York nightclubs.  The evidence of his genius with shimmering vertical harmonies, moving lines, and mysterious voicings is in a body of recordings … .” [p. 415 from Doug’s essay Big Bands and Jazz Composing and Arranging After World War II, in Bill Kirchner, ed., The Oxford Companion to Jazz.

I no sooner had the chance to “digest” my initial “discovery” of Gil when suddenly he appeared to be everywhere present on the Jazz scene, mostly in the form of a series of block-buster Columbia LP’s that featured the trumpet playing of Miles Davis including Miles Ahead, Porgy and Bess and Sketches of Spain.


Who was this guy, where did he comes from and why was he “… regarded by many as the most gifted of all Jazz arrangers, but Ellington …?” [Ramsey. Loc cit.].

From a variety of sources, I eventually found out that Gil’s relationship with Miles antedated their Columbia albums by a dozen or so years going back their initial meeting at the 52nd Street clubs that came into existence primarily following World War II.

According to Ted Gioia:

“Evans was little known at the time, even in Jazz circles. His biggest claim to fame, to the extent he enjoyed any, was due to his forward-looking arranging for the Claude Thornhill orchestra.

The Thornhill band was a jumble of contradictions: it was sweet and hot by turns; progressive and nostalgic—both to an extreme; overtly commercial, yet also aspiring to transform jazz into art music. Like Paul Whiteman, Thornhill may have only obscured his place in Jazz history by straddling so many different styles.

Jazz his­torians, not knowing what to do with this range of sounds, prefer to relegate Thornhill to a footnote and dismiss him as a popularizer or some sort of Claude De­bussy of jazz. True, this band was best known for its shimmering, impressionistic sound, exemplified in Thornhill's theme "Snowfall."

But this was only one facet of the Thornhill band. Evans, in particular, brought a harder, bop-oriented edge to the group, contributing solid arrangements of modern jazz pieces such as "Anthropol­ogy,""Donna Lee," and "Yardbird Suite." In due course, these songs would become jazz standards, practice-room fodder for legions of musicians, but at the time Evans was one of the few arrangers interested in translating them into a big band format.

Yet Evans was equally skillful in developing the more contemplative side of the Thornhill band. His later work with Davis would draw on many devices—static harmonies, unusual instruments (for jazz) such as French horn and tuba, rich voicings — refined during his time with Thornhill.

Gerry Mulligan would also con­tribute arrangements to the Thornhill band, and later credited the leader with "having taught me the greatest lesson in dynamics, the art of under-blowing." He de­scribed the Thornhill sound as one of "controlled violence"—perhaps an apt char­acterization of the cool movement as a whole [The History of Jazz, p. 281, paragraphing modified].”


Gil Evans offered more background about his time on the Thornhill band, with Miles on 52nd Street and the Boplicity or Birth of the Cool recordings in the following excerpts taken from his September 1956 interview on  Ben Sidran’s NPR program Talking Jazz:

Gil: Yeah, right, I met Claude Thornhill in Hollywood. I came out there to write some arrangements for this band, Skinny Ennis's band, who was on the Bob Hope show. And I was writing arrangements for that.

Claude had an insurance policy that he was going to cash in, and he couldn't decide whether to go to Tahiti for the rest of his life or go back to New York and start a band. Which he decided to do. So I said to him, "If you ever need an arranger, let me know." So when his chief arranger got drafted, he sent for me. That was in 1941, '42. Then we all got drafted. So when he reorganized back in '46, I was with him again for a while.

But by that time, the scene had changed. The swing band era was over right? He just missed it by that three or four years in the service. He could have scored, but coming back into it again, pop music had come along and rock and roll, and folk and all that. So he had a hard time booking the band. And the band was big.
It was a wonderful workshop for me.

It had three trumpets and two trombones and two French horns and two altos, two tenors, baritone and a separate flute section, right? Three flute players, didn't play anything but flutes. And a tuba. So it was a big nut for him, and he finally had to give it up.

Ben: Was it Claude's idea to include the French horns and the tuba, initially?

Gil: The French horns were his idea, yeah. But the tuba, I got that in there. And the flutes. But the French horns he had quite a while. He had them before the war, too, you know.

He was like a practical joker, in a way. And so a clarinet was out in front of the band playing "Summertime"... I don't know if you ever heard of a clarinet player named Fazola?

Ben: Sure, Irving Fazola.

Gil: Beautiful tone, and oh, no one ever had a more beautiful tone than Fazola. So he's out there playing "Summertime," and Claude signaled to these two guys, and they came up from the audience and sat down and started playing these French horns in sustained harmony underneath him. And nobody in the band knew that was going to happen. Faz couldn't believe it. He looked around.

But the band sounded like horns anyway, even before he got them. It was one of the first bands that played without a vibrato, you know. Be­cause the vibrato had been "in" all the time in jazz, ever since, well, Louis Armstrong, you know, that vibrato.
But then Claude’s band played with no vibrato, and that’s what made it compatible with bebop. Because the bebop players were playing with no vibrato. And they were interested in the impressionistic harmony, you know, that I had used with Claude. Minor ninths and all that.

That's how we got together, really. That's the reason we got together. Because of the fact that there was no vibrato plus the harmonic devel­opment. Because up until that time, with the swing bands, mostly the harmony had been from Fletcher Henderson, really. Where you harmo­nize everything with the major sixth chords and passing tones with a di­minished chord, you know. So that was how things changed with bebop.

Ben: Also, the addition of the French horns and the tuba got the arrange­ments out of the more traditional "sections"—brass section, woodwind section—and made it more of a continuous palette for you.

Gil: Well, when Miles and I got together to do the Capitol record [Birth of the Cool] we just had to figure out how few instruments, and which ones, we could use to cover the harmonic needs of Claude Thornhill's band, you know. Naturally, with a big band like that, you have a lot of doubles. But we just trimmed it down to the six horns. Six horns and three rhythm, and those six horns covered all the harmonic needs that we had. …

Ben: That particular recording very quietly started some sort of revolution in jazz.

Gil: I wasn't even there. You know, I had to go home to see my mother in California, so I wrote that arrangement and gave it to Miles. But we were all so in tune with each other that I didn't have any worries at all. They just played it, and when I heard it, it was as though I had been there.

That's the way it was with all the records I made with Miles, the big band records, too. Because even though the notes were different, and they weren't familiar with the arrangements, they were so familiar with the idiom, you know, that we made those big band records in three three-hour sessions with no rehearsal. Nowadays, that's unheard of, right? You get a hundred hours, now, or more. But we got nine hours to make that thing, with no rehearsals. But the band, the whole band I picked out, they had the idiom under their fingers. So it was possible to do that.

Ben: That band, the "Boplicity" band, came together through a series of informal gatherings at your apartment over a couple of years.


Gil: I rented a room a couple of blocks from 52nd Street, you know. When I got off the train, I got in a cab and I went right to 52nd Street. I didn't have a place to stay. I threw my bag in a check room and I just walked up and down The Street there and met a bunch of my heroes. First night, I met all my heroes! I met Ben [Webster] and Lester [Young], Erroll Garner and Bud Powell, all these people the first night.

So I got a room a couple blocks away, a basement room. Just one big room with a bed and a piano and a record player and a sink. And I left the door open for two years. Just left it open. I never locked it. When I went out, I never locked it. So sometimes I'd come home and I'd meet strangers. And most of the time I met people like Miles and John Lewis and people like that. George Russell.

We talked a lot about harmony. How to get a "sound" out of harmony. Because the harmony has a lot to do with what the music is going to "sound" like. The instruments have their wave form and all that, but the harmony means that you're putting together a group of instruments, and they're going to get their own independent wave form, right? You can't get it any other way except as an ensemble together.

So Miles and I talked about that lots of times. And played chords on the piano. And that's how it happened.

Ben: The "sound" that you did come up with so perfectly suited Miles' sound that it almost seemed like one gesture.

Gil: That's right...

Ben: You talk about the extension of the Thornhill sound. You once said about the Thornhill band that "the band was a reduction to inactivity, a stillness..."

Gil: Oh, it was. That's right.

Ben: And "the sound would hang like a cloud."

Gil: That's right. Oh yeah.

Ben: Part of what you created, then, in the "Boplicity" session is a new approach to jazz, where even with a small group, it wasn't a separate thing, a rhythm section and a horn section, but rather it was a "sound." Almost a studio form before there were studio forms.

Gil: Yeah, right.

Ben: You mention the Miles Ahead big band session. "Boplicity" was re­corded in 1949 ...

Gil: We didn't get together again until '57...” [pp. 16-19]


We found this summation by Bill Kirchner on the significance of these Boplicity or Birth of the Cool recordings in Gene Lees’ chapter on Gil:

“Saxophonist/composer/arranger/author Bill Kirchner, who teaches jazz composition at the New School, wrote in a paper delivered at a conference on Miles Davis held on 8 April 1995, at Washington University in St. Louis, Mis­souri, that the group that grew out of those sessions in Gil's pad was an anomaly: "It recorded only a dozen pieces for Capitol and played in public for a total of two weeks in a nightclub, but its recordings and their influence have been compared to the Louis Armstrong Hot Fives and Sevens, and to other classics by Duke Ellington, Count Basie, and Charlie Parker. Though its personnel changed frequently, many of the nonet's members and composer-arrangers became jazz musicians of major stature. Most notable were Davis, trombonists J. J. Johnson and Kai Winding, alto saxophonist Lee Konitz, baritone saxophonist and arranger Gerry Mulligan, pianist and arranger John Lewis, pianist Al Haig, drummers Max Roach, Kenny Clarke, and Art Blakey, and arrangers Gil Evans and John Carisi...

"The Birth of the Cool sides were recorded in three sessions on 21 January and 22 April 1949, and on 9 March 1950. Issued initially as single 78s and eventually in various LP collections, these recordings had an enormous impact on musicians and the jazz public. Principally, they have been credited - or blamed, depending on one's point of view - for the subsequent popu­larity of "cool" or "west coast" jazz. Indeed, composer-arrangers such as Mulligan, Shorty Rogers, Marty Paich, and Duane Tatro were inspired by the Birth of the Cool instrumentation and approach.

"A good deal of their music, though, was more aggressive and rhythmic than some critics would lead us to believe - the frequent presence of such impeccably swinging drummers as Shelly Manne and Mel Lewis alone insured that.

"But the Birth of the Cool influence extended far beyond west coast jazz, and frequently appeared in all sorts of unexpected places. In the '50s, east coast composer-arrangers such as Gigi Gryce, Quincy Jones, and Benny Golson produced recordings using this approach, as did traditionalist Dick Gary, who used the style in orchestrating a set of Dixieland warhorses. Thelonious Monk, with arranger Hall Overton, used an almost identical Birth of the Cool instrumentation for his famed 1959 Town Hall concert. The format was proving to have all sorts of possibilities for creative jazz writing.

"Gil Evans spent much of the rest of his career expanding on the innova­tions of his Thornhill and Birth of the Cool scores."

What is generally overlooked is a point made by Max Harrison: that the "cool" did not begin with those nonet sessions. "There has always been cool jazz,"…” [pp. 91-92]

Perhaps because my initial involvement with Jazz was in California in the 1950s when the music of the West Coast “cool” school was still very much apparent, I have always had an affinity for its sound or texture.

What I noticed almost immediately about Gil’s writing was it’s appealing texture.

But what is a musical definition of texture which joins with melody, harmony and rhythm [meter] as a fourth building block used to create a musical composition?

Ironically, of these four basic musical atoms, the most indefinable yet the one we first notice is – texture.

Texture is the word that is used to refer to the actual sound of the music. This encompasses the instruments with which it is played; its tonal colors; its dynamics; its sparseness or its complexity.

Texture involves anything to do with the sound experience and it is the word that is used to describe the overall impression that a piece of music creates in our emotional imagination.

Often our first and most lasting impression of a composition is usually based on that work’s texture, even though we are not aware of it. Generally, we receive strong musical impressions from the physical sound of any music and these then determine our emotional reaction to the work.

Beyond the texture or sound of his music and the lasting physical and emotional impact it can create, Gil’s music is also heavily rhythmic – the most visceral and fundamental of all the musical elements.

Music takes place in time and like many great composers, Gil uses rhythms and the relationships between rhythms to express many moods and musical thoughts.

He uses rhythm to provide a primal, instinctive kind of foundation for the other musical thoughts [themes and motifs] to build upon.

This combination of powerful, repetitive rhythmic phrases and the manner in which he textures the sound of his music over them provides many of Gil’s arrangements with a magisterial quality.


Another of Gil’s great skills as a composer is that he never seems to be at a loss for the new rhythms that he needs to create musical interest in his work. He is a master at using the creative tension between unchanging meter and constantly changing rhythms and these rhythmic variations help to produce a vitality in his music.

In his use of melody, Gil’s approach to composing, arranging and orchestrating appears to have much in common with the Classical composers of the late 18th and early 19th century [Mozart & Beethoven as examples] in that he relies on a series of measured and balanced musical phrases as the mainstay of much of his work.

And like these Classical composers, Gil is also careful not to let one musical element overwhelm the others: balance between elements is as important as balance within any one of them.

Gil obviously places a high value on melody in his writing as his original themes or the manner in which he orchestrates the theme of standard tunes have a way of finding themselves into one’s subconscious and staying there a la – “I can’t get this tune out of my head.”

This is in large part because Gil works with melodies to make them easily-remembered short phrases, generally four or eight bars in length and these are often heard in combination with other similar phrases to fashion something akin to a musical mosaic with individual pieces joining together to create a musical whole.

Gil crafts little melodic devices that are wonderful examples of the composer’s art. And he has learned over the years to base his compositions out of the fewest possible melodic building blocks because if there too many melodies, or for that matter, too many rhythms and too many different chords in a piece, the listener can get confused and eventually bored.

And on the subject of chords, the building blocks of harmony, here Gil’s approach involving multi-part harmony is more akin to modern composers such as Debussy, Bartok and Stravinsky than to those of the Classical period.

As Bill Kirchner, Gene Lees and Max Harrison, among others, have noted, the melodic, harmonic, rhythmic and textural elements that are combined to make a “cooler” Jazz have been around since the beginnings of the music itself.

In the December 1958 and February 1960 issues of the original Jazz Monthly magazine, Max Harrison provided a comprehensive and analytical review of Gil Evans’ music and his career dating back to his time with the Claude Thornhill orchestra in the mid-1940s and the Birth of the Cool recordings through the issuance of the Miles Davis collaborations on Columbia and the earliest recordings under Gil’s own name on Pacific Jazz, Verve and Impulse.

These articles were later collected and published in book form under the title A Jazz Retrospect.

We will post Max’s essay from this book in its entirely to form the second part of our visit with Gil Evans, a musician whose “… lack of formal training may be the key to his originality, for he can arrange harmonies that no one else has ever arranged and cluster instrumental groups that no one has ever sectioned before.” [Jack Chambers, Milestones, Vol. 1, p. 95].






“He is perhaps the only great writer in Jazz history who has always tended to work as an arranger of the work of others and rarely as a composer of his own material.”
- Leonard Feather

Evans’s originality does not require original compositions for its demonstration. His arrangements of other people’s compositions simply sparkle with his individualism; they overflow with invention. …

His tastes have been unencumbered by convention or bias, and his career has been almost untouched by self-promotion or self-aggrandizement.

And he has managed, on his own terms and at his own pace, to produce a body of work that holds its own proud place in Jazz.”
- Jack Chambers

“He knows what can be done, what the possibilities are.”
- Miles Davis

For someone who was virtually unknown to the general public for most of his career, Gil Evans certainly didn’t escape the attention of Max Harrison as the following, exhaustive retrospective of Evans’ music will attest.

In his essay, Max explores in greater detail the concept of Gil’s arranging skills serving as a basis for re-composition.

The editorial staff at JazzProfiles is proud to share Max Harrison’s narrative with it’s readers as it is a model of thoughtful analysis about one of Jazz’s largely unrecognized Giants.

© -Max Harrison/Jazz Monthly Magazine, copyright protected; all rights reserved.

“There has always been cool jazz. Far from being a new development of the 19505, this vein of expression, wherein the improviser 'distances' himself from the musical material, goes back almost to the beginning. The clarinetists Leon Roppolo of the New Orleans Rhythm Kings and Johnny O'Donnell of the Georgians, two bands that recorded in 1922, both avoided the conventions of 'hot' playing, as did other prominent jazzmen of that decade like Bix Beiderbecke and his associate Frankie Trumbauer. Much recorded by the New York school of the late 19205 follows a similar approach to expression, and this is true of several prominent figures of the 19308 such as Benny Carter, Teddy Wilson, and particularly Lester Young, whose links with the official 'cool' movement are acknowledged. The free jazz of the 19605, also, had its 'cool' exponents like John Tchicai and John Carter.

The comparatively reticent expression of such players was at a dis­advantage in the early years, when jazz was heard mainly in noisy dancehalls and cabarets, and attempts at an orchestral extension of their work suffered for a related reason. The large bands of Fletcher Henderson, Jimmy Lunceford and many others spent most of their days touring, and this imposed various kinds of standardization, not least upon instrumentation: a leader playing one-night stands, perhaps with long distances to travel between them, could scarcely appear with a different personnel, repertoire and instrumentation at each. Despite their undoubted—if somewhat overrated—contribution to jazz, the swing bands, once established, stood in the way of further orchestral developments. These could only resume when the bands came off the road and orchestral jazz was created by ad hoc groups assembled mainly, if not exclusively, for recording purposes. Such conditions allowed far more varied instrumentation than hitherto, a wider choice of repertoire—which no longer had to be orientated to a dancing public, and the application of more diverse techniques of writing. Missing from much of this later music is that feeling of integration which can only be achieved when a group of men play the same repertoire together over a long period, but in compensation the studio players' superior executive skills allowed more adventurous scores to be attempted.

As usual when such changes occur, the shift of emphasis had begun earlier than is generally assumed, and in an unexpected place. At first, Claude Thornhill's band had sounded rather like that of Glenn Miller (!), but he showed it was possible, with fairly discreet additions to a conventional dance band instrumentation, like French horn and tuba, and with devices such as having the reed section play without vibrato, to produce a strikingly fresh sound. This change, however, was not merely for the sake of novelty, which would be of little musical interest, but was a step towards expressing modes of feeling different from, perhaps even opposed to, those of the swing bands. Snowfall, a rather static composition of Thornhill's, confirms this, but, although he always insisted it was the leader who created this sound, it was Gil Evans who knew what to do with it. As Evans said, the sound "hung like a cloud" (Quoted in Nat Hentoff, ‘Birth of the Cool,’ Down Beat, May 2nd and 16th, 1957), which implies extreme relaxation; upon this background he imposed movement, and part of the exceptional effect of the best Thornhill recordings arises from an ambiguity between the energy of the music's gesture and the passivity of its basic tonal quality.

This is perhaps most evident in The old castle (This is incorrectly labeled The troubadour on all issues), originally a fairly simple keyboard piece by Mussorgsky, which in Evans's hands tells of a world rich and strange, full of subtle, elusive feelings; indeed, Steve Lacy, who played a later vintage of Evans's music, said "Sometimes, when things jelled, I felt true moments of ecstasy, and recently a friend of mine who worked with the Thornhill band in the 19408 when Gil was principal writer said that some nights the sound of the band around him moved him to tears" (Jazz review, September, 1959). It is remarkable that this was done with what fundamentally was still a dance band instrumentation, yet Evans's work, like many seemingly radical departures, had a sound traditional basis, and he took certain cues from Duke Ellington, whose Koko he appositely quotes in Thornhill's Arab dance. As Andre’ Hodeir said (Andre’ Hodier, Toward Jazz, New York, 1962), as far as scoring for a conventionally-instrumentated swing band was concerned, Ellington was so far ahead of his contemporaries that for many years there was no question of the underlying principles of his writing influencing them. When Evans began orchestrating along basically similar lines (though always with greater and more varied flexibility) it was not surprising, therefore, that the fact went unrecognized.

In his finest Thornhill scores, Evans, instead of blankly contrasting the brass and reed sections like Henderson in his arrangements for Benny Goodman in the 19305, blends them in an almost infinite variety of ways. With such pieces as his evocative treatment of La paloma we find the craft of dance band arranging transformed virtually into an art of re-composition, for Evans quite drastically re-orders the components of each piece. In some cases, such as the extremely original writing behind and after the expressionless singing on Sorta kinda, the result almost seems a deliberate mockery of swing band conventions, so considerably does it improve on the standardized scoring which then prevailed in most other places.


That standardization reached such a point that we normally listen to swing records—and Henderson's band is a good example—only for the improvised solos, not for the ensemble scoring. But the orchestral idiom Evans worked out with Thornhill is of such distinction that the opposite is the case, and although the ensemble writing on, say, the performances of Charlie Parker themes is amazingly inventive and quite unlike anything else being done in the 19405, the soloists, with the exceptions of the guitarist Barry Galbraith on Anthropology and Donna Lee and the trumpeter Red Rodney in Yardbird suite, contribute nothing that is relevant. The best 'improvising' on these pieces, and on Robbins nest (despite an allusion to Kreisler's Caprice Viennois), occurs in Evans's orchestral passages, where he comments on the themes more creatively than any of the bandsmen, playing con' the ensemble just as a composer would. These sections are, indeed, a remarkable anticipa­tion of George Russell's later assertions that A Jazz writer is an improviser, too" (Sleeve note of George Russell, Jazz Workshop, American RCA LPM2534), and that the finest jazz composition "might even sound more intuitive than a purely improvised solo" (6). The point is underlined by comparing Evans's account of Yardbird suite with the bland arrangement of this piece Gerry Mulligan wrote for Gene Krupa, but Evans's best Thornhill moments come with the long Donna Lee introduction and the still more remarkable coda, which condenses some of the introductory material with real daring. Russell also said that a jazz composer might "write an idea that will sound so im­provised it might influence improvisers to play something they have never played before" (George Russell: ‘Where Do We Go From Here? In The Jazz World by Dom CerulliNew York, 1960). This is exactly what happened, though not inside the Thornhill band with its generally inadequate soloists.

Inevitably, many jazz musicians became interested in what Evans was doing, and prominent among them was Miles Davis, then a member of Parker's Quintet. Except in a few slow pieces like Embraceable you or Don't blame me, where he managed quite satisfactory improvisations, this trumpeter found the hectic complexity and furious aggression of bop uncongenial, and it is not surprising he was attracted to that music's opposite in the jazz of the late 19405. Eventually he decided, in Evans's words, that "he wanted to play his idiom with that kind of sound" (Hentoff, Ibid.), and the result was a band which, if it fulfilled scarcely any public engagements, made three historic recording sessions for the Capitol label in 1949 and '50. The story of that band and those sessions has been told many times and need not be repeated here, although it is useful to have Evans's confirmation that "the idea of Miles's band ... came from Claude's band in the sound sense. Miles liked some of what Gerry [Mulligan] and I had written" (Hentoff, Ibid.). In the course of discussions between Davis, Evans, Mulligan, John Lewis and others it was decided that what they needed was a medium-sized group that besides having the cool, restrained Thornhill sound would com­bine chamber music intimacy with much of the variety of texture possible to a full jazz orchestra. The instrumentation was: trumpet, trombone, French horn, tuba, alto and baritone saxophones, piano, bass, percussion, and, again according to Evans, this choice was decided by its being "the smallest number of instruments that could get the sound and still express all the harmonies Thornhill used" (Hentoff, Ibid). Although subject to various changes, the personnel was selected with care so as to ensure all participants were sympathetic to the musical aims of this unusual enterprise. That the leaders were not completely clear about those objectives, however, was shown by the fact that they considered giving their alto chair to the highly unsuitable Sonny Stitt (This little-known detail is given in Leonard Feather, Jazz – an Exciting Story of Jazz Today, Los Angeles, 1959), a Parker disciple, instead of to the far more apt Lee Konitz, who did in fact get it. The final choices were, indeed, excellent, and the music had a unity which must always be rare in jazz.


Nearly all the studio performances will repay detailed study, and they were supplemented years later by the appearance on an obscure Italian label (Miles Davis, Pre-Birth of the Cool, Italian Cicala BLJ8003; the relevant scores are, of course, by Gil Evans, not Bill Evans, as given on the sleeve) of recordings of 1948 broadcasts from the Royal Roost, where the band played briefly in New York; luckily, these include items not done for Capitol, such as Lewis's S'ilvousplait, Evans's Why do I love you?, alternative versions of his Moondreams, etc. The group's musical approach has been subject to repeated analysis because it represented the first viable alternative to bop, although, still following the Thornhill precedent, its importance lay in an ensemble style, not solo playing. Several of the pieces—Move, Venus de Milo, Budo—were mainly vehicles for improvisation, yet it was more significant that the sounds of all instruments were fused in a texture whose parts moved with a supple fluidity that contrasted with the hard, bright, darting lines of bop. The harmonic vocabulary was quite advanced for the jazz )f that time, but the constantly shifting pastel sounds were chiefly the result of orchestration which took some of Evans's procedures with the Thornhill band to their logical conclusion. With trombone, baritone saxophone and tuba, the instrumentation might seem to place undue emphasis on the bottom register, yet, although this obviously does account for the repertoire's dark tone, the absence of a tenor sax­ophone's rich voice helps to keep the characteristic veiled textures from becoming too cloudy. Further, so far as one can tell without seeing the scores, the most dissonant note in any chord is usually given to the French horn, the softest-voiced of the wind instruments present, and this helped deflect the music's astringency, contributed to the air of remoteness and mystery which it retains even in the most obviously 'exciting' up-tempo moments.

Undoubtedly the most original piece the band recorded was John Carisi's Israela modal blues which stands high among the recorded classics of jazz. But Evans's contributions run it close, and in Moon-dreams the very brevity of the solo passages, by Konitz and Mulligan, emphasize that this is an essentially orchestral conception, in fact a study of slow-moving harmonies crossed with subtle changes of tex­ture. Its sonorous gravity is relieved by a passage wherein the horns ascend and then peel off, leaving Konitz sustaining a high, thin note which contrasts almost dramatically with the full, deep chords that soon engulf it. In the quiet final sequence, against long-sustained har­monies, the horns play odd, disjointed little fragments of phrases which create a pointilliste effect. This passage, which is more effective in the broadcast versions than on the studio recording, is reminiscent of the fragmentary brass phrases under high tremolo strings in Variation II of Strauss's Don Quixote or of the tiny oboe and clarinet phrases snickering around the brass in Variation IV. Strauss also provides a precedent for the melodic independence of Evans's tuba writing, although the climate of feeling the latter projects is far more rarefied in this case, the final vibrant stillness of Moondreams suggesting it to be the ensemble's tribute to their exemplar, Claude Thornhill.

It can scarcely need adding that this score is no mere 'arrangement' of a 'song', but is in the tradition of 'compositions for band', like Beiderbecke's Krazy kat or Thelonious Monk's original version of Epistrophy. All the pieces Davis recorded at these sessions, in fact, are set out as continually developing entities (note the skillfully varied thematic recapitulation of Move), and Evans's other main contribu­tion, Boplicity, is in this respect among the most interesting.

Of all these themes, this seems most perfectly suited to the ensemble's rich yet unadorned sonority, and its atmosphere of trancelike relaxed intensity is somehow heightened by the way at the close of the opening chorus the melody flows on into the first bar of the next, so that Mulligan's baritone saxophone passage starts only in the second bar—a small but delightful metrical surprise. Also noteworthy is the bridge of this second chorus. The first half consists of six bars instead of the expected four and the two main voices start an octave apart before spiraling off into counterpoint; the second half is of four bars and Davis's trumpet most tellingly alludes to the preceding phrase; the final eight bars of this chorus present an interesting variant of the main thematic phrase. The last chorus offers still more variety, with each eight-bar segment treated differently. The first is an excep­tionally fine duet between Davis and the ensemble, while in the second he is accompanied only by the rhythm section; the third is a piano solo by Lewis, and the gradually diminishing tonal weight of these twenty-four bars is balanced by the final eight bars' restatement of the chief thematic phrase—which at the same time answers the variant that occupied the same place in the preceding chorus.

If Why do I love you? is a far less perfect score this is because it has to accommodate Kenny Hagood's singing, but the final chorus still con­sists of a strikingly oblique restatement of—or rather allusion to—the original melody, another of Evans's written 'improvisations'.


Even if this music's commercial failure was unavoidable—and the band's library included several more excellent pieces unmentioned above, such as Lewis's Rouge, Mulligan's Rocker and George Wallington's Godchild— it still might have been expected, in view of its wealth of new resources, to affect other jazzmen. This it scarcely did at all. Echoes may be caught on the J. J. Johnson date of several years later which recorded Lewis's Sketch I, but as this had Lewis at the piano, and as both he and the trombonist had been in the Capitol group, this may be considered a direct descendant. A similar comment obviously applies to the Mulligan 1951 session which used two baritone saxophones, and to his later Tentet recordings. Almost .the only examples of indirect influence are a few virtually forgotten Shorty Rogers pieces such as Wail of two cities and Baklava bridge, and some Hal McKusick items discussed on another page. The jazz community, in fact, turned aside, as so often, from an area of potentially major growth, and the error was confirmed by the jazz press of that time, which disliked the Capitol titles because of their refusal to sink into some convenient pigeonhole. Altogether, people began to forget about Gil Evans: his brilliance had been made obvious, but several years passed before anyone was reminded of the fact.

Not that Evans was concerned. True, he did little recording work, but that was because he refused to write for less than the musicians' union standard fee—a trait unlikely to endear him to the artist and repertoire departments of certain companies. But he scored music for radio and tv, for nightclub acts and for what was left of vaudeville. Such records as he did arrange were mainly backgrounds for rather obscure singers like Marcy Lutes, Helen Merrill and Lucy Reed, though he did write a subtly evanescent, hauntingly memorable re-composition of You go to my head for Teddy Charles's Tentet LP, and, later still, Blues for Pablo and Jambangle for Hal McKusick. For the rest, Evans, a self-taught musician—though he insists that "everybody who ever gave me a moment of beauty, significance, excitement has been a teacher" (Quoted in the sleeve note of Gil Evans, Great Jazz Standards, American Pacific Jazz 28) —filled gaps in his education, "reading music history, biographies of composers, articles on criticism, and listening to records" (Hentoff, Ibid). There were other reasons for his relative non-participation in jazz at that time. As he said, "I have a kind of direction of my own .. . my interest in jazz, pop and sound in various com­binations has dictated what I would do at various times. At different times, one of the three has been stronger" (Hentoff, Ibid.). Such an attitude would obviously prevent Evans from being a member of any self-conscious and organized movement in music for any length of time, and it may be added that he has never been overly concerned with the 'importance' of his writing, as a lot of it has been done not so much as personal expression as in pursuance of further knowledge through learning in a practical way.

One is not surprised to find, therefore, that he writes slowly through a conscientious desire to avoid clichés: "I have more craft and speed than I sometimes want to admit. I want to avoid getting into a rut. I can't keep doing the same thing over and over. I'm not a craftsman in the same sense as a lot of writers I hear who do commercial and jazz work. They have a wonderful ability with the details of their craft. The details are all authentic, but, when it's over, you realize that the whole is less than the sum of the parts" (Hentoff, Ibid). Because his writing is so in­dividual, Evans has always found it necessary to rehearse his scores personally, and desirable to work with musicians of his own choosing. Mulligan comments on this: "Gil is the one arranger I've played who can really notate a thing the way a soloist would blow [play] it. ... For example, the down-beats don't always fall on the down-beats in a solo, and he makes a note of that. It makes for a more complicated notation, but, because what he writes is melodic and makes sense, it's not hard to play. The notation makes the parts look harder than they are, but Gil can work with a band, can sing to them what he wants, and begets it out of them" (Hentoff, Ibid.). It remains as difficult, however, to obtain an exact description of Evans's rehearsal and recording processes as it was of Ellington's. "No, no, it's more mysterious than that" protested Steve Lacy when, talking to him in London during the mid-1960s, the pre­sent writer probed with a series of technical questions. "You get so carried away by the feeling of his music that you lose sight of the details" (Jazz Monthly, March, 1966). In a sort of confirmation of this, Mulligan said that what attracted Charlie Parker to Evans's music was the exploratory stance it adopted. Later he wanted to play some of Evans's scores but, says the latter, "by the time he was ready to use me I wasn't ready to write for him. I was going through another period of learning by then" (Nat Hentoff, Ibid.)

Fortunately, he was ready for some more jazz by 1957, when Miles Davis decided to make an orchestral LP. Considering the lyrical fragility of the trumpeter's best work up till then, Miles Ahead may have seemed an unproductive idea, but what he wanted was to explore further the lines opened up by the Capitol sessions, especially as nobody else had troubled. Boplicity, in particular, had already demonstrated the perfect understanding between Davis and Evans, and the latter's collaboration was clearly essential. They decided to record ten pieces: John Carisi's Springsville, The maids of Cadiz, by Delibes, Dave Brubeck's The Duke, My ship by Kurt Weill, Davis's Miles ahead, Blues for Pablo by Evans, Ahmad Jamal's new rumba, The meaning of the blues by Bobby Troup, J.J.Johnson's Lament and a rather inconsequential Spina/Elliott standard called I don't wanna be kissed. Evans scored these as a series of miniature concertos for Davis, but fused them together in a continuous aural fresco whose connective resonance and authority gain strength with each addition. It sometimes is hard to isolate where one piece ends and another starts, but this principle of merging performances, discovered appar­ently during work on Miles Ahead, was taken further on subsequent LPs, eventually leading to a fusing of all other elements in his music.


Evans devised an interesting extension of the Capitol sessions' in­strumentation, a telling variant of that used by Thornhill: apart from Davis, who played flugelhorn, there were five trumpets, three tenor trombones, bass trombone, two French horns, tuba, two clarinets doubling flutes, bass clarinet, alto saxophone, string bass and percus­sion. These are treated largely as a body of individual players, and the chords are composed of the most varied tone-colors, which are dealt with according to their natural intensity, some being allowed greater prominence than others. In this respect one is reminded of Schoenberg's Funf Orchesterstucke Op. 16, especially No. 2, and it in­dicates the development of Evans's musical language that whereas Moondreams is reminiscent of aspects of Richard Strauss, here one thinks of Schoenberg. Miles Ahead has received so much attention elsewhere (For example, Andre’ Hodier, see note 4; Charles Fox: ‘Experiment with Texture’ in Jazzmen of Our Time, edited by Robert Horricks, London, 1959; Max Harrison, “Miles Davis – A Reappraisal’ in This is Jazz, edited by Kenneth Williamson, London, 1960) that comment on separate movements is unnecessary, though the scoring's effect is often that of light imprisoned in a bright mineral cave, its refinement such that at times the music flickers deliciously between existence and non-existence. No matter how in­volved the textures, though, it always is possible to discover unifying factors as an altogether remarkable ear is in control, ruthlessly—and almost completely—eliminating clichés. Complaints that these Davis/Evans collaborations produced un-rhythmic music were due to faulty hearing, and the widely quoted metaphorical description of the textures as "port and velvet" (Whitney Balliett, The Sound of Surprise, New York, 1959) is inept. Despite its richness, the orchestral fabric is constantly on the move, horizontally and vertically; it is unfortunate that some listeners cannot hear music's pulse unless it is stated as a series of loud bangs. The introverted mood of several panels in the Miles Ahead fresco had been anticipated by Ellington pieces such as Blue serge, and the underlying clarity of Evans's construc­tions is revealed by setting this version of Blues for Pablo beside the one earlier recorded by a Hal McKusick small group. Both preserve the same relationships between themes, tempos, degrees of textural den­sity, etc., and form an amusing comment on the notion that Evans provided Davis merely with vague impressionistic backgrounds.

In fact, and even though one may object to the show business men­tality which lies behind the phrase, he had made the most remarkable comeback in jazz history. Soon his imitators were demonstrating how inimitable his methods were, some of the worst examples being Ernie Wilkins's scores for the Map of Jimmy Cleveland LP (American Mercury MG20442) and certain Bill Matthieu pieces for Stan Kenton's band, especially Willow weep for me, The meaning of the blues (both with Rolf Ericson assuming the Miles Davis role) and Django (All on American Creative World ST1049). All these simply fit together various elements learnt—by rote, as it were—from Evans, whereas his scores are developing musical organisms which establish and proceed from premises of their own.

Further collaborations with Davis followed. Some, like the Quiet Nights disc, exposed the partnership's weaknesses, and Evans's boring re-write of the first movement of Rodrigo's Concierto de Aranjuez. was a strange miscalculation. So, too, was the bogus flamenco of Saeta and Solea, although these were solo vehicles for Davis in which Evans had little part. The last three items are on the Sketches of Spain LP, but an altogether finer expression of Evans's taste for Iberian music is Lotus land, a track on the Guitar Forms record that he made with Kenny Burrell (American Verve MGV8612). However, before either Quiet Nights or Sketches of Spain came Porgy and Bess, which contains, at least in potential, the finest music Davis and Evans recorded together.

Of course, in its original form Gershwin's opera takes up an entire evening, but the excerpts Evans and Davis selected are put together in such a way as to summarize the drama's several aspects. They show, also, that the original music has deeper roots than Gershwin's detrac­tors concede—deeper, perhaps, than he himself knew. On certain items, such as Prayer or My man's gone now, occurs some of the most eloquent playing Davis ever recorded, and though Evans frequently sets dark, massed sonorities against the trumpeter's passionate self-com­muning, there is some exquisite scoring, too, as in Fishermen, strawberry and devil crab or Here comes the honey man. Hear, also, Davis's re-reading of It ain't necessarily so, whose meaningful obliqueness is set oil by stac­cato French horn chords—Evans for once using a conventional device.

Although the Porgy and Bess LP contains magnificent jazz—and one plays some tracks over and over, as if to savor a rare essence—the performances left even more to be desired than those of Miles Ahead. One cannot be sure about such things without seeing the scores (and it is a perpetual handicap to the proper musicological study of jazz that scores are never obtainable), but one of the musicians who played on the Porgy and Bess dates shortly afterwards said the following in a private communication to the present writer:

"The crux of the matter is that Gil, on both sets of dates, did not rehearse carefully enough, as is evident already on Miles Ahead. I believe this is mostly the result of the unfortunate conditions under which American recording is done. It is too costly for any project of more than average difficulty to be done well, unless the music in question is rehearsed before the date (which is illegal according to union rules), or has been previously performed.

"Under these, to say the least, less than ideal circumstances, both Miles and Gil have a too relaxed attitude about accomplishing the tasks they set themselves. In pieces which are scored as sensitively and as intricately as Gil's, it's a shame to let the performances cancel out half of their effectiveness. Many details of scoring simply could not be—or at least were not—touched upon in the sessions I was on. Some things were left undone which I would not have let go.

"But, as I've indicated, the blame lies more with the conditions than the people. And I suppose one could say that it is remarkable that both LPs are as good as they are. If Gil were a better conductor it would also help: he sometimes confused the players. On the other hand, he is quite patient—perhaps too much so for his own good—and very pleasant to work for. Whatever excellence these recordings possess I would attribute (aside from Gil's own magnifi­cent scores, of course) primarily to the supreme abilities of some of the leading players, like Ernie Royal [trumpet], Bill Barber [tuba], the very fine reed men (on all manner of flutes and bass clarinets), and in general the respect which all of us, despite what I've said above, have for Gil Evans."


Such problems were considerable, yet Evans solved them with alacrity—indeed as soon as he began making records under his own name instead of in partnership with Davis. One or two items on his first, Gil Evans plus Ten (Several Evans LPs have been given misleading new titles on reissue. …), such as Remember or Nobody's heart, may appear to continue the line of ballad scores he wrote for Thornhill, as if he were recapitulating before going on to something new, but in fact the material ranged from Ella Speed, associated with the folksinger Huddie Leadbetter, to Tadd Dameron's If you could see me now. A commitment to the present is enriched by a sense of the past, and this marked the beginning of a personal reassessment of the jazz repertoire, and from his next record, New Bottle Old Wine, onwards Evans turned his back on non-jazz themes. The latter disc conducts a miniature history of jazz, running from W. C. Handy's St Louis blues to Bird feathers by Charlie Parker, but Evans makes all eight compositions his own while paradoxically preserving their original extremely diverse characters; by a further paradox, he appears to give his chief soloist complete freedom while clearly remaining in control of every bar. That soloist is 'Cannonball' Adderley, a minor disciple of Parker, and so this LP gives a hint of what might have happened if Evans had been able to work with the great altoist himself. In the event, several others, including the trombonist Frank Rehak in Strutting with some barbeque and Chuck Wayne, the guitarist, on Lester leaps in, outclass Adderley, and Evans's writing provides so stimulating and enriching a commentary as almost to swamp them all.

Certainly it is untrue to assert, as some writers have, that he needs a soloist to focus his processes around. In St Louis blues, though Adderley appears to hold the centre of the stage, the shifting, tirelessly inventive background is of such fascination, what with Evans's characteristic reshaping of the themes, his alterations to the harmony, and such details as the independent guitar or tuba lines, that the listener soon finds himself attending not to the soloist but to the 'accompaniment'. And in King Porter stomp, also, how much further Evans goes in such matters than, say, Henderson in his arrangement of this piece for Goodman's band: to speak of variations on the themes would be too formal a description of a process so free, and here again we have written 'improvisations' in exactly the sense that George Russell meant (6). The same is true of all the other tracks, which teem with interest and range from the quietly luminous sensitivity of Fats Waller's Willow tree to the violent assertion of Dizzy Gillespie's Mantecawhose virtuoso brass writing the players throw of! with such apparently casual ferocity.

On Evans's next LP, Great Jazz Standards, the soloists got closer to holding their own. Johnny Coles has a beautiful trumpet solo in Bix Beiderbecke's Davenport blues, as does Steve Lacy, on soprano sax­ophone, in Monk's Straight, no chaser. Yet Budd Johnson does better still, his rounded clarinet phrases contrasting with the abrupt whole-tone lines of Don Redman's Chant of the weed, the solid 4/4 of his tenor saxophone solo on Evans's Theme being excellently set off by complex brass figures. To how much better advantage does Johnson appear in these surroundings, or on Evans's Out of the Cool record, than in the dreary 'mainstream' sessions (For example, Budd Johnston, Blues a la Mode, American Felstead FAJ7007) which usually are this neglected musician's lot! Evans can use these and other soloists in pieces which are far removed from their normal style or period—e.g. Coles on Davenport blues—without any incongruity because the material is so transformed, the vision so strong as to unify everything. His orchestra­tion of Straight, no chaser is far more to the point, though also far more elaborate, particularly the final ensemble, than previous attempts, by Hall Overton and others (For instance Monk at Town Hall, American Riverside RLP-12-300), to score Monk themes, and throughout this LP the level of invention, yet again, is amazingly high, above all in the lengthy and very searching treatment of John Lewis's Django. Hear, too, the ensemble textures in Ballad of the sad young men—massive yet without any hint of inflexibility. It is the same on the next record, Out of the Cool, which contains, for example, a hypnotically prolonged When flamingoes fly, whose acute melancholy is etherealized, dissolved. Such pieces well accord with Claude Levi-Strauss's view of music as ‘a machine for the suppression of time' (Claude Levi-Strauss, Le Cru et le Cuit, Paris, 1974), and embody a more authen­tically modern sensibility than a lot of more overtly dissonant jazz.

From this point on there is a striking loosening-up of Evans's music, comparable only to that undergone by George Russell's work after he began to make his Sextet discs for the Riverside label. Consider, for instance, the much freer treatment of the background riff in Summertime on the Svengali LP in comparison with the earlier version on the Porgy and Bess disc. No longer is Evans concerned with mathematical symmetry or balanced repetition, but rather, it seems, with a reflection of the mysterious complexity of the forms of nature, in particular nature's love of analogy instead of repetition. The lyrical tenor sax­ophone 'solos' by Wayne Shorter in Barbara story on The Individualism of Gil Evans two-LP set or by Billy Harper in the Ampex General assembly are only single threads in textures which now defy both description and analysis; the music is a seamless web in which lines cross and re-cross, glowing, opalescent colours come and go in inex­haustible combinations. Hear, for example, the magically woven fabric of Hotel me on the Individualism set, the exquisite beauty of even the tiniest details of the Ampex Proclamation. On these later recordings identification between the music and the individual performers is so complete that, especially in deep, multi-voiced ensembles like those of Concorde, it is impossible to guess where writing stops and improvisation begins. There is an extraordinary reconciliation, or rather a shifting balance between freedom and control whose philosophical im­plications go beyond jazz, beyond music.


At this stage each Evans record is 'untypical' because he sets himself different objectives every time. But despite this constant renewal, there are still lines of continuity. Thus Joe Beck, guitarist on the Ampex date, occupies a position midway between horns and rhythm section like that of Ray Crawford in Out of the Cool or Barry Galbraith on the Russell/McKusick LPs. In fact this music increasingly happens on several levels at once, recalling the multiplicity of events in Charles Ives's works. For instance on Las Vegas tango, a gravely serene piece from the Individualism set, things happen close up, in sharp focus, others take place in the middle distance, some murmur far away on the horizon, and the exactness of Evans's aural imagination is such that we can hear it all, every note, every vibration, carrying significance. Yet one gains the impression that he feels music, like other forms of truth, should never be immediately understood, that there should always remain some further element to be revealed. Note the gradual, almost reluctant, disclosure of the melodies of La nevada and Bilbao song, or the way the theme of Joy spring is not heard until right at the end.

These endings, many of which fade, like beautiful sunsets, as we look at them, in turn suggest by their very inconclusiveness that Evans, again like Ives, has an Emersonian dislike of the spiritual inactivity which comes from the belief that one possesses a truth in its final form. It is tempting, to think that in achieving the lyrical resignation of Flute song or the alert tranquility of Barbara story Evans uses sounds rather as Mallarme uses words—as mirrors that focus light from a hundred different angles on to his precise meaning. But they remain symbols of meaning rather than the meaning itself, and much is left to the im­agination. If the listener is unwilling, or, worse still, unable, to exercise this faculty then he will soon be left behind.

Jazz Monthly, December 1958 and February 1960”

Abe Most: A Profile by Gary Foster

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


“No matter what artistic credentials might be previously acquired, when a jazz musician takes a position of security or one of financial stability as opposed to accepting and living the rigors of the jazz life, the critical press often registers displeasure.”
- Gary Foster, multi reed and woodwind instrumentalist

Multi reed and woodwind instrumentalist Gary Foster “dropped by” the editorial offices of JazzProfiles recently and shared a copy of the following article that he wrote about clarinetist Abe Most.

The article first appeared in the February-March, 1996 issue of The Clarinet [Volume 23, No. 2].

In his piece, Gary included a technical transcription of Abe’s solo work on Mexican Hat Dance that have been omitted here because it would mainly be of interest to other clarinetists. But we have developed a video with Abe’s outstanding solo on Mexican Hat Dance as played by the Les Brown Band featured as part of the sound track and you can locate the video montage at the close of this piece.

In addition to his detailed treatment of Abe’s career, Gary’s essay contains a marvelous description of a musician’s life in the Hollywood studios following the Second World War. If you had the chops and the reading skills, the period from about 1945-1965 was a Golden Age in the Golden State for a studio musician.

Enter Abe Most.


© -Gary Foster: copyright protected; all rights reserved; used with the author’s permission.

“At age 75, Abe Most has been a working professional clarinetist for 60 of his years. Never a man to rust on his laurels, Abe is as concerned about the personal music he will play today and tomorrow as he has been about the music in his illustrious past. At an age when many of his colleagues have fixed their last reed or have long since become more interested in their golf game or rose garden, Abe is editing a recent recording for release as his first compact disc and, of all things for a veteran of the music wars, he is planning to take to the road. In mid-January 1996. Abe and his wife, Gussie. will board a bus along with a big band of 15, vocalist Julius La Rosa and the Ink Spots for a two-month national tour. Abe will conduct and will be featured soloist in a program tribute to Artie Shaw. The eagerness and enthusiasm Abe expresses for this on-the-road-again project is spoken in terms he might have used when he joined his first name band ... in 1941.

Except for the fact, proudly told by Abe. that his father, at age 65. became cantor of his synagogue in the Bronx, Abe's parents were not musical. Of his two brothers and two sisters, only one. brother Sam, developed musical interests. Sam Most, ten years Abe's junior, is a distinguished jazz artist in his own right. Sam's place in jazz history is uniquely secured by the fact that he is credited with being the first to record a jazz flute solo.

By the time Abe was nine, the family had moved to Atlantic City. The public schools there offered music instruction. and Abe, who had heard and liked the city band, saw himself with a trombone. It was a clarinet that his father brought home, however, and typical of the time, it was a metal clarinet just like the one many of us started out on. Saved for him over the years by his mother, that very instrument has been handsomely framed and has a prominent place on the Most's living room wall.

Soon, Abe had "strictly classical" lessons with Atlantic City clarinetist. Walter Parella. Abe's parents operated a grocery store and, with lunch an added bonus for the teacher, lessons often ran to three hours in length.

The neighborhood kids were listening to improvised jazz, especially to Bobby Hackett. and soon a small combo of sorts was trying to find the sounds of the music they were hearing. Long before anyone dreamed that jazz education would flourish and become a major movement in schools, Abe and his friends, in what has perhaps always been the best way to start, learned by trial and error and with their own good ears and strong desire.

The family moved back to New York City and, by his mid-teens, having acquired considerable skills and a repertoire of tunes of the day, Abe was able to work during the summers in the Catskill mountains, an area of resort hotels famous for entertainment just a short distance from New York. "We couldn't play in the big rooms." says Abe. "but we earned our room and board and made $10 a week." The valuable practical experience gained there was soon to pay off.

Joe Allard's teaching studio was well known by then and, now back in the Apple. Abe began to study clarinet and saxophone with Joe. "Lessons were again about basic. legit clarinet playing, but one day Joe stepped out of the room and I began noodling some jazz licks," remembers Abe. "Joe returned, listened a bit, and asked me to write some of those ideas out for him to show other students." Joe Soldo, another Allard pupil, recalled recently that Joe kept a large manuscript volume of excerpts and improvised jazz solo transcriptions for his students to copy for their practice.

By the mid-1930s, Benny Goodman was the preeminent clarinetist in jazz, and Abe soon fell under Benny's spell. In 1936, immediately after their triumph at the Palomar Ballroom in California, Benny returned to New York for a long stay at the Manhattan room of the Pennsylvania Hotel. "I used to hang out, under age of course, at the hotel to hear Benny and the band. Benny really made me want to play. One evening Benny provided a table for me and my family. That was the biggest thrill of my life," Abe recalls.

Abe's comment on how he felt when he first heard Artie Shaw is quite interesting. "Benny is the guy who got me practicing, but then ! heard Artie and said, 'What the hell is that?' ... him coming in with sixteenth notes. And he knew the harmony. Benny didn't always know the harmony."

By 1939. then barely 19, Abe was the clarinet player at Kelly's Stables, one of the most famous clubs on New York's legendary 52nd Street. Coleman Hawkins, king of the tenor saxophone at the time, was enjoying the success of his now famous recording of Body and Soul. Hawkins' first appearance in the United States, after a period of living in Europe, was at Kelly's Stables, and Abe played nightly opposite the saxophone legend. Abe remembers that the audience every evening included such stars of the music world as Billie Holiday. It must have been a heady experience for the young clarinetist.


At the time. Les Brown (and His Band of Renown) was only a few votes behind Goodman. Ellington and Basie in popularity polls. Les, a clarinet player himself, came often to hear Abe at Kelly's and, as soon as details could be worked out, Abe joined Les' band as clarinet soloist to play the solos Les had been playing. Discographies disagree, but in 1940 or '41, the Brown band recorded Mexican Hat Dance, one of its earliest hits. Abe's clarinet solo, which was, of course, improvised for the recorded performance, was stunning. The promise that Abe would receive label credit for his solo did not become a reality when the record was issued, however. Such errors cannot be corrected, and it is the irony of such an occurrence that more than 50 years later someone recently remarked to Abe. "That Les Brown was a hell of a clarinet player when he recorded Mexican Hal Dance." In spite of that unfortunate oversight. Abe's prior experience and reputation had placed him in the polls. In 1942, he placed number eight in Down Beat magazine's annual popularity survey.

With the country at war, Abe soon enlisted in the military and, after basic training, was stationed at Santa Ana, California. The military musical groups in California were quite famous at the time as postings for some of the best big-band musicians of the era. Along with Santa Ana, Catalina Island and Santa Anita had exceptional groups also. Ensembles of 70-plus musicians were capable of playing orchestral, concert band and jazz music. Abe, Billy May, Wilbur Schwartz, Manny Klein, Vince DeRosa. Harry Bluestone, Marshall Sosson, Jimmy Rowles. Chuck Peterson, Earle Hagen and many, many others who became the most successful writers and instrumentalists in post-war Hollywood studio orchestras were in the West Coast military groups.

At Santa Ana, Abe met brothers Art and George Smith, two highly-respected woodwind doublers in the decades following the war. With the Smith's encouragement, Abe began to study the flute and, a few years later when he joined the staff orchestra at Fox studios, found that his early efforts to double on that instrument gave him a valuable asset in the workplace.
Manny Klein, one of the most respected trumpet players in history and a generous friend to many musicians, urged Abe to stay in California at the end of the war. Abe was eager to return to the jazz scene in New York, however, and was soon heard again in the 52ND Street clubs. Work was not as plentiful in New York as Abe had hoped it would be and, with a bit more encouragement from Manny, he returned to Los Angeles.


In 1946, the most startling and forceful movement in jazz since Louis Armstrong was centered around the music of Charlie Parker. The music, called bebop, was played and virtually patented by Parker, Dizzy Gillespie and their New York colleagues. It had evolved in the early '40s but had been heard only on recordings on the West Coast. Parker and Gillespie's first live performances in Los Angeles were at the club called Billy Berg's. Abe and accordionist Milton DeLugg closed at Billy Berg's the night before the famous bebop musicians opened. Abe had not then heard Parker's music and knew of him only by reputation. A double shock came for Abe when he returned to the club the next evening for Bird and Dizzy's opening. The music was a thrilling new experience for him. He could hear instantly the beauty and originality of the new music and, very much to his surprise, the gregarious man who had been in the club listening to Abe the night before, and who had sincerely but anonymously complimented Abe on his playing, turned out to be Charlie Parker himself.

Bebop was a musical earthquake that divided swing-era musicians from those who. by the mid-'40s, were following the more modern approach. It was natural for some musicians like Abe. who liked what they heard in the new music but whose roots were firmly in the '30s, to embrace the new sounds. The sophisticated harmonic language of bebop was then, and remains, a real challenge. The playing of pianist Jimmy Rowles, a contemporary of Abe's, has clearly kept abreast of the periodic changes in the music for over 50 years even though, like Abe, he too was recognized for his originality before the 1940s came along.

In Los Angeles, Abe found that union regulations at the time did not permit steady work for a period of six months or until a union card had been "worked out." Abe sold wallets by day at a department store and played occasional single-night engagements as he could get them. Shortly after he became eligible for the steady job he had at Billy Berg's, Abe received a call inviting him to replace Buddy DeFranco, who was leaving Tommy Dorsey's orchestra. Tommy's clarinet book had been played by a distinguished line-up of players, and it was an excellent break for Abe to follow Buddy in that chair with one of the country's best bands. Saxophonist Sid Cooper had been composing Clarinet Cascades, a virtuoso piece for DeFranco. but the number was not finished until Abe joined the band. Abe recalls that Tommy always played the piece faster than usual if Benny, Artie or Tommy's brother Jimmy just happened to be in the audience. Jimmy Dorsey, on hearing Abe for the first time. said. "I'd like to break your fingers." From one clarinetist to another that remark, of course, can only be taken as the ultimate compliment. Tommy Dorsey disbanded in 1947 and, after only a short time back in L.A., Abe rejoined Les Brown. From his work with Bob Hope, successful tours and many recordings, Les Brown was at the peak of his popularity in the post-war big band world.

In 1950, during an engagement at the Hollywood Palladium with Les, the opportunity to stay in Los Angeles permanently and with full employment was presented to Abe by some of his former service colleagues who had settled into the Hollywood studios after the war. Earle Hagen and several members of the staff orchestra at Twentieth Century Fox came to the Palladium to hear the Brown band and told Abe of an opening at Fox. At the time, the music department of every major studio was a virtual music factory, turning out dozens of motion picture (and eventually TV) soundtracks each year.

Abe gave his notice to Les, said goodbye to the road and settled in at Fox. For the next 22 years, until the contract staff orchestras were disbanded. Abe was a staff musician 52 weeks a year. A typical week at the studio was centered around 10 hours of work. Base pay was given for 520 hours of work a year. Overtime, and usually a lot of it, supplemented the contract salary and was paid as a year-end bonus.


The woodwind section at Fox when Abe arrived was an interesting mixture of straight "legit" players and doublers. In addition to a full section of orchestral woodwinds, a section of saxophones (two altos, two tenors and baritone) had to be included and available for composers who needed a jazz element for their scores. Abe came to the studio as the jazz clarinet, section flute and saxophone player. The other saxophonists doubled only on clarinet and bass clarinet. They were Russ Cheevers, Maury Crawford, Bill Ulyate and Chuck Gentry. Cheevers, Crawford and Ulyate, along with the great freelance saxophonist Jack Dumont, were for many years and many recordings banded together as the Hollywood Saxophone Quartet. Their much admired and prized library is still played by saxophone quartets everywhere.

Russ Cheevers, saxophone soloist on many film scores, was also first clarinet at Fox. It should be of interest to clarinet players that this early doubler was also recognized for his beautiful classical clarinet playing. Bill Ulyate was the bass clarinet and tenor saxophone on Robert Craft's recordings of the complete works of Anton Webern.

Twenty-two years and the thousands of studio recordings at Fox tend to become a blur when looking back on a life's work. On careful reflection, however, Abe cites the John Williams score for the motion picture 1941 as a musical high point. Abe's clarinet was featured throughout and, with drummer Louie Bellson, an exciting duo performance (a la Goodman and Gene Krupa) was recorded under typical studio pressures as Abe recalls. "In only two takes and in a funny key ... but it worked!"

No matter what artistic credentials might be previously acquired, when a jazz musician takes a position of security or one of financial stability as opposed to accepting and living the rigors of the jazz life, the critical press often registers displeasure. After having been recognized for over a decade as one of the best jazz clarinetists. Abe states clearly, articulately and without bitterness how he feels he was perceived after he took the position at Fox studios. "Once I went to Fox it was the opinion of the experts that I was no longer a jazz player, but merely a studio musician -making money and all that. I just wasn't thought of as a jazz player after that."


It is certainly not possible to take the jazz urge out of a man like Abe Most. Steady employment and security couldn't do it. All those who know Abe and his playing well believe that he has had, and has been, the best in both of the musical worlds of his choosing.

A now-famous series of recordings issued by Time-Life in 1970 recreated all of the hits of the big band era. Billy May was musical director and arranger for the project. Billy's task was to take down (transcribe) the earlier arrangements, including note-for-note representations of improvised solos originally played on all instruments. Chosen as the clarinetist, it was Abe who recreated most of the famous solos played by Goodman, Shaw, Herman. Fazola, et al. Typically, Billy May transcribed a solo and sent it to Abe with a tape of the original. Abe's job was to learn "every nuance" of the solo. "I analyzed the solos for everything ... breathing, articulations, fingerings, squeaks and all. and tried to get as close as possible to the original performance." Abe recalls.

In recent years Abe has been a full-time member of the freelance woodwind work force. By the time the studio orchestras were dissolved, the flute was a mandatory double, and Abe was one of the few from the earlier era who had learned that instrument. Over the intervening 20 years, Abe has added hundreds more recordings to his resume.

Once each year, both Los Angeles and Sacramento, California, host well attended classic or traditional jazz festivals. An appearance by Abe with one of his groups, or as a member of an all-star band, is a sure thing at such events. As an adjunct activity to the Sacramento festival, a one-week jazz camp is held there every summer. Abe has been on the teaching staff for 10 years, and speaks enthusiastically of the talented youngsters he meets there. When asked what he teaches. Abe says. "Well, it begins with the blues, of course, and then we work our way into the standards like I Can't Give you Anything But Love. Baby. It is good to think of the young players of today taking advantage of the wisdom and experience of Abe Most.

Motion picture and television scores, phonograph record arrangements and TV commercials that require solo clarinet are written every week of the year. To this day, in Los Angeles, the remark. "... and the clarinet has to be Abe," can mean only one thing when a composer and contractor consult on casting an orchestra's personnel.

The Abe Most Orchestra, an ensemble varying in size from four to 15 musicians plus vocalist, plays many engagements each years in the Los Angeles area. Occasionally Abe and brother Sam are heard with their jazz quintet at a local club. During the week prior to the Academy Awards show, a number of the trades related to the movie industry have their own private "mini"-award ceremonies. For many years Abe has conducted the Sound Editors Awards show. Abe describes the event as "complete with fanfares, play-ons and special show material."

A number of concerts featuring the music of Benny Goodman or Artie Shaw are booked each year, in various locations, to feature Abe playing the original clarinet parts. It must be said, however, that no matter how expert Abe may be at recreating Benny and Artie, clarinetists for whom he has had a lifetime of respect and admiration, there is a clear, original and recognizable Abe Most that shines through in every phrase he plays.

Abe and Gussie have been married for nearly 50 years. Their three children, three grandchildren and two great-grandchildren, plus golf, fishing and, of course, the prospect of tomorrow's as yet un-played music, keep Abe Most a vitally healthy, happy and creative man.”

ABOUT THE AUTHOR...

Gary Foster is a graduate of the University of Kansas, where he was a clarinet student of Don Scheid. He lives in Los Angeles, CA, where he is a freelance musician performing on clarinet. saxophone and flute. He has performed and recorded with jazz groups led by Clare Fischer. Warne Marsh, Cal Tjader, Shelly Manne. Moacir Santos and Poncho Sanchez. Gary may be heard on Toni Tennille's More Than You Know and All of Mealbums. The Broadway Album and Back to Broadway by Barbra Streisand, Mel Torme's Reunion and Live in Tokyo. and on Natalie Cole's Unforgettable and Take a Look. Other recent recordings were with Michael Feinstein, Rosemary Clooney, Diane Schuur, Melissa Manchester, Joao Gilberto, Johnny Mathis, Barry Manilow. Michel Legrand, Milt Jackson. Kenny Rogers. Dionne Warwick and Manhattan Transfer.

Gary's solo jazz recordings include: Kansas City Connections, Subconsciously and Grand Cru Classe (Revelation); Imagination and Beautiful Friendship (RCA Japan); Warne Marsh Meets Gary Foster (Toshiba EMI) and Starbright-Duo and Whose Woods Are These? with Clare Fischer on Discovery.

His most recent solo albums include Make Your Own Fun and Live at Maybeck HallDuo With Alan Broadbent on Concord Jazz. White Heat and One From the Heart are with the Jazz At The Movies Band on Discovery.

From its inception in 1973 until 1982, Gary was a member of the award-winning Toshiko Akiyoshi-Lew Tabackin big hand. He has received the Most Valuable Player award for woodwind doubling from the National Academy of Recording Arts and Sciences, and since 1984 he has been the Rose Ann Millsap visiting professor at the University of Missouri at Kansas City.

During the current TV season Gary is heard as a member of the television orchestras for Matlock, Diagnosis Murder, Love and War, Murder She Wrote, Perry Mason and The Simpsons. Current motion picture soundtracks include The Flintstones, Casper, Forget Paris, Batman Forever and Under Siege II.

Gary Foster is a Yamaha performing artist.”


Stan Getz - East of the Sun: The West Coast Sessions - The Ted Gioia Notes

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


“Flawless technique, perfect time, strong melodic sense and more than enough harmonic expertise, fabulous memory, and great ears. Add a superb sense of dynamics, pacing, and formal. Top this off with a sound of pure gold, and you have Stan Getz.


He was a charismatic musician. His music actually affected the course of people's lives. They fell in love with his music. They fell in love because of his music, and they made love to his music.


My association with Stan started in Woody Herman's Second Herd, the "Four Brothers" band. Stan was already in the band when the Jimmy Giuffre original "Four Brothers" was recorded for Columbia Records. But the real breakthrough came with the recording of Ralph Burns'"Early Autumn" at Radio Recorders in Hollywood for Capitol Records. By that time I had become a band member. I was fortunate to work with Stan from that time on — playing, recording, and traveling together in the Forties. Fifties, Sixties. Seventies. Eighties and, finally, in 1990.


After Stan left the Woody Herman band in 1949, he made a string of important recordings, including Jazz At Storyville,  the "Moonlight in Vermont" series with Johnny Smith Focus with Eddie Sauter and the huge success, Antonio Carlos Jobim's bossa novas "Desafinado” and "The Girl From Ipanema".


When Verve first asked me to contribute to this presentation. I accepted without hesitation. Then the tapes arrived. Listening to previously released material was great, but a lot of the unissued takes became further proof of the unfaltering quality of Stan's playing.


These recordings contain many outstanding solos by Slan. but if I had to choose one. it would be the lengthy solo on "S-h-i-n-e". This has been a topic of conversation since it was first released. It is Stan in full stride.


When an artist leaves a legacy of recordings such as Stan's, it is overwhelming. But when the artist affects the lives of his audience, he is then in a class with a chosen few. Such an artist is Stan Getz.


On the bandstand and in the studio he brought out the best in those who played with him.


And I for one say, "Thank you. Stanley."
- LOU LEVY, Jazz pianist


The insert notes to the Verve three CD set Stan Getz - East of the Sun: The West Coast Sessions [314 531 935-2] by the distinguished writer Ted Gioia were made a hash of when they were formatted into the booklet.


I’ve rarely seen a more garbled mess disgrace such important Jazz recordings.


The irony here is that Ted is the penultimate all-things-West-Coast-Jazz historian and was actually contracted by Verve to produce these notes!


What a waste.


But fear not; the editorial staff at JazzProfiles contacted Ted and he gave his blessing to having his notes developed into manuscript form so that they can be clearly read as presented on these pages.


“I remember how unhappy I was with the layout of liner notes in the booklet, which made it almost impossible to read the text. I'd be very happy to see them made available online.”


Nothing like making one of the best writers on the subject of Jazz “happy.”


© -Ted Gioia, copyright protected; all rights reserved; used with the author’s permission.


“Stan Getz always equivocated about the West Coast jazz scene. During the late 1980s, when he lived in California. I frequently had the opportunity to talk with him about various jazz musicians, both current and historical. He was bluntly honest during these informal discussions. Typically sparing in the compliments he paid other performers (except for a handful of figures he clearly admired), he seemed especially reserved about many of the prominent West Coast names. Getz kept a safe distance from the local scene during these years, and he almost always had a rhythm section flown in from New York for important gigs. Even while soaking up the sun and enjoying the ambiance of West Coast life, Getz seemed an inveterate East Coast character in his attitudes, mannerisms, language, and temperament


Imagine my surprise at his reaction, when I told him one day that I was researching a book on West Coast jazz. He looked at me in silence for a moment, puzzled, then asked.  “Do you include me in West Coast jazz?" For all his aloofness, he knew how strong his ties were to the California scene, not just in the Eighties but also during the glory days of West Coast jazz in the Fifties. Yet looking at his career in retrospect, he honestly didn't know if he was a West Coast jazz musician.


Was he? These recordings from the mid-Fifties include the most powerful statements in defense of Getz as a major exponent of jazz on the dream coast. Joined by some of the finest players on the Los Angeles scene. Getz participated in a series of memorable sessions. The title of the initial LP release of some of this material left little doubt about the intended marketing angle: It was simply called West Coast Jazz.


This was a long way from Getz's Philadelphia birthplace and childhood in the Bronx. He often dismissed the impact of these formative years on his career, offering snippets of information or relating a meandering anecdote about his first performance on the harmonica. Yet the evidence clearly shows that Getz was a phenomenal talent almost from the start. The late Shorty Rogers mentioned rehearsing in a band with Getz when the latter was barely in his teens and had only been playing saxophone for a few months But even then. Getz was garnering a reputation as a sax prodigy attracting the attention of bandleaders. He lasted for only one year of high school, but had he persisted he might well have fulfilled his teacher’s dream of attending Juilliard. Getz’s primary instrument was the bassoon at this point and he quickly earned a coveted spot in the all-New York student orchestra.


The jazz life had already beckoned and the tenor sax replaced the bassoon as Getz’s horn of choice. Truant officers were tracking him down at the Roseland Ballroom bandstand. So before long Getz bid adieu to James Madison High School choosing to go on the road with trombonist Jack Teagarden. The tenor saxophonist was so young that Teagarden had to be named his legal guardian. Stardom also came at an early age. Getz was barely out of his teens when he dazzled jazz fans with his celebrated playing on Early Autumn with the Woody Herman band.


Getz gravitated to the West Coast in his early career At age sixteen, he traveled to Los Angeles while still with Teagarden. He returned to California as an 18-year-old bandleader in 1945, leading a trio at the Swing Club in Hollywood, but he soon left to go on the road with Benny Goodman. He returned again some time later and parlayed a gig at a Mexican ballroom into a celebrated stint with Herman.


At Pete Pontrelli's Spanish Ballroom, the unlikely staging ground for this movement, Getz participated in the development of a completely new jazz style, one that came to be known as the "Four Brothers' sound". The band's repertoire on this gig consisted primarily of stock arrangements of Mexican and Spanish tunes, supplemented by an occasional jazz chart. But arranger Gene Roland was working on a new way of voicing the sax section, which Jimmy Giuffre took and refined further for the Herman band. The result was a lightly swinging ensemble featuring three tenor and one baritone saxophones — with Getz helping to recreate the sound from Pontrelli's in his new role as a Herman sideman. The recording of “Four Brothers,” from the close of 1947, exhilarated listeners — so much so that jazz fans were soon calling this edition of the Herman orchestra the "Four Brothers band".


By this time. Getz had developed the translucent tenor tone and softly swinging style that gave an airy lightness to the Four Brothers' sound and would distinguish his mature work. Getz's debt to Lester Young in this regard has often been cited, and Getz was the first to admit he admired the older tenor saxophonist. Yet Getz brought a more overtly modernist sensibility to his playing that sharply distinguished it from Young's. Although Getz was never an ardent bebopper, he had listened carefully to Charlie Parker and brought a deep understanding of modern jazz into his own, cooler style.


This influence is especially marked on these West Coast sessions, where Getz draws uncharacteristic inspiration from bop-inflected tunes, such as Gillespie's A Night in Tunisia and Woody 'n' You, and offers a tour de force solo on S-h-i-n-e. These progressive leanings were evident throughout Getz's career, as seen by his constant use of young sidemen with new musical ideas. One recalls with admiration how, more than a decade after these sides, Getz was careening over Phrygian scales and navigating through some of Chick Corea's most complex material on another Verve release, the seminal Sweet Rain. On that record he showed a daring unmatched by any other Young disciple from the postwar years. Or listen to another Verve outing, the justly celebrated Focus, which finds Getz engaging in a marvelously intricate dialogue with a string section. The claim that Getz merely commercialized a variant of the Young sound falls to the ground after even the most casual listening to these recordings.


But what Getz did learn from Young was his essentially melodic approach to improvisation. Throughout most of the history of jazz, the prevailing approach to the tenor sax has stressed the harmonic possibilities of the instrument. Substitute changes, intricate cadences, unusual modes that imply equally exotic harmonies — a range of techniques has been used in the paradoxical attempt to extract a chordal texture from this inherently monophonic instrument. Getz, like Young, never got caught up in this quixotic pursuit. Instead both adopted an unabashedly linear approach, unapologetic in its lyricism There was an almost brutal honesty in this style. No shiny ornaments were hung out to distract attention from its melodic core.


"Players like Stan and Al Cohn (another Young follower from the period] thought about the song more than other jazz musicians," pianist Lou Levy remarks. "The melody line was important to them. I suspect that Stan paid attention to the lyrics as well. I remember giving him the music to the song “No More”— one of the pieces that Billie Holiday used to sing. Stan looked over the sheet. 'It's a good story,' he said, and we went on to play it." His solos had the flow of a well-paced narrative. Yet the structure never got in the way of the music's emotional immediacy. Few players of any generation could construct solos of such logic and rigor while maintaining a depth of feeling and, at times, such poignancy.


These virtues made Getz a natural participant in the West Coast scene that gained notoriety in the early Fifties. The influence of Young was especially prominent among the Los Angeles saxophone players of this period. The emerging cool-Jazz style, which Getz had helped promote with his early work, was also making waves near the Pacific. Getz's Los Angeles-based band with Bob Brookmeyer reflected this side of the West Coast aesthetic, with a formalist compositional approach somewhat akin to the Mulligan-Baker group efforts from the same period. (This similarity was perhaps more than a coincidence, since Getz-Brookmeyer were working at the Ambassador Hotel when Mulligan-Baker were gracing the bandstand across the street at the Haig.) Getz later joined Mulligan on a celebrated Verve recording in 1957, and he occasionally collaborated with other leading West Coast players. Yet these tended to be exceptions to the rule. Getz spent most of the Fifties in musical pursuits far afield from the West Coast jazz scene: in heated jam sessions with Jazz at the Philharmonic; in exceptional recordings with Dizzy Gillespie, Sonny Stitt, and other bop masters; and leading a variety of ensembles under his own name. Many of these settings no doubt resulted from Getz's relationship with record producer Norman Granz. Granz had only a limited interest in the burgeoning West Coast scene, and his projects with Getz mostly reflected this attitude.


But by the middle of the decade, the West Coast label had proved to be such an effective marketing device that even Granz was taking notice. Getz and Granz were now determined to make a more dedicated foray into the West Coast scene. On July 27, 1955 Getz made the plunge when he kicked off an engagement at Zardi's, a major Southern California jazz club on Hollywood Boulevard, fronting a new West Coast quintet. This combo was essentially a pickup group, organized specifically for the Zardi's gig. But the quality of the musicians more than compensated for the lack of rehearsal time. Audiences were dazzled by the new California combo. By the time the quintet entered the studio, some two weeks later, to undertake the first of the sessions included here, it sounded like a veteran unit.


Getz drew on some of the finest players on the Los Angeles scene for these sessions. Levy had played with Getz in the Herman band and had recently relocated to California from his native Chicago. In an interview from the period, Getz pointed out that Levy was “more than a two-handed pianist. He plays with all ten fingers.” Levy's orchestral approach and harmonic ingenuity is well-documented on these recordings. Listen to him move into a polytonal mood midway through his solo on There Will Never Be Another You, pushing the chord changes to their limits. Although Levy has often been labeled a bebop pianist, his roots go much deeper. His earliest models in the jazz world were, in fact, the big bands that he heard in his native Chicago. The pianists he listened to were especially diverse. "I heard Al Haig before I heard Bud Powell, and before them I heard Nat Cole. But I was listening to Teddy Wilson long before that. And of course there was Art Tatum who was in a category of his own.”


“The most prominent sound in the the rhythm section on these Getz sessions is Leroy Vinnegar’s bass,” explains Levy with characteristic modesty. “You can hear its strong rhythmic presence.


“Leroy is always there, his time is as solid as a rock, and everyone plays off him." Like so many of the Indiana natives who made their mark in modern Jazz (Carl Perkins, the Montgomery brothers. Freddie Hubbard), Vinnegar boasts an uncanny knack for swinging effortlessly, for propelling a Jjzz band without any wasted energy.


Shelly Manne, who worked with Vinnegar in many settings over the years, lets the bass serve as the pulse of the band, using his drum kit to supply color and deepen the textures of the ensemble sound. "Shelly took more chances than most other drummers," Levy adds. "He was always interested in trying something different, in experimenting.  While Stan Levey, on the later sessions, was more of a bebopper, a terrific drummer with an outstanding modern-jazz feel."


Conte Candoli, who joined Gelz in the front line, was another transplanted Indiana native and one of the hottest trumpeters on the West Coast scene. In a jazz environment where subdued or cerebral approaches to the horn received more publicity, Candoli took a different tack. His improvised lines generally burst forth with exuberance and vitality. His work with Getz on this date is surprisingly subdued, but on “S-h-i-n-e”he lets loose with the compelling devil-may-care brashness that is very much his trademark.


Despite the Los Angeles sidemen and the marketing of these sessions as West Coast Jazz, I have always felt that there was something incongruous about this whole project. In fact, I'm half-convinced that Getz was slyly trying to subvert the West Coast marketing label attached to his new approach. The opening track on the original West Coast Jazz album was East of the Sun — was he making a little joke here? And why did he make such a point of drawing on East Coast composers for the band's repertoire? There is enough Gershwin material from these dates to make a whole theme album. (Hmm. Gershwin….wasn't he a New York boy who made most of his best music on the East Coast, but came out West to make money with some blatantly commercial efforts?)


Getz's choice of sidemen was equally telling Candoli, Vinnegar, Levy, and Manne or Levey — they were all West Coasters, more or less, but not one was a native Californian. Each one had started back East or in the Midwest. And why was Getz playing, in addition to Gershwin, all of these East Coast bebop tunes — so rare for him — on a project that supposedly celebrated the West Coast?


Maybe I am reading too much into the tenor saxophonist's choice of material. But his wry sense of humor was just the sort that would delight in this type of cryptic playfulness. I recall a similar ambiguity from Getz's later years, when he had given up drink and was an ardent participant in Alcoholics Anonymous — yet seemed to play a booze song, “Lush Life” or “Sippin' at Bells,” at every concert! Indeed Getz always had an irreverent attitude toward song titles — who else would introduce his mega-hit “Desafinado”as "Dis Here Finado" (this coming on the heels of such soul-jazz tunes as“Dis Here” and “Dat Dere,” then the rage), then add offhandedly, "This is the song that is going to pay my kid's college tuition.”


"This was not a West Coast Jazz session," Levy asserts confidently. He notes that the most celebrated performance from this project, “S-h-i-n-e,” counters any stereotype of laid-back West Coast playing. "Everybody always liked this one." Levy continues. "Stan really forges ahead. His intro is clear as a bell He plays those eight bars unaccompanied, but with a real momentum and swing. Then — bam! — the band comes in and he's off. He really lets loose on this piece, and never falters, charging all the way through to the end."


Yet there were many moments on these sessions where Getz was the consummate lyrical soloist, very much in the vein of the West Coast sound. In fact, these sessions include some of the most effortlessly graceful performances of Getz's career. He is low-key on “Like Someone in Love”where he kicks off his solo with a deliciously lazy break and follows up with a richly melodic solo. His work on “Too Close for Comfort”is equally noteworthy and could serve as a case study in relaxed improvisation. The two complete lakes of “Our Love Is Here to Stay” are both masterly examples of thematic improvisation. The unreleased version is an especially brilliant example of how Getz could weave baroque lines while continuing to hint at the contours of the melody. And even when Getz tackles a stop-time interlude, as on “Blues for Mary Jane” or“How About You?” his playing retains an elegant sureness, a calmness even in the most fiery surroundings.


Not that the experimental side of Getz's playing is totally absent here. On “Woody 'n' You” Getz plays atypical, polytonal games with a simple motif. This interlude sounds like a parody of Coltrane's A Love Supreme. It couldn't be, of course, since the Coltrane performance was still a decade in the future, yet the resemblance is uncanny. Other feints and jabs — an occasional bebop lick in double-time, a judicious bit of bluesiness, a tongue-in-cheek quote — are dished out in sparing doses, showing how much Getz always kept in reserve, waiting for the right moment to let it loose.


Yet if we ultimately grow wary of associating Getz too closely with West Coast jazz, it is only because he kept a safe distance from all of the passing fads and fancies of the jazz world. Although he was linked to the cool jazz sound, Getz played some of his hottest music during the years when cool was in its ascendancy. And his collaborations with other leading cool players were surprisingly rare. Years later. Getz was equally detached from the stardom he attained when crossing over with his bossa nova recordings. He could have made a whole career from this popular, Brazilian-inflected style, but he ultimately abandoned it for other projects and approaches. His work with Chick Corea anticipated the fusion craze, but Getz soon left that format behind as well. One is forced to conclude that even when Getz jumped on the bandwagon, he was always among the first to jump off.


And so it is with these West Coast sessions. For a brief period, Getz met West Coast jazz at least halfway. But there were no compromises here, no banal attempts to find a commercial sound. The music was Stan Getz, plain and simple, with all the beauty and richness that he brought to every performance, whichever the coast.


“Playing with him was like a music lesson," Levy remarks. "He had a sense for the right tempo, the right volume, the right way of sequencing the solos. He knew when to stretch out and when to hold back. He knew when to let the bass and drums sit out and when he’d bring them back in. He had such great time and technique, and [he] could react to anything. He would even make the wrong chords sound right. He could lake i small combo and make it sound like a symphony."


And Getz does just that on these performances. Was Getz a West Coast player? That question may well remain unanswered. Was he one of the greatest soloists to play the saxophone? Of that there can be no doubt. The more than three hours of music on these discs provides compelling evidence and a persuasive account of one of the jazz masters in top form.”


Ted Gioia


[Ted is a pianist, a jazz historian and the author of West Coast Jazz: Jazz in California, 1945-1960, New York: Oxford University Press, 1992.]



Elisabetta Serio and Enzo Pietropaoli: "Sedici" and "The Princess"

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.




For whatever reason, you don’t hear much instrumental Jazz today that’s played quietly, reflectively and introspectively.


It takes a certain orientation to conceive of the music played in a laid back fashion; this approach usually requires the music to be expressed with a great deal of control and at slower tempos.


Slow tempos can be dangerous - when moody become murky, lyrical becomes lazy, and sensitive becomes stagnant.


On the other hand, the quieter, slower pace allows the music to breathe, gives the artist time to think and allows the audience the opportunity to absorb what the music is trying to convey.


I remember the late tenor saxophonist Bill Perkins, whose brooding solo on Bill Holman’s arrangement of Jerome Kern’s Yesterdays for the Kenton band is one of the all-time great Jazz balladic performances, sharing the following comment with me a few years before his death in 2003: “These days, when we play a slow tune, I expect a bottle to come flying over my head.”


Personally, because there’s very little for a drummer to do on slow tunes [except stay out of the way, i.e., not overplay], I’ve never been a big fan of playing Jazz slowly, but as a listener, I’ve always enjoyed the music when it is played at a slower pace.


Imagine my delight then when Matteo Pagano at Via Veneto Jazz and his associates at Jando music sent me preview copies of their two latest releases: Elisabetta Serio’s Sedici [VVJ 116] and Enzo Pietropaoli;s The Princess [VVJ 117] as the music on each of them is the epitome of what Duke Ellington once labelled: “Sultry serenades.”


Botch CDs are available for order and preorder via Amazon and www.forcedexposure.com


Sensitive, discreet, reflective, keyboard artist and vocalist Elisabetta Serio instills in her music a measured balance, a haunting lyricism and a light rhythmic feel that evokes subtle moods. Perhaps a better term for her style of Jazz would indeed be Mood Music.


Sedici ("16") the CD’s title is a lucky numerology to the Naples based pianist on which Elisabetta is joined by Marco de Tilla on bass and Lorenzo de Lorenzo on drums to form a trio that produces an almost dream-like quality during the course of its nine originals.


Additionally, Sarah Jane Morris's voice is featured on "Afrika", Fulvio Sigurtà's trumpet playing a delicate melody in "Il Cielo Sotto Di Me", and Jerry Popolo's tenor saxophone playing in a funky mode "Rumors,” enhances the musical palette of moods featured on the album.


Of all the beautiful music on Sedici, I found “Mr. P,” dedicated to her mentor and friend Pino Daniele, to be particularly poignant. Pino Daniele was an Italian singer-songwriter, and guitarist, whose influences covered a wide number of genres, including pop, blues, jazz, and Italian and Middle Eastern music. He died in 2015 at the age of 59.


Whereas, Elisabetta emphasizes originals, bassist Enzo Pietropaoli presents his new album The Princess as a platform to use the piano-bass-drums Jazz trio to reimagine a series of Pop and Rock ‘n Roll standards: from John Lennon [Jealous Guy] to Bob Dylan [A Hard Rain is Gonna Fall], Cole Porter [Night and Day] to Peter Gabriel [Father Son], from Neil Young [Philadelphia] to Pearl Jam [The End], topped off with the Beach Boys [God Only Knows]- all brought together by Pietropaoli's original arrangements.


“The Princess,” one of the three originals contributed by Enzo is meant to denote “ ...a metaphor for a dream pursued with determination and fully realized.”


Joining Enzo on this superbly crafted outing of relaxed and expressive trio Jazz is Julian Oliver Mazzariello on piano and Alessandro Paternesi on drums.


You can experience the music from each of these excellent new recordings by sampling the following audio only, Soundcloud files.




Gary Foster: Revelations

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


In an earlier life, when the World was young, I wrote woodwind and reed player extraordinaire Gary Foster a “fan letter.”

It was occasioned by my attendance at a rehearsal of a community college big band. Gary was the orchestra’s musical director and my letter commented on the considerate and courteous way in which Gary put the band through its paces.

During the practice, he took the time to help individual players and/or sections of the band who were struggling with various parts of an arrangement, made numerous suggestions to improve the band’s attack and dynamics, and did so many other, little things to bring out the best in the band’s performance.

Most importantly, especially with young minds and personalities, Gary went about his business with a demeanor that was the epitome of civility.

Don’t get me wrong, Gary challenged the students. He didn’t put up with sloppy phrasing, bad intonation or inattention to detail [Did I mention that these were “young” musicians?].

But when he did make corrections and adjustments in their playing, he did so with explanation, direction and instruction and not with ridicule or mocking and abrasive criticism.

As a result, boy did that band roar.


Here’s this mild-mannered, Father Christmas looking guy holding this tiger by the tail.

Any of us who ever played in a big band should have been so lucky as to have Gary for a director and teacher.

In yet another, even earlier life, which I’m sure he’s forgotten about along with the fan letter, I played a few gigs with Gary.

I had returned from a year long visit to Asiacourtesy of the US government and was working fairly regularly in a quartet led by alto saxophonist and flutist Fred Selden. The group also included pianist Milcho Leviev.

Around this time, Fred and Milcho were quite busy with the Don Ellis Orchestra and it was becoming increasingly common for them to send substitutes to gigs when they were out-of-town with Don’s band.

I was very impressed with Gary’s tone the first time I heard him play as it sounded much like the sub-tone used by Lee Konitz and Paul Desmond and less like the Bud Shank or Art Pepper tones I was used to while working with “West Coast” musicians.

Desmond kiddingly once described his tone as having “the sound of a dry martini.”

Not surprisingly, given Konitz’s and Desmond’s penchant for working with harmonically-oriented pianists such as Lennie Tristano and Dave Brubeck, respectively, Gary would become great chums with similarly oriented pianists Clare Fischer and Alan Broadbent over the course of his career.

Ever since I started the JazzProfiles blog, I’ve had it in mind to do a feature on Gary, but I just could not find a starting point.

In talking with a friend about Gary’s performance on a new Mark Masters CD – Everything You Did - a tribute to the music of Steely Dan [about which more in a future review] over coffee recently, he said: “Of course, you must be familiar with Gary’s recordings on the Revelation label?”

I said: “John William Hardy’s old label; the one that was based in Glendale, CA?”

To which my friend replied: “Yup, the very same.”

Gary, it seems, made five LP’s for Hardy’s label including one with Warne Marsh [Ne Plus Ultra Revelations #12], one on which he shares the leadership with Warne and Clare Fischer [Report of the 1st Annual Symposium on Relaxed Improvisation Revelation 17], and three under his own name: [1] Subconsciously [Revelation #5]; [2] Grand Cru Classe’ [Revelation #19]; Kansas City Connections [Revelation #48].

When I sheepishly admitted that I hadn’t heard any of Gary’s recordings for Revelation, my buddy offered to “… bring them to you the next time we get together for coffee.”

And so he did.

And in so doing, he finally unlocked a way that I was comfortable with for doing a feature on Gary and that is to take selected excerpts from John William Hardy’s liner notes to Gary’s Revelation recordings and to present them as a chronicle of highlights from Gary’s early career.


Let’s begin at the beginning withSubconsciously [Revelation #5]. Here are some are some of the things James William Hardy had to say about Gary work on this recording.

“GARY FOSTER, the 32 year old multi-instrumentalist whose work is the subject of this long-play recording, is not overdue as a jazz leader-soloist on record. Born in 1936 in Leavenworth. Kansas, his musical training and jazz experience have led him through a complex maze of developmental stages, esthetic re­organizations, and maturational crises. These might, in the past 10 years, have been recorded on phonograph disc to some discographical and musicological profit for the listener, but I think, having known and heard the artist through this period, that the present recording would have been the first one really worth owning and continuing to hear over a long period of time. Because Foster in the past few years has finally begun to stabilize his musical philos­ophy after a period of self-doubt and eclectic experimentation with sounds and forms not true to his innerself.

As a result, he now emerges as in important jazz voice, and one of only two saxo­phonists, the other being Jerry Coker, who has developed a thor­oughly personal expression that stems from the joint influences of Les Konitz, Warne Marsh (the Tristano School) and Clare Fischer. Like Coker, Fischer, and the Tristanoites, Foster is a thoroughly grounded classicist, as a clarinetist, whose jazz ex­perience dates from hit earliest musical activities and are an immutable part of the man's entire personality and art. Like them, he believes in a freedom of improvisational form that is under­pinned with discipline and a strong relationship to compositional structure. And tike them, he practices the production of a musk that is full of warmth, love, and grace, but that is simultaneously alive with a pulsing swing and the poignancy of a truly basic jazz feeling. There is economy in his work, but it often fairly bursts with ebullience in its multi-noted passages that does not in any way finished quality, a full, whole, confident character that belies its spontaneity.

I first met Gary Foster at the University of Kansas, where he transferred after two years at CentralCollege, Fayette, Missouri. At Kansas Foster was enrolled in the music department, majoring in clarinet and in music education. I did not meet him in this capacity, but as a jazz musician who, along with tenorist Nathan Davis (now a popular ex-patriot musician in Germany), Carmell Jones, and pianist Jay Fisher (now a Chicago-based musician), was making the music scene in and around Lawrence a lively one indeed. That was in 1957. Graduated from Kansas, he had a year of teaching while attending graduate school, in which, in his second year he studied saxophone and clarinet while pursuing music his­tory studies. In 1961, Foster and family moved to the Los Angeles area during the short-lived rise in interest that jazz was to have there following the popular West Coast school reign in the fifties. The early 60"s were not the best years for a young white saxo­phonist to establish himself in an active jazz life.


Many people had just discovered Rollins and Trane. and the long overdue rise from obscurity for the L. A. negro jazz artist was in full progress. As justified as that was, it ironically sent to or kept many a promising white musician in the underground, unless he hustled himself into a harder form of playing that took advantage of the new interest in overt soul music and the extroverted proclamation of the blues. There was a short time when, without satisfactory employment. Gary experimented with "hardening" his approach. But as he and others knew, Foster was in no way suited to that style. Fortunately, he secured a position teaching music with Berry & Grassmueck Music Co. in Pasadena (where he now administrates the studios, conducts with Warne Marsh and others a subdivisional unit for jazz-oriented students, and teaches privately). And even more fortunately, he met, in 1962, pianist-composer Clare Fischer.

Shortly thereafter, he became a student of Fischer, who re-es­tablished the flagging confidence of his pupil in the validity of his approach to jazz and at the same time helped to formulate a more sensitive and intricate approach to improvisation which no previous influence had been able to accomplish. Fischer was an enthusiastic student and scholar of the Tristano saxophonists aforementioned, as well as a well-spring of compositional and executional theory that Gary soaked up like a sponge. Besides the student-teacher relationship, Fischer also occasionally offered Foster opportunities to record and play in public that he had been almost denied for his first year on the coast

The present record is not Foster's first, although it is the first to feature his extended jazz playing. Gary has been a mainstay of the reed sections on several Fischer big band recordings. For the discographer (almost he alone) Foster's very first appearance on LP was as a member of the college all-stars led by trumpeter Don Jacoby in I960 (MGM LP E3881— see Gary in the red sweater?) on which recording he plays all tenor solos. Gradually, in the mid-1960's Foster has become a sought after player in the studios and on Jazz and dance gigs alike, and, as these notes go to press, he spends important playing time in the quintet of Jimmy Rowles and a group led by Fischer.”


Next up for Gary on Revelation was an appearance with tenor saxophonist Warne Marsh on his LP entitled Warne Marsh [Ne Plus Ultra Revelations #12] about which John William Hardy had this to say.

“In the late 1940's. a couple of years after I had been run­ning through the stylistic influence of the late Bud Powell, I happened to be listening to a jazz program on radio. I had turned on the program in the middle of a recording and was completely taken aback by a cascading line of such utter complexity played by two saxophones that my jaw dropped in astonishment. This was Lee Konitz and Warne Marsh, and what I heard represented to me a new level of development in jazz that I was soon to plunge into. It was a development that manifested a high degree of melodic construction and harmonic usage that seemed such a logical development of what had just proceeded it. Often the melodic involvement, with displaced accents, cross meters and the like, would be so complex that the idea of playing it in a strict sense of time would go out the window.

The average reaction of the Lick player at that point would be: ‘Well, — they play a lot of notes, but man, they don't swing!’ — Which might have been part of my reaction except for the fact that I loved the notes they were playing. (Nobody seems to get bugged with the opposite: ‘He sure swings, but he keeps playing the same licks or someone else's vocabulary.’)

About four years back. Warne Marsh moved back home to Los Angeles and shortly thereafter we started working to­gether in my band. Sometimes in the course of the evening our rhythm section would be roaring to the point that he would be forced to play over it. The Warne Marsh that came out then was something very different! In this album on Subconscious-leeI think you'll find him approaching this. You almost feel like accusing him of swinging. Heaven For­bid! If Warne is not listened to for the sheer sake of Warne, then relative judgment will get in your way and you'll miss the point.

Gary Foster joined all this as a second generation orienta­tion and as a result you will find his playing much more metrically oriented. Still, together the two have honed these lines, these fingerbusting lines, to the point that in many in­stances they are played at a faster tempo than the originals. I think the best examples of Gary's playing are contained in the free piece that follows Subconscious-Lee and on 317 E. 32nd (based on the chord changes of "Out of Nowhere").

Many might mutter, ‘His tone is Konitz oriented’ and con­sider that a criticism. I find that irrelevant considering how well he plays und that I've had to listen for over twenty years to dozens of alto saxophonists trying to sound like Charlie Parker. Few succeeded…..”


Gary’s third recording for Revelation was in essence a leaderless session entitled Warne Marsh, Clare Fischer and Gary FosterReport of the 1stAnnual Symposium on Relaxed Improvisation [Revelation 17]. In his notes, John William Hardy explains the title’s context this way:

“Here is a session—in the best sense of the word. What is occasionally known as ‘Live!’ is usually no liver-er than a studio. The program is preplanned and the formality of the hall (or studio) establishes a context to be conformed to. The situation on 9 May 1972, in Clare Fischer's living room in Van Nuys, was much different. The music was allowed to create its own context. There was no leader—only an agree­ment that all participants would arrive about 7:00 p.m. and enjoy themselves—eating, drinking, playing, talking and re­laxing. Pete Welding and I set up the little Stellavox Sp-7 recorder, distributed some microphones and set forth to moni­tor the musical proceedings as they occurred. We made only a general effort to turn on the tape when the music started and nobody worried whether we had or not or whether a selection would finish before the tape ran out. There were certainly no second takes—or takes at all in the accepted sense. Just players, playing. Sometimes selections were dis­cussed and sometimes somebody just started playing, the chords were spelled out obviously for those unfamiliar in the first chorus, and then the thing went forward.”

Mr. Hardy steps aside as the annotator for Gary’s fourth Revelations LP - Grand Cru Classe’ [Revelation #19]- in favor of Michael James who in 1973 was described on the liner notes as a “… distinguished British Jazz Critic and frequent contributor to The Jazz Monthly.


Of Gary’s music, Mr. James observed:

“… Foster, both in this collection and the one which preceded it, indicates certain cardinal features of his approach.  … Foster has evinced a strong commitment to ortho­dox if complex chordal structures, and, as J.W. Hardy notes, thinks chordally better than most wind instrumentalists.  … [One of] Foster's [preferred] methods of expres­sion is a type of melodic density that sets them in a class apart from hackneyed blues riffs or ostensible originals hasti­ly thrown together just for economic convenience. As an illustration of this quality can be found in Foster's own comments on Bill Evans's Tune for a Lyric. ‘Melodically and harmonically it appeals to me,’ he says, ‘in the way it seems to evolve in a “through” composed man­ner. The repeat scheme is not so purely geometric as it is in many jazz tunes and the end of the song keeps delaying its inevitability in a way I really find enticing.’

Foster, then, in his continuing affiliation to established methods of extemporization and in his enthusiasm for melodically intricate lines braced by harmonic structures of con­siderable substance, may be viewed as something of a musical conservative in an era which has seen numerous players dis­carding, sometimes, one feels, in too doctrinaire a manner, conventions that had governed jazz improvising, until 1960 or thereabouts, for upwards of three decades. Yet in so far as that description evokes a hidebound, unadventurous spirit rather than an artist who seeks to retain and build upon the distilled wisdom of earlier generations, it is hopelessly inac­curate in Foster's case.

Not only has this been made plain by his occasional involvement in group improvisations not guid­ed by the usual harmonic precepts, … , but, more to the point, it becomes transparently clear as soon as he embarks upon his first solo chorus in the opening item of the present set. His improvisation flows naturally out of the song, devel­oping impetus as it progresses, and building, without false artifice or even any marked increase in tonal emphasis, towards its logical conclusion.

In fact the solo's communica­tive power derives mainly from the controlled accumulation of melodic interest within a predetermined rhythmic and har­monic continuum, rather than from any sudden shifts in phrase patterns or tonal coloring. Such an amalgam of grace­fulness and steadily gathering music intensity proclaims Fos­ter's allegiance to what might loosely be termed the Lester Young aesthetic, a school of thought which embraces such diverse stylists as Zoot Sims and Lee Konitz, placing as it does greater emphasis on melodic resourcefulness and con­tinuity of line man upon the more visceral stratagems of abrupt changes in volume or tone.

Foster, I believe, owes something to all three of these players, but his work never­theless possesses a truly personal flavor, transmitting a sunlit lyricism which, whatever their other qualities, is not an at­tribute one would readily associate with any of the other musicians named. In drawing this distinction one is reminded of the very individual use which, in a rather different area, the pianist Barry Harris has made of Bud Powell's vocabulary. …


For his fifth album with Revelation, Gary took matters into his own hands [so to speak] and wrote these comments for the liner notes:

Kansas City Connections [Revelation #48].

In 1951, as a junior high school student in Leavenworth, Kansas, 35 miles from Kansas City, I first heard improvised jazz music at the hands of Olin Parker, my school hand director and musical inspiration. Olin brought jazz records and magazines about jazz to the band room and organized a small school jazz hand that hooked me to the music forever. I soon learned that, geographically, Kansas City had its own important place in the history of jazz and that, long before my ears were opened to the music, Charlie Parker, Jay McShann, Lester Young and Count Basic had put Kansas City on the jazz map.

In the following years I lived and studied near Kansas City. In the middle and late 1950's, Bob Brookmeyer, Carmell Jones, Jimmy Lovelace, Charlie Kynard and Frank Smith were the names I mast associated with the continuing tradition of Kansas City jazz. In recent years I have been fortunate to teach at the University of MissouriKansas City and to play in the area many times, under various circumstances, most often with the musicians heard on this recording.

The playing of my colleagues here is proof that jazz in Kansas City is in good health today. Carmell Jones (back home again), Herman Bell, Arch Martin, Kim Park, Mike Ning and many others help to keep the music alive there.

This recording came about through the eagerness and encouragement of Jim Nirschl. Jim is a valued friend and Kansas City nerve ending for jazz musicians from all parts of the world. A Kansas Cityconnection.

Roots, family, friends and music are all Kansas City connections. Not to mention Kansas City barbecue!

Gary Foster, 1985”

Although my view of him is informed largely from impressions, in general, I couldn’t agree more with his long-time friend, Dick Wright’s description of Gary when he writes:

“Over the years, I have seen and heard Gary grow from an outstanding young Stan Getz-influenced tenor saxophonist to, today, a consummate artist on alto, tenor and soprano saxes, as well as clarinet (his first instrument) and flute. He is truly a ‘musician's musician’ who is held in the highest regard by fellow musicians as well as jazz lovers and jazz students of all ages. Gary… is equally at home in the recording studios, the class room and on the concert stage. …”

Somewhat ironically, I didn’t select a track from any of Gary’s wonderful recordings on Revelation Records to feature on the accompanying video montage.

Perhaps when you listen to his spellbinding performance on Some Other Time from his Make Your Own Fun CD on Concord [CCD-4459]you’ll understand why.

In all the years that I have been listening to this music, I never heard it played more beautifully by anyone.

Gary Foster is a very special musician.



Steve Davis: Moment to Moment

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


“Davis is an adept, declarative player, always indebted to his work with Jackie McLean and Art Blakey, a hard-bop grounding which gives his playing unarguable strength and articulacy. He doesn't overplay, but he's generous with his lines and he gets a sound which often has a shouting intensity while keeping well clear of obvious expressionism. That makes his albums conventional but full and satisfying.”
- Richard Cook and Brian Morton, The Penguin Guide to Jazz on CD, 6th Ed.

“I predict that Steve Davis will be one of the true masters of the slide trombone.”
- Curtis Fuller, Jazz trombonist

“Steve Davis is one of the most talented young students that I have ever had. His love for the tradition of this music is very deep. … I like his sound, I like the way he writes. His music is very special.”
- Jackie McLean, Jazz alto saxophonist

One moment he’s talking about his frequent collaborators such as trumpeter Jim Rotondi, or tenor saxophonist Eric Alexander or guitarist Peter Bernstein or pianist David Hazeltine or drummer Joe Farnsworth.

The next moment he’s relating what he saying about them to himself, his trombone playing and his compositions.

One moment he talks with reverence about Jazz masters such as Jackie McLean, Art Blakey and J.J. Johnson.

The next moment he’s describing what he’s learned from each of them.

One moment he ‘s talking knowledgeably and appreciatively about the Great American songbook and the Jazz Standards repertoire.

The next moment he’s writing his own compositions and has become one of the most prolific composers of original music on today’s Jazz scene.

Make no mistake, however, Steve Davis’ involvement with Jazz has been anything but momentary.

Steve has a whole bunch of recordings out under his own name on Gerry Teekens’ Criss Cross label, where he also appears as a member of the Art Blakey sextet-inspired group One for All, and as a guest artist on some of the label’s CDs headed-up by the “frequent collaborators” listed in the opening paragraph.

Here’s some information by Gerry Teekens about the early years of Steve’s career.

Back in the late 60's, the alto saxophonist Jackie McLean left New York and began teaching at the University of Hartford's Hartt School of Music, instituting a Jazz program and with his wife Dollie, founding a community arts center called the Artists Collective that has been a positive force in the lives of many. McLean and his Bebop brothers in other programs around the world planted the seeds of a musical revolution and thanks to their efforts, a number of remarkably talented young creators have emerged onto the Jazz scene lately, including prized pupil Steve Davis.

Steve Davis was born in Worcester, Massachusetts on April 14, 1967, but spent his formative years in Binghamton, New York, where his family still resides. Steve's father, a journalist who writes a column for the local newspaper, was a serious blues and Jazz fan. The family collection included a number of Art Blakey and the Jazz Messengers recordings that featured Curtis Fuller on trombone but it wasn't until Steve was fourteen "that I really started to pay attention to the music, especially Curtis. That's when I decided I wanted to play Jazz." He started on trumpet, an instrument played by his father's father, whom Steve calls his "grandsir," but later switched to trombone.


Aware of Jackie McLean from his dad's collection, Steve auditioned for McLean at the Hartt School of Music at the University of Hartford. "Just meeting Jackie, he was Professor McLean to me back then,"Davis laughs, "was such a great experience. That was back in '85 and coming to Hartt and just being around Jackie completely changed my whole perception of the music. Jackie brought in a lot of people and I got a chance to meet some great musicians." At the 880 Club, a weekly all-star night gave Steve the chance to sit in with trumpeter Eddie Henderson and late baritone saxist Pepper Adams. "Hartford was a great place to cut your teeth," Steve believes. At the same time, Steve started working gigs with the pianist and bassist from McLean's group, Hotep Idris Galeta and Nat Reeves, which also proved to be a pivotal experience.

After he graduated in '89, "Jackie recommended me to Art Blakey because I was heading to New York. I got to go down and sit in with the band and then Art called me a few months later in December. I was the last guy to ever join the Messengers."Davis spent the better part of a year with the Messengers before Blakey's passing. "I remember being very blown away at the prospect of being there. I did focus on the music and I realized that Art Blakey was a human being like anyone else, but it took me some time. He had such an awesome stature and of course you couldn't help but idolize him."

As Damon Smith points out in his insert notes to Steve’s second Criss Cross CD – Dig Deep [1136]:

“Steve Davis has the rare distinction of having worked with two of the most influential bands in modern jazz history, Art Blakey's Jazz Messengers and the Jackie McLean Sextet. The impact of these experiences on his life and music has been significant. Of the many lessons that these leaders imparted on their talented trombone player, one of the most important was their emphasis on group chemistry. Both Blakey and McLean put a premium on interaction and communication. Not merely recording session anomalies, their bands actually worked together and developed as units. This was an approach for which Steve had a natural affinity and he has continually sought a similar level of rapport in his own groups. It is in this spirit and with these goals in mind that Steve approached the recording session for Dig Deep.” [underlining is mine]

Not surprisingly, the guys that Steve Davis chose to join him on this sessions are those he had been working with in the musical cooperative – One for All – which is till a working band today and also has a number of recordings outstanding available on the Criss Cross label.

Group chemistry – when it happens [not always a guarantee] – is not necessarily the product of longevity, although it helps.

Leaving one’s ego on at the front door, listening to what others in the group are playing and having character traits such as a willingness to cooperate and to be unselfish are very important for the formation of a Jazz band’s “group chemistry.”

But another principal factor that enables group chemistry is the nature of how the composing and arranging are put together and here Steve Davis has the touch of the old masters such as Tadd Dameron, Benny Golson, and Gigi Gryce.

They, along with Horace Silver, Hank Mobley and Sonny Clark, arranged Jazz originals and standards from the Great American Songbook in such a way as to blend the instrumental voicings while leaving plenty of room for the soloists to “stretch out.”


They intersperse riffs and counter melodies that nudge the music and the soloists along and create a group impression, a kind of a musical collective personality, if you will.

Group chemistry is something that seems to happen around Steve Davis’ music, no doubt, in large part due to his skills and talents in bringing it about.

Part of it, too, is because of his orientation. He’s not interested in just playing the trombone as a trombone, but wants to play like other instruments on it.

As Ted Panken relates in the insert notes to Steve’s third Criss Cross CD – Crossfire [#1152]:

Davis began to blend the harmonic acuity and rhythmic punch of J J. Johnson and Curtis Fuller with the big sound approach of the pre-J.J. big band trombonists. "I was captivated by Miles and Wallace Roney at the time,"Davis comments, "and wanted to be that on the trombone. Not obvious, but more subtle, mysterious, abstract, less vibrato. I started to listen to how Curtis Fuller brought a warmth to that approach. To me Curtis phrases like a saxophone, taking it another step beyond J.J., translating Coltrane to the brass. His velocity and authority when he played next to Freddie Hubbard and Wayne Shorter in the Messengers was astounding, and he transcended whatever limitations the horn might present. …

After a while you get the confidence and intuition to create, to play off what everyone else is playing, instigate a purer, group musical approach as opposed to running some stuff you’ve been working on.”

Steve Davis listens – to everybody – and because he does, he is able to bring things together.

As he related to Ted Panken in 2004 in the insert notes to Meant To Be [Criss Cross #1248]:

"I love chord progressions and harmonic movement,"Davis continues. "The melodies come from the changes …. What kind of language are you playing through these chords? It seems to be less of a priority to a lot of improvisers now to really sing a song in your solo. It doesn't mean being corny, laying on some buttery melodies. I'm talking about turning a phrase, playing something poetic. At the same time, that's not my whole concept. I love rhythm, some back-and-forth with the drums or the piano. …”

"As you hear more, you understand more, and it's got to come out of your instrument," he concludes. "I happen to be holding a trombone every day of my life—and the days I don't, shame on me. But, you can't forget that you are the musician you are without the horn in your hands. You've got to get that music out, and there comes a point when you're playing beyond your instrument in order to fully achieve that expression.

I mean no disrespect to the legacy of the trombone, but I don't necessarily think as a trombonist. I don't think first and foremost of what J.J. or Slide or Curtis Fuller would play. These are heroes of mine. Curtis and Slide are good friends. But you have to play you.

Over the years, I've been fortunate to be next to Jackie McLean and Chick [Corea, pianist] and Freddie [Hubbard, trumpeter], and peers like saxophonists Eric Alexander and Jimmy Greene—so many great musicians. You want to connect with the guys you're playing with, connect with the rhythm section, speak their language. …”

Because of his sensitive awareness to the fact that making good Jazz is a collaborative effort, Steve Davis has been a unifying force ever since his appearance on the Jazz scene.

He just has a centripetal orientation – he pulls things together. When it came time to record his 2005 Update Criss Cross CD [#1282], the musicians that he works with most regularly were on the road.

So he brought together musicians whom he had long admired – Roy Hargrove on trumpet, Peter Bernstein on guitar and Anthony Wonsey on piano – combined them when bassist Nat Reeves and Joe Farnsworth, both of whom he regularly works with, a produced a marvelously blended and balanced recording.

Coming full circle with our beginning statements about him, one of the tunes Steve recorded on this disc is the following quartet version of Henry Mancini and Johnny Mercer’s Moment to Moment which you can sample as the audio track to the following video tribute to Steve. 

Below this video you'll find another one featuring Steve along with alto saxophonist Mike DiRubbo, pianist David Hazeltine, bassist Peter Washington and drummer Joe Farnsworth performing his original composition - Systems Blue. The test of every Jazz musician since time immemorial has been the ability to play the blues. I think, Steve, Mike, David, Peter and Joe all score high marks in this category for their work on this track.


Uan Rasey: Hollywood Studio Artist - The Leonard Maltin Interview

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


Every film buff knows the names of the great movie composers, but hardly anyone knows who actually performed their scores. Musicians received no credit for their work (and still don't, unless they are singled out as featured soloists).

Among musicians, conductors, composers and arrangers, however, Uan Rasey was known as one of the best in the business, a lead trumpeter who made good music sound great.

Listen to the ballet from An American in Paris and you'll hear his soaring trumpet, especially during the jazzy passages. If you enjoy Bing Crosby's vintage radio programs, as I do, you can hear Uan's beautiful lead voice intoning the crooner's theme song Where the Blue of the Night (Meets the Gold of the Day) And his rendition of Jerry Goldsmith's melancholy theme for Chinatown is unforgettable.

Although stricken with polio as a boy, the disability never held Uan back from scaling the heights of the music world in Los Angeles. For many years, he has taught a younger generation of trumpeters, and appears in the new documentary Trying to Get Good: The Jazz Odyssey of Jack Sheldon, discussing one of his star pupils. Since conducting this interview, I've run into Uan cheering on great musicians at Charlie O's jazz club in the San Fernando Valley. - Leonard Maltin [Uan Rasey died in 2011 at the age of 90].

LM: How and when did you first come to Los Angeles?

UR: The end of 1936; early 1937.  In 1935, it got down to 65 below in Glasgow, Montana — that's without the wind chill factor. And I was in a wheelchair; I could barely move around. We lost a few kids that froze to death. My mother said, "We have to get out of here," so we came out here.

LM: How old were you then?

UR: 15 or 16 when I first got out here...but I was lucky. I heard about an audition in high school. I auditioned for the first trumpet player in Jack Armstrong’s  All American Band in Monterey Park [suburb of Los Angeles], and I got that gig, on Wednesday night. It paid five bucks, which was a lot of money in 1937, a lot of money. We could live on that. Our furnished house was twelve dollars a month. Both my sisters slept in my mom's bedroom; I slept on the davenport. We had a refrigerator and a stove, so we were home free.

LM: So, you had your first professional gig.

UR: I was lucky because I didn't know, I thought everybody could play high Gs. I came down here and nobody could read. High C was a high note. I heard Cootie Williams or other guys play on the radio in Montana, and imitated them. There was a limit to what I could do; I couldn't run out and play football, so I played trumpet.

[Then] around 1938, '39, I heard about trumpeters getting together in Bronson Canyon [part of Griffith Park; near the famous “Hollywood” sign] on Saturday mornings. I went over there and I played with the guys -Frank Zinzer and especially Larry Sullivan, first trumpeter at Warner Bros. I could play higher than he could, and read just as fast. I was 16, 17 years of age. That's why I got my first gig in 1940.


LM: You were a good reader?

UR: I read well, I read fast. I learned very young. It's just mathematics, really.

LM: You didn't think there was anything special about your abilities...

UR: No, no, I thought everybody could play equal to me and better.

LM: When you started playing with these guys at Bronson Canyon, that started getting your name around?

UR: Yeah, that's right, I got other calls to play. Buddy Pepper was a young actor that had a band at the Paramount Theatre here. I was the only kid there, too.

LM: Were you still going to school?

UR:  Yeah. I just went through high school, that's all. I had to start working.

LM: What was your first movie experience?

UR:  1940, at Warners. It was exciting.

LM: How big was the orchestra?

UR; A symphonic band - forty pieces, I want to say. The next picture, somebody got ill at the last minute, and I got a call to play. Later on, when I was on the road with Sonny Dunham's band, a guy named Fat Wendt was first trumpet player at Columbia. He offered me the job of third trumpet at Columbia and I turned it down. I thought it was too corny in 1940.

LM:  Because you had a jazz sensibility?

UR: Along with classical. I had a lot of classical training. At 14 years of age, I won first place in classical playing in Montana.

LM:  Yes, but you appreciated jazz...

UR:  I like 'em both...

LM: No reason not to. But you turned down a steady studio job.

UR: Yeah, I did.

LM: How long were you out with Sonny Dunham's band?

UR: Off and on for over two years. I had a busted lip, that's the reason I gave up. I had a big blister on my lip and I finally had to stop playing and found a doctor who cut off the callus. I laid off for a month, [then] I could play, but it wouldn't vibrate. That's the only time I saw my teacher weep, when he heard me try to play like that. I got the  biggest mouthpiece I could find; that helped a lot, too, and within a month I played pretty well.

LM: That must have been scary.

UR:  I almost gave up. I even went to the Lockheed Employment to get a job there and the guy said, "Come back tomorrow." Then that afternoon I found thai doctor, so I didn't go back to Lockheed.

LM: What was your next job?

UR:   I think Alvino Rey came into town and they’d heard about me. We played the Orpheum Theatre.

LM: That was in the days of movie theatres having 2 live show between films.

UR:  That's right.

LM:   How many shows a day would you play? Do you remember?

UR: Well, that was the problem. [For instance,] we were playing the Adams Theatre in Newark and the Meadowbrook [nightclub] at the same time. We played the theatre from nine 'til nine at night-six shows - then we played from ten 'til two at Meadowbrook. You play a lot, but I had the chops, pretty good and strong.

LM: You can only do that when you're young, right? When did you first meet up with Billy May?

UR: 1940, when Glenn Miller came out here they played the Palladium [and] Sonny Dunham would play one set. We didn't see each other 'til 1943 when Billy got the job with Ozzie Nelson's band; we were playing side by side, he was playing third trumpet and I was playing first trumpet. And one day for some reason, the violin player who was in charge of music for Ozzie Nelson took exception to the fact that Ozzie wanted to change [something] and, you know, [he's] entitled to change it, he's a musician, too. [The violinist] got fired and Billy became the leader, so I started working in 1943 with Billy.

LM: That was his big break, too. Was Billy a natural leader?

UR: Yeah, he was. He's got such a great sense of humor, in everything he does, just smoothes things out so well. And he didn't mind if Ozzie changed things. Then he and John Scott [Trotter] were very close and that's why I think the next year, the end of 43' or '44, I was [playing] third trumpet [on the Bing Crosby radio show] and that was a big thing. I think people heard me there 'cause I was a dumb young kid playing high notes that I shouldn't have been. I'd play Fs or high Gs, and he used to have letters from back east [asking] "Who's playing the trumpet?"

LM: I just listened to a Crosby show from the late 40s where he singled you out after you played a nice solo.

UR: He was very good about that. You couldn't converse with him, though. A very private man.

LM:   But appreciative of musicians.

UR: He sure was. That was great.

LM: So you had a steady gig on the Crosby Show...

UR: Along with the Jack Benny Show, a lot of different shows, the ones you make the most money on. And I didn't want to work Saturdays — I'm a track and field nut, so I used to give up shows and they couldn't
understand that. 1 even went to the Olympics in 1948 in London.

LM: So radio was your bread and butter for a long time.

UR: Yeah, a long time, yeah, 'til '49. I used to play other studios, too. Gordon Jenkins and different guys would use me, I could play high Fs, and the only other guy who did that too, at that time, was Zeke Zarchy. But I could also play pretty good classical at the same time. That's why I was being asked to play different movies. I didn't realize I was really being auditioned by MGM, 'cause they were going to get rid of [Rafael] Mendes and hire me. It took me a long time to realize it until they finally said, "We want you out here as a third trumpet" and I turned it down four times. I said, "I want to have it listed that I want to go the Olympics in '52, and I don't want to work on Saturdays." Anyhow, after the fourth or fifth time, I said "If you write that down, I'll come out..." So I started in 1949.

LM: They met your terms.

UR: Yeah. I guess enough guys wanted me. Dr. Rozsa and a guy named Adolph Deutsch didn't like the classical playing the way [Mendes did it]. It sounded like Mendes and the orchestra, [or] it sounded like Ziggy Elman's orchestra. Ziggy couldn't really fit in as a classical player. Played great jazz, you know? But, you know when Ziggy worked with Paul Weston, [some called it] Ziggy Elman and his band, and some of those leaders don't want to have [that].

LM: So what does a musician do to blend in?

UR: Well, in a symphonic orchestra, there's a certain colloquialism. How do you hold notes? How do you end notes gracefully? The magic of sound is most important, so sound is the most prevalent thing that you hear and it overcomes the articulation you have. A lot of guys have a lot of articulation 'cause that's the easy way to play, but you want a big wonderful sound in classical playing.

LM: So you finally said yes to MGM in 1949.

UR: Yeah, you had to sign a contract. You could still work other places if the leader liked you, so [if] Andre Previn or Lennie Hayton or Johnny Green worked someplace else, you worked with them. But [they wanted] your allegiance there first. Then they stopped it because the union didn't give [the studios] a break at all for the fact that they had  musicians [under contract].

LM:   Was that a fifty-two week contract?

UR: Fifty-two, yeah.

LM:   For some people, that was the ultimate goal, wasn't it?

UR: It was, yeah. Everybody aimed for that, especially at MGM, since they had most of the musicals.

LM: Tell me about working with Johnny Green.

UR: Johnny Green lost every job he ever had, 'cause his ego was so strong he'd just take over. I saw that when I did the U.S. Steel Show with him in 1946, I think. He got fired from that job. And he got fired from MGM also, he wasn't allowed on the whole lot for a long time there. Dore Schary [had] offered Lennie Hayton the job, and Johnny Green was second choice to be head of music at MGM. He wasn't a great writer, he was a good songwriter. He talked big about being a good conductor, but always something happened. [At] the Hollywood Bowl he'd mess up, do something wrong and you just had to take over and try to get him out of it. It was just too bad. Anyhow, he got fired. Primarily Arthur Freed was the one that really got him fired, because Roger Edens used to do the music for Arthur Freed productions. They finally had a cop at each door — there were two doors on a movie stage-just to keep Johnny Green off the stage so he wouldn't come and tell Roger how to do things. Like, "The bassoon should be louder here," or "You should make that a triplet" and so forth. Just trite things to show his authority, you know.

The only one that really put him down was [Dimitri] Tiomkin. [Green] would try [to interrupt] maybe for 20 minutes [and Tiomkin would say] "Is someone trying to get my attention?" You could hear, "Dimi, Dimi."

He'd say, "Listen," and give him three or four things. [And Tiomkin would say] "Don't you have better things to do than that?" So Johnny walked off. We did one picture, and Johnny Green was going to conduct, and by that time, he had changed [his name]. "Don't call me Johnny, call me John." And it's hard to tell an egotist, "You've got to listen to other people, too." I tried to do that gently but it never helped. He got fired from Desilu for doing the same thing. I was there when he got fired from Desilu, and Desi, literally, took ahold of his pants and got his shirt and tossed him off the stage. It was sad, it was sad. He did the same thing with Stan Wilson at Universal, [when he] told Stan Wilson, "You don't know anything about music," and he got fired from that.

LM:   Talk about the preparations for doing one of those big musicals.

UR: We just came and read it, that's all.

LM: While they were rehearsing, they just used a pianist, right?

UR:   The piano and sometimes a drum. The guys used to kid about it,
but they think that the suicides of at least five pianists [were attributable to] Fred Astaire 'cause he'd go over and over again, over and over again … where Gene [Kelly] was happy, and having a great time.

LM: Would someone like Gene Kelly ever come to a session?

UR: Occasionally, but not very often. He was always there for whatever he
had to do, of course. We'd just come [in] and read it. You were expected to
read it and not make mistakes, first time.

LM: There were so many great composers there and orchestrators, but not
every composer was necessarily a great conductor. Talk about that
if you would.

UR:    Bronislaw Kaper — a good writer — couldn't conduct at all, and it was a tragic thing. He finally got a show on his own, maybe by 1963, '64 — the FBI show at Warners. He thought he could conduct this one show and he didn't prepare it with click tracks, which he should have done. We had a three-hour session; it went seven hours, and he had to pay the extra money for that, so gradually he was just out of business. Hugo Friedhofer couldn't
conduct, same thing, you know? Couldn't conduct.

LM: But did he know he couldn't conduct?

UR.: Yeah, Hugo did. They both did but, you know,[in TV], they don't have the money to [afford having] somebody else [to conduct] so that was both their kind of demise. But with click tracks at least you have something worked out. Andre [Previn]conducted for a lot of guys, you know, even some of the good conductors. He [subbed] for Roger Edens, for the one you just mentioned, Kaper.

LM: When you met Andre was he still a teenager?

UR: Yeah, a little bit younger than I was. When I came out there in '49, he had been conducting for Bronislaw.

LM:   Did you work at all with Scott Bradley on the MGM cartoons? I'm a big fan of his.

UR: Yeah, a good writer, did a good job and kept you on your toes, you know?

LM:  Those scores are very energetic.

UR: They sure are. They're fun to play. We had a good time doing it. Nice guy, too. [And with conductors] you used to say, he's a nice guy, let's go help him.

LM:   So the personalities of these people really had an effect on the music...


UR: They sure did. Well, that's what Andre's alluding to in his book. George Stoll, he'd make a mistake and leave. He's talking about George in the book, but he never mentions that's who he is, though. Anybody in the whole orchestra could correct him, but we wouldn't help him at all, because George dealt very demeaningly with the band. The band was always wrong because he'd get way behind. We used to say, "Kem Tone today?" or "Dutch Boy,” what's he doing today?" [Here Uan imitates Stoll conducting, looking like a house painter making big, long strokes - Ed.] But you had to get through that, you had to play it no matter what - maybe encourage him to go faster, especially if you had another gig someplace else and wanted to get out. He was one of the worst offenders.

LM:  How long would it take to score, say, a seven-minute cartoon?

UR: Three hours. Sometimes really two. We all read well; everybody read well, [it was] expected. The soloist might make mistakes, but never the orchestra. We all read quickly the first time through and you'd read it to see if there's any mistakes in the copy or the original composition, because sometimes they made mistakes, too, the composers. Most guys did it [in the] first or second take.

LM: And how long might it take to record a feature film score?

UR: Oh, depends how much [there is]. Sometimes you might have 38 minutes of music. Some guys go fast, Andre went pretty fast, you know? But Georgie Stoll literally might take, four times as long as anybody else to do that. It was so sad with Hugo Friedhofer, we had click tracks and he couldn't follow those! We're all through playing, he's still conducting. But a great writer, really, he was a great writer.

LM: When you scored movies, what time would you start recording?

UR: It all depends, Alfred Newman - eight o'clock. Most of the time, nine o'clock.

LM: In the morning.

UR: Yeah. Al would go early. For Bing Crosby, seven o'clock, then he could go play golf. One time, six-thirty.

LM: Last week my wife and I were channel surfing and TCM was showing An American in Paris. It was toward the end of the movie and, of course, we had to watch the ballet. It's an amazing piece of work.

UR: It all worked out well. It all gelled, all came beautifully. Gene Kelly's so talented — he'll listen to what's going on and go with the flow. Where [with] Fred Astaire you had to do one way and that's it. Sometimes, during the break, like, a four-beat break, he might come in a little different than a fifty-piece orchestra, but the orchestra was wrong, he was never wrong.
The love theme for An American in Paris [was orchestrated by Conrad Salinger.] Connie Salinger was one of the great writers of all time. In fact, Leo Arnaud brought back a letter [that] he read to me. Connie wanted to meet Maurice Ravel, you know? And he went back there and worked with him a few weeks through Leo Arnaud's introduction. Leo came over from France to work with Fred Waring and he didn't like it. Fred Waring's a businessman, not a musician. So he wound up at MGM. Anyhow, Connie went back there and studied with Ravel in Paris. Then Leo had this letter he got [from Ravel] that said, "You know, I learned more from Connie Salinger than I ever knew myself."

LM: Wow.

UR: Connie's a wonderful guy, a good writer. He never got the credit he should have, because he [did] all the small, little things mostly, so charming. How to have the bells, how to add the flute with the violins, [at] just the right time. He was so aware of the niceties of what music makes so settling.

LM:  If I played you some sample soundtracks, let's say, from the 50s, let's say, one from Fox, one from Paramount, one from Warner Bros., one from MGM, would you be able to tell the difference?

UR: Sometimes I can, yeah.

LM: What would set each one apart for you?

UR: It's the orchestra and the room, both of them, that makes the difference. We're lucky in a sense that with brass especially, you can make your own sound that's a little more personal than any other instrument. 'Cause it's your body, the way that you aim there, or hold your air, your interaction with it, the way that you exude the sound in there. The trumpet or trombone only amplifies what your body says. Where with a violin, that's hard, unless you are talking technique. And sometimes you can tell the difference. I can tell you Manny Klein's tone, or Frank Zinzer's tone. And I can tell my tone, a lot of guys can tell my tone, too. They call up and say, "I just heard you play on so-an-so."

LM: And there's also the sound of the room?

UR: Warners had the most "live" sound, good live sound. And they changed the setting at MGM, which helped a lot. That wasn't quite as large but had a wonderful warmth to it and more life than it had before. RKO was very dull, very dull.

LM: Tell me about some of the different conductors that you worked with a lot, the composer-conductors, like Miklos Rozsa.

UR: A good conductor, knew what he wanted and knew what to write for the producer, but he couldn't write a wide variety of things. I always thought his romantic sounds lacked something. That's my own personal opinion. He did a fine job, [but] didn't understand, [since] he never played on the road with a band, that some things were more difficult than others. For instance, when you hold whole notes, that's the most difficult thing for a trumpet player or trombone to do. Finally I said, "Dr. Rozsa, give us a couple of minutes so we can] get the blood back in the lip." He said, 'Well, on the third page, you have all the whole notes, you can rest during the whole notes." It's like holding weights, you know, the weights get heavier and heavier but you
can't put them down, you just hold them. But, he was a good writer.

LM: Tell me about Adolph Deutsch.

UR: Good writer, did a lot of wonderful things,especially for singers and had good know-how;listened to reason, too. He'd come back and talk to you and ask, "What do you think? Am I getting a good feel here?" Very few guys who could do that. [He was] somebody who listened.

LM:   What do you think were Andre Previn's strengths?

UR: Just being a great musician. He had a great sense of humor and [was] a great conductor. He conducted so well, he could read it off the first time and time it at the same time. Just a great musician.

LM:  Having the musicians' respect, would that make a difference in the session, yes?


UR:  Oh yeah, we tried hard for Andre. There was no fooling around there, no phoning it in, 'cause he was very ardent. Most guys are a big show, you know, Leonard Bernstein showed off for the audience, or the worst one, my God, was Paul Whiteman. He did a show out here two years in a row, '47, '48, a summer replacement show [on radio, and] he wasn't there at all for the rehearsal. Just came and followed the orchestra then turned around to the audience when he cut it off. A big showman, you know, big showman.

LM: But Previn knew that he could trust you guys, so [he] didn't have to push.

UR: And he was also so good to us about [giving us] the inside job. He was the only guy who would ever come back and tell us the inside story on what
happened.

LM: How about Alfred Newman?

UR: Just a great musician, a great writer for music players, too. He took time to make music important, you know? He always had good taste, The poor guy, though [he did] the Academy Awards [broadcast] only one time. I never saw him so nervous. He was scared to death, and he knocked over all his music. For the first half hour of the show, I just had to take control, you know. We had five pieces of music, three in one spot, two on the chair beside you. And as soon as they announced the winner, you had to put that one up front and play it. So I just took over and started playing ‘cause he’s down on the floor, trying to collect his music. It was sad, he was just so nervous. He hadn’t done a live show for years, you know.

LM: Am I right that if we leave Johnny Green out of the equation, Newman was the only musician who was also the head of a studio music department?

UR: That’s right. Vice President at one time.

LM: Did you ever work for Bernard Herrmann?

UR: Yeah, lots. O gosh, he was always so unthankful. It’s his attitude, you know, the music was everything. He even did, one trumpet and sixteen bassoons where the were contrabassoons regular bassoons... and it never was good enough for him. He finally did Taxi Driver, remember that picture? And he [wouldn't] conduct. Finally, I said something because he just sat there. Jack Hayes was the orchestrator so Jack said, "Let's just start playing, you know, let's do something," so we just did it and we played cues, got through it, and he sat in the booth and said very little. I guess we broke for lunch and came back and played later on, the jazz scene. So-called jazz. You know, I play ersatz jazz; I'm not a great jazz player, not at all, but I play what the leader wants. You know, you're there to please them. So he I came out and thanked us, thanked me especially, "Thank you, Uan." Uan — he used my name! My God, after all these years, maybe sixteen years —

LM: — and then he died.

UR: And he died that night. First time he ever thanked us.  Ironic, at least.

LM:  What was your impression of Arthur Freed?

UR: Good man, but he's a songwriter, so he had Roger Edens actually write [scores] for him. And Roger was a good piano player, good writer, and a nice guy.

LM: A lot of people say that they could never figure out Arthur Freed, but they realize his secret was hiring talented people.

UR:   That's right, he hired talent. He knew good talent. Had a big orchestra, and wasn't afraid to take time, so it worked out fine.

LM:   How about Victor Young? Did you ever work with him? He's one of my favorites

UR:   Oh, all-time favorites. I did the Western show with him, remember the radio show? So efficient, he knew what to do. Great songs he wrote. And just great with a stick. A great musician, one of the great writers of all time.

LM: But no overtime because he would get it done so quickly.

UR: Yeah. He just wanted to play poker. Just get it done, get out of here.

LM: You know, of course, that you're famous for that solo on Chinatown that you did for Jerry Goldsmith.

UR: I couldn't believe that. I got back from an NCAA track meet in Austin, Texas, but before [I went] I called and the call at Paramount was three trumpets, so 1 thought I'm OK, I can hide, you know? I got back and it's dangerous business, because I hadn't played my horn that much at all, just watched the track meet. I walk in and it was one trumpet and forty string players, four pianos and drummers. We had to do a lot of things because they had changed it a lot. Robert Evans had done [the score] before with the guy that did A Chorus Line, not a very nice man. Some guys walked out on him back in New York because he'd insult people. Robert Evans threw the whole score out.

So, they had to have started Monday and Tuesday, we got through Tuesday night about ten o'clock, and we had to have the whole movie back for a preview, on a plane Friday night, in New York City. And I never thought it would be a big hit. It was nothing to play really. A lot of people, I guess, thought it was Bobby Hackett that played this solo. So I never thought about it, then I got a call from Paramount, [saying] "We have hundreds of calls here about who played the solo." I couldn't believe it. They finally put my name on the album, I guess.

LM:  All those years, did you ever go to hear one of your scores? Did you take any pride in going into a theatre and hearing your work?

UR:  Well, no, 'cause I always find complaints about it. "I should have done that better." I didn't enjoy it. Not much of a fan of myself.

LM: I suppose that was an advantage when you worked in radio: you had no chance to do it over again, so it had to be right the first time.

UR: Oh, sure. They called me Fearless Fosdick. It was fun; I dared myself. I welcome challenges, you know? That's the only growth you have, when you challenge yourself... do something a little better, a little more.”

You can listen to Uan’s haunting beautiful rendering of the them from Chinatown on the following video.



Brothers And Other Mothers

$
0
0
© - Steven A. Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


Mark Gardner has been a fine writer about Jazz for many years. He is based in England and has authored numerous essays, articles and liner notes on a variety of Jazz-related subjects.

What follows was originally developed by Mark as the liner notes to a double LP that was released by Savoy Records in 1976 [SJL2210]. Entitled Brothers and Other Mothers, it was made up of 31 tracks that were originally issued by the label from 1946-1950.

While the 1976 LP is difficult to find, Mark subsequently published his liner notes to it in four-parts in CODA Magazine.


® 1976 by Mark Gardner CODA Magazine.


BROTHERS AND OTHER MOTHERS – (LINER NOTES) Part One

"Tides of musical influence are virtually impossible to monitor with complete accuracy. And in jazz, a young music still and one that has always been in a hurry, the problem is even more complex. Names and styles pass rapidly before our eyes and ears with disconcerting speed. This is not the scene for the leisurely, scholarly chronicler who likes ordered, out-and-dried developments, easy to trace.

So if an inquiring spirit poses the question, "Who was the first saxophonist to latch on to what Lester Young was into in the late 1930?" There is only one honest answer, "Who knows?" Influences are absorbed, often unconsciously, at other times deliberately (though perhaps not admitted), frequently quite casually. The process of widespread musical assimilation of new ideas in a constantly shifting artistic area like jazz is remarkably swift. One can notice significant changes, accepted and incorporated into the styles of numerous players, within months, even weeks.

There will always be the imitators, the mimics who can copy in meticulous detail the work of a true creator. But in jazz outright imitation is not as widespread as we may sometimes feel. Indeed, one of the fascinating aspects of the music is to view the innovations and to listen to the myriad ways they are expressed by various jazz practitioners who may not be originators but who do possess individualistic qualities.

There is nothing especially admirable about a musician who switches completely from one style to another which is coming into vogue. But an established player who shows he has been keeping his ears open for new things that he likes, and demonstrates the fact with a particular phrase, a tonal inflection, maybe just the choice of a certain tune, is informing us that he and the music are alive and growing.

The phenomenon of Lester Young's enveloping influence on young saxophone players between 1940 and 1950, and beyond has, perhaps, been over-simplified. The shadow of Pres was cast far beyond the generation of white tenor players who emerged from the wartime big bands, a refuge for many who were either too young or too clever to be drafted. The young, and not-so-young, black players were equally touched by Lester whose conception, let it be noted. penetrated deeply into all corners of jazz and was by no means an exclusive source for reedmen. Trumpeters, pianists. trombonists, singers and drummers all learned invaluable lessons from digging Young gliding out of the Basie section or riming those deceptively nonchalant gems behind Billie.

One can only generalize about how, why, when and where Pres seemed to permeate jazz and help to lead the music from swing into bebop in the most relaxed and logical way. Charlie Parker was on hand to crystallize and extend the direction, and meanwhile Pres went right along his own easy and supple path. His music changed, too, and young guys picked up on those shifts. But, unquestionably, Wardell Gray, Dexter Gordon, Teddy Edwards. James Moody, Gene Ammons and Sonny Stitt were just as aware of/and affected by Pres as were their white contemporaries Stan Getz, Al Cohn, Zoot Sims, Allen Eager, Brew Moore and Herbie Steward. So too were older men like Flip Phillips, Illinois Jacquet, Buddy Tate and Georgie Auld.
Perhaps the key difference between, say Dexter and Getz, was that Gordon had also listened profitably to Hawkins, Webster and Byas, while Stan appeared to be a Pres man and a Dexter Gordon admirer! Ideas were exchanged more readily in those days and to unravel the cross-pollination of musical thought that went on between the guys involved would be impossible now.
But we can examine a goodly slice of recorded evidence, enjoyable clues and pointers and fine music to boot, within the covers of this key reissue. In this set can be heard a superstar in embryo (Stan Getz). a living legend (Allen Eager), two departed legends (Brew Moore, Serge Chaloff), Mr. Swing (Zoot Sims), and the complete musician, composer/arranger/soloist (Al Cohn), They all happened to be saxophonists who came to prominence immediately after the war. Four-Cohn, Getz, Sims and Chaloff-were Brothers in the famous Herman bebop hand. Moore (he never worked with Herman) was a brother by adoption while Eager had been a member of Woody's saxophone section in 1944.

It was out of the big modern bands, short-lived but exciting anachronisms, that so many of the Pres men sprang into the spotlight. Ammons, Stitt, Gray and Budd Johnson were with the Billy Eckstine crew at a crucial period. Others had been with Earl Hines. The Herman orchestra came a little later but it was a haven for young saxophonists. Ammons played with both Eckstine and Herman so he heard it all.


The Second Herd, arguably Woody's best band, played a vital role in the wider spread of the Pres influence via the Four Brothers who were in the first instance Herbie Steward, Stan Getz, Zoot Sims and Serge Chaloff. Three tenors and a baritone was an unusual line-up hut Woody played safe by hiring altoman Sam Marowitz, and of course the leader often swelled the section to six on alto. Still, it was the three light-toned tenors and the baritone that combined for a new ensemble sound.
In his usual clever way Woody Herman adapted an idea for his own purposes. As early as the beginning of 1946 Gene Roland organized a band with four tenors in the lineup-Al Cohn, Stan Getz, Joe Magro and Louis Otis. In the summer of the following year he revived the idea at a place called Pontrelli's Ballroom, Los Angeles. By then the saxophone personnel comprised Getz, Sims, Steward and Jimmy Giuffre. Ralph Burns heard them and was impressed. He persuaded Woody to go along and listen. Result: Herman put Getz, Sims and Steward on the payroll and replaced Giuffre with Chaloff. The astute leader had bought himself a distinctive feature for the band that was ultimately launched in October 1947. Well, did all those white tenor players sound the same. as Miles Davis once asserted? Not on your life but they did have much in common, not least their respect for Pres. And when several of them played together and traded breaks it could be confusing. As an exercise try pinpointing the soloists on every segment of a Stan Getz date from April 1949 which brought together Getz, Cohn, Eager, Moore and Sims. It is a tough blindfold test.

But honestly it should not be so hard to tell Getz from Cohn in the ordinary way. Or Eager from Moore, who are certainly closer in feeling, than the former pair. Cohn always had a firmer tone than the others. The Getz sound possessed an edge and was less rounded. Eager was, incredibly, into Pres and bebop at the same time. Moore, was an ebullient player who worshipped Young. Sims? He played Zoot with a Young accent.

BROTHERS AND OTHER MOTHERS (LINER NOTES) Part Two® 1976 by Mark GardnerIncidentally, it is interesting to note that Young himself thought that Paul Quinichette and "maybe Eager" came nearest to his own style. Pres remains an enigma-but then so do Moore and Eager, two highly unconventional characters whose restless lifestyles typified their time. Milton A. Moore Jr. was a wanderer, a born loser, a hero of the beat generation and a brilliant saxophonist. Yes, he once remarked that any tenorman who did not play like Pres was playing wrong-that was the extent of his admiration.
Moore was born in Indianola, Mississippi, on March 26, 1924, and his first musical instrument was a harmonica given to him by his mother as a seventh birthday present. He played in his high school band and at 18 got a job with Fred Ford's dixieland band. He arrived in New York during 1943 and heard what bebop was all about. He would return to New York several times in the late forties to lead his own quartet, work with Claude Thornhill (an unlikely environment), swing his tail off in front of Machito's Afro-Cubans, gig with Gerry Mulligan and Kai Winding at the Royal Roost and Bop City.

Moore was never around one place for too long. He would take off for Memphis or New Orleans, playing all kinds of weird jobs ("I go where the work is"). Around 1953-54 he was on the Greenwich Village scene, a frequent jammer at Bob Reisner's Open Door where other cats playing mostly for kicks and little bread included Thelonious Monk. Charlie Parker, Charlie Mingus and Roy Haynes. It was at the Open Door that Bird and Brew once serenaded a piece of chewing gum stuck to the floor. Recently discovered recordings also found Parker and Moore together on 1953 sessions in Montreal, Canada.
One day in the 'fifties Brew casually took off for California. As Moore told it, "Billy Faier had a 1949 Buick and somebody wanted him to drive it out to California and he rode through Washington Square shouting 'anyone for the Coast?' And I was just sitting there on a bench and there wasn't shit shaking in New York so I-said 'hell, yes,' and when we started off there was Rambling Jack Elliot and Woody Guthrie." After Woody heard Brew play at the roadside en route he refused to speak again to the saxophonist.

Guthrie didn't dig jazz. "But we were the only juice heads in the car so Woody would say to Jack or Billy, 'Would you ask Brew if he'd like to split a bottle of port with me, and I'd say, 'You tell Woody that's cool with me.' Then they let me off in L.A. and I took a bus up to San Francisco."
Before that fantastic journey. Brew had worked around with his buddy Tony Fruscella, a beautiful trumpeter who was also over-fond of the juice. Allen Eager was also a regular playing partner of Fruscella's. Brew stayed in Frisco for about five years, played all over town, made a couple of albums under his own name, recorded with Cal Tjader and drank a lot of wine. He was seriously ill in 1959 but recovered and in 1961 moved to Europe and for three years drifted around the Continent. Twice in the 1960's he returned to the States but there was still no shit shaking and nobody bothered to record him properly (a date as a sideman with Ray Nance was the only evidence of the final, unhappy return). His parents were very old and his mother sick. Brew was far from well and didn't look after himself. Friends kept an eye on him and tried to ensure that he ate regularly but Moore was almost past caring.

When he decided to split back to Scandinavia via the Canary Islands where he played at Jimmy Gourley's Half Note Club in Las Palmas, some of his admirers in New York produced a four-page newspaper called "Brew Moore News," in which Brew wrote a touching little verse:

Love I feel, but longing much;
Thy face I see, but cannot touch.
Your presence in heart is good, I know,
but hand in hand-it's greater so

Time was running out for Brew. There was one more album-a great set made at a Stockholm club where Moore really grooved. Then came the news that he had died after falling down a flight of steps in a restaurant. The final irony:

Brew, who had scuffled and scraped for cash almost all his life, had just been left a substantial sum of money, to give him genuine security, by a relative who had died. It happened too late.

Eager was a very different personality but he passed through the same obscurity syndrome. Allen Eager was a suave, cool. sophisticated dude, a big city man from New York (born there on January 10, 1927) who became a jetsetter. Stories about Eager are legion. Some may be myth, others are certainly true. Eager started on clarinet at the age of 13 and three years later-this was the war, remember, and experienced heads in the big bands had been drafted- he joined Bobby Sherwood. Then he worked with Sonny Dunham, Shorty Sherock. Herman, Tommy Dorsey and Johnny Bothwell's small group.
Allen was soon deeply involved in the nightly happenings on 52nd Street where a string of clubs offered the new sounds in jazz. The young tenorman, with a devotion to the Lestorian Bible, earned the respect of older players. On a Saturday evening in September 1945 an incredible six-hour show was presented by Monte Kay and Symphony Sid at the Fraternal Clubhouse, which signaled the new musical order to returnees from the European and Pacific theatres of war. Drummer Big Sid Catlett got top billing, but the "Sensational All-Star Orchestra" also included Buck Clayton and Al Killian (trumpets), Trummy Young (trombone), Charley (sic) Parker (alto), Dexter Gordon (tenor), Tony Sciacca (Scott) (clarinet), Al Haig and Billy Taylor (pianos), Len Gaskin and Lloyd Trottman (basses), Tiny Grimes (guitar) and J.C. Heard (drums). Under this impressive list on the posters ran the line, "Introducing Allen Eager on Tenor Sax."
During this period Eager found himself in some strange contexts, such as a back-up soloist to eccentric bluesman, Wynonie Harris. Eager, needless to say, just played Eager in these circumstances. The following year he was accorded a singular honour by the great Coleman Hawkins on a Hawkins date for R.C.A. Victor. The leader and star gave Eager his head on a Denzil Best number called, appropriately, Allen's Alley; Hawkins himself did not solo. Allen obliged with an excellent solo and Young-like exchanges with altoman Pete Brown. His love of Lester is well illustrated on that title, and the enclosed tracks. Eager once said of Young, "He was the first giant to put down the harshness of Jazz and instead just express pure beauty." That was also Allen's cue and view. As Ira Gitler stated in his book Jazz Masters of the 40's, "Eager, like Gray. was a master at making a meaningful statement in a short period. Also, like Gray, he was a swinger."During much of 1945 Eager and Gray worked together as members of the Tadd Dameron Band at the Royal Roost. The two saxophonists' differing stances on the Young/ Parker innovations made for a fascinating contrast. "Eager was not merely an imitator, however," wrote Gitler. "He had his own interpretation of Pres's style, and already other elements, like Charlie Parker, were changing it more. Whatever he played swung with a happy, light-footed quality and pure toned beauty. His interior time was equal to his fine overall swing. Many a night in the Roost, he had us ready to get up and start dancing along the bar."

If alcohol was Brew Moore's problem, then narcotics were certainly a plague so far as Eager, Getz and Chaloff were concerned. According to Leonard Feather, Eager was "an amusing, well read and highly articulate guy" but there was a Mr. Hyde side to his character which led him into addiction. In the years that followed the forties Eager was frequently out of music. There were times when he followed healthy pursuits like skiing or horseback riding. He took up motor racing and won first prize in the touring-car class at Sebring's sports car races one year.

In 1956 Eager turned up in Paris where critic Alun Morgan met and heard him. Allen's playing fluctuated. Sometimes it had the old brilliance but another night it would be flat and lack lustre, as indeed it is on a gimmicky album, featuring musicians from a number of countries, made that year. Having been particularly impressed by Eager's work in a Paris club on one particular evening, Morgan mentioned this to French pianist Henri Renaud who replied that the critic was very fortunate because Allen normally retired to bed at 9 p.m.!

French writer Michel Delorme, an ardent bebopper, knew nothing of Allen Eager's presence in Paris until he encountered him in a Post Office one afternoon. 'I could not believe my eyes, but we spoke and he seemed a pleasant guy." Morgan assessed him as, "Very cool, rather introspective, highly intelligent and sophisticated. He obviously had private financial means." This is borne out by one of the many popular stories about Eager. It seems that early one morning he crashed in his expensive sports car on one of the riverside roads in Paris. He walked away from the wreck unscathed without a backward glance, as if he were discarding an empty cigarette pack.

BROTHERS AND OTHER MOTHERS (LINER NOTES) Part Three
® 1976 by Mark Gardner
You would not expect to find a jazz musician's name in a biography of Marion Brando, yet Allen Eager pops up in The Brando I Knew by Carlo Fiore. He was at a party attended by Brando and, typically, the saxophonist refused to come to the telephone when Fiore called up, but, according to the author, Eager "had been a friend for years."

Apart from his playing in Paris, Eager made another attempt at a comeback in 1960 on alto, an instrument he had taken up a few years before. But nothing came of it. Assessed Gitler, "The years away from his horn had made him rusty; moreover, the old fire and fine timing were heard only in fleeting moments-it was a case of his losing something along the way that was difficult to find again."
During the late 1960's Eager was reported as being involved with the "flower people" on the West Coast. He had taken up soprano saxophone and was apparently sitting in with the Mothers of Invention on occasion. Since then the Eager Trail has gone cold. Allen has become a sort of
Howard Hughes of jazz. Whether by accident or design he has vanished into anonymity, leaving all too few recorded works as examples of his youthful brilliance.

Pictures can sometimes tell the story, and two photographs seem to sum up the change that occurred in Allen Eager. A 1948 shot by Herman Leonard shows him cool, but intense, biting his tenor mouthpiece, shades drawn over his eyes. He is flanked by Miles Davis and Kai Winding, and next to Miles stands a pop-eyed Charlie Parker. You can almost hear the 1948 sounds of the Royal Roost projecting across the years from the monochrome. A much later pic, by Dennis Stock, allows us to see Eager in his New York apartment, carefully nursing an alto, but the instrument seems to be almost an afterthought. The surroundings are stiflingly elegant. Eager's eyes are hooded, his face expressionless, the mouth set. He is a million miles away from the performing art he once typified. It is a sad photograph because Allen Eager, and those who love his playing, are aware of what has been lost.
Stan Getz, the youngest of the five tenor saxophonists celebrated in this edition, was definitely the most precocious. He was a teenage prodigy and for him too much came too soon. Born in Philadelphia on February 2, 1927. Getz started on bass, then switched to bassoon, but when he joined Dick "Stinky" Rogers at 15 he was playing tenor sax. Stan packed away a lot of experience in those early years working with Jack Teagarden, Dale Jones, Bob Chester, a year with Stan Kenton, Randy Brooks, Buddy Morrow, Jimmy Dorsey and Benny Goodman. By the time he signed on with Woody Herman, Getz was well known and had recorded under his own name. His acknowledged favorite has always been Lester but, as already noted, he also drew heavily on Dexter Gordon's vocabulary at one point.
For much of 1947 he was in California, blowing with Butch Stone and his own trio at the Swing Club. His solos with Herman, especially on Early Autumn, gained him immediate recognition and he was soon winning music polls. By 1949 he was able to form his own small group and in the early 1950's he had what many listeners regard as his finest band with Al Haig, Jimmy Raney, Teddy Kotick and Tiny Kahn, They called him "The Sound," and he certainly did have a compelling and original tone, much further removed from Pres than Eager or Moore. Getz frequently toured with

Jazz at the Philharmonic in the 1950's and recorded extensively for Norman Granz, but his narcotics addiction nearly ruined a distinguished career. First he was arrested for trying to hold up a drugstore in Seattle, Washington. Then, on a visit to Scandinavia he became seriously ill and did not play for six months. After more concert work he returned to Sweden for a couple of years before going home again.

Getz was once more in the limelight thanks to the bossa nova boom of the early 1960's. His style suited to perfection the gentle rhythms and melodic songs that the Brazilians brought to jazz. And since then Getz has led a series of fine quartets featuring, in the main, young musicians who have gone on to make important contributions to the music. Stan, indeed, has arrived at personal and artistic maturity. If at one stage his work epitomized the so called "cool school," such is no longer the case. He often sounds "heated" these days. But then, as a study of his solos from earlier days on the set will reveal, he always was an emotional player, subtle but expressive. In the realm of swinging, Getz was a rather late developer, particularly when you set his work against that of Moore and Eager. He also tended to play on top of the beat, a point you seldom found Pres at.

It is not hard to understand the reasons for Stan's early fame. His playing had a freshness and romantic quality about it. and Getz really looked the part of the clean cut, All-American boy who had made good. The problems, as so often happens, really started with widespread recognition of his talents.

Al Cohn's achievements, though not lauded to the extent of the Getz contribution, are perhaps more impressive when analysed. Cohn has always been an enormously exciting soloist. A real jazzman who never plays the same solo twice and on successive takes will attack a progression in completely different ways. His records show that he has maintained an enviable level of consistency and craftsmanship, and has continued to grow as an artist. That is also true of his efforts as an arranger and composer and occasional bandleader.Cohn was born in Brooklyn on November 24, 1925 (two years to the day after Serge Chaloff) and cut his teeth on clarinet, an instrument he still uses sometimes. In fact he never actually studied tenor saxophone but picked up his own playing technique. His first job was with Joe Marsala, then came a spell as soloist and arranger with Georgie Auld's Band, followed by jobs with Alvino Rey and Buddy Rich. He replaced Herbie Steward in the Herman Herd and remained from January 1948 to April 1949 yet was not featured on any of Woody's records. Next stop was to a fine Artie Shaw Orchestra where he did cop some solo space. He left music for a couple of years but returned to play with Elliot Lawrence in 1952, Subsequently he did all manner of music jobs, writing for radio and television, making numerous records as soloist and arranger, and often teaming up with old friend Zoot Sims for, club work. He has recently returned to active playing again and sounds as good as ever. Cohn's tone has darkened and got heavier over the years but he still swings a la Lester. Through the years he has hewn close to the broad tenets that shaped his style from the outset. You can always rely on Cohn to make you feel good with his driving, purposeful swing and uncliched ideas.

I hadn't realized just how sonorous Al's tenor tone was until I heard him for the first time in person in the early 1960's. He was playing a battered old horn on which there was not a speck of lacquer to be seen but from this leaden-looking object came a deep-throated sound that was unforgettable.

BROTHERS AND OTHER MOTHERS (LINER NOTES) Part Four® 1976 by Mark Gardner
Al Cohn goes with Zoot Sims like fish and chips, and that brings us to tenorman number five-John Haley Sims who. let it be noted, also plays clarinet and alto sax with the same sense of majestic ease that is apparent in his tenor work. Sims. born at Inglewood. California on October 29, 1925, came up via the bands of Kenny Baker. Bobby Sherwood, Sunny Dunham. Bob Astor, Benny Goodman and Sid Catlett. He was a "brother" from 1947-49 and has often been part of the Benny Goodman sound over the years. He was also featured with Stan Kenton for a time in the 1950's. Sims has recorded prolifically and continues to turn out sparkling L.P.'s to this day. There's never a dull moment on a Zoot Sims record. His fluency is incredible and his tone is yet another variation on the Young approach. Zoot seldom plays badly but listeners have been positively reminded of his enormous ability of late on a series of records made by Norman Granz. He once named his favorites as Sonny Stitt and Al Cohn (Zoot and Al have undoubtedly influenced each other) but the spirit of Pres is still contained in his playing. Completing the cast of brothers in the present collection is the sixth saxophonist Serge Chaloff. the baritone anchorman of the Herman sax section. Born in Boston in 1923, Chaloflf came from a musical background and he studied piano and clarinet but, like Cohn, was a self-taught saxophonist, originally inspired by Harry Carney and Jack Washington. Chaloff had an incredible technique on the large saxophone, one that was never quite matched by even his distinguished contemporaries Leo Parker and Cecil Payne. Serge worked through the ranks of the Tommy Reynolds, Stinky Rogers, Shep Fields and Boyd Raeburn bands. But after hearing Charlie Parker his ideas were drastically altered, and in the orchestras of Georgie Auld and Jimmy Dorsey he was rapidly identified as a Brothers superior bop soloist, a status that was emphasized when he worked with Herman. After the years with Woody, Serge retreated to Boston and then moved to California. He was another narcotics victim but he actually died of cancer on July 16. 1957. His last recordings exhibit a remarkable control of the horn and. emotionally, they are among some of the most moving performances in jazz. Chaloff was undoubtedly one of a kind and now it seems ludicrous that in the public's mind he came second to Gerry Mulligan. a good player but one who lacked the originality of Chaloff.

Trumpeter Red Rodney (who has recently made a comeback) and that fine trombonist Earl Swope were also members of the Herman Orchestra, and Stan Levey would also work with Woody but later. The three pianists heard on these sessions were all early hoppers. George Wallington worked in Dizzy Gillespie's first bop quintet, while Duke Jordan was a member of Charlie Parker's 1947/48 group and later held the piano chair in the Getz Quintet (guitarist Jimmy Raney was also in that group). The brilliant Tiny Kahn (drums) is a vital part of the Al Cohn and Serge Chaloff dates. Kahn's premature death was another appalling loss. Kahn was a close friend of the third pianist. Gene DiNovi, who remains active in music (at last report he was living in Canada). Gene recalls that the drummer on the Brew Moore date was Jimmy Dee but memory plays tricks and the session sheets definitely list Stan Levey which effectively rules out Roy Haynes who has sometimes been named as being on drums. As for bassists Curley Russell and Tommy Potter, they were choices for numerous recordings at this time. Bob Carter and Jimmy Johnson were competent timekeepers.
In compiling this superb reissue Savoy has taken the opportunity to present much music we have not had the pleasure of hearing before. The four Getz titles, written and arranged by Al Cohn, are all alternate takes. There are fascinating comparisons to be made here between the "new" takes and the originals. Similarly, Savoy has included alternates of three performances by Al Cohn. The Brew Moore Quartet is offered to us complete with additional new takes. These extra performances underline the spontaneous nature of Brew's music and his inventiveness.

As for the Eager sides-the first two studio dates under his own name-these have long been out of print and they have never been presented on a single side previously. On both occasions Allen chose the great Max Roach as his drummer. Ed Finckle served as pianist on the 1946 gathering while Duke Jordan was first choice for the quintet selections which benefit from the ebullient presence of yet another Hermanite, Terry Gibbs. second only to Milt Jackson as a pioneer of modern vibes playing.

Side A really belongs to Cohn. On the three tenors date his arrangements are fine frameworks for the soloists and on Stein's Mood. which is Getz all the way, the scoring for the ensemble is perfect and recalls the atmosphere of Early Autumn. On the other three numbers the main voices of the octet are well featured. The discipline of the three minute recording produced some beautiful miniatures, and a soloist had to compress ideas and be succinct. Listen to how much is packed into Stan Getz’s Along with no fewer than six soloists-Getz, Swope, Cohn. Raney, Sims and Jordan. As already stated, these are all alternate takes, and I would not like to say that any of them is inferior to the originals.

The Cohn quartet items do not betray the fact that this was Al's first session under his own name. He plays with surging confidence and firm authority on his own two originals and Let's Get Away From It All, The blues, Groovin' With Gus (named for Gus Grant), and Al's sprightly Infinity serve to highlight what I mentioned before-that Cohn doesn't repeat himself. All three performances benefit from the astute work of George Wallington who, alas, gave up playing piano in the late 1950's. Incidentally the date for this session is definitely July 29, 1950 and not August 12 as listed in most standard discographies. Another date to set straight is that of the


Serge Chaloff All Stars meeting which took place on March 5,1947 (and not June or January of that year as certain sources have erroneously guessed). Here we are treated to two inspections apiece of the tunes-Chaloff's Pumpernickel, Serge's Urge and a Bar A Second as well as Tiny Kahn's Gabardine and Serge. The leader was-in exceptional form, playing with commendable ability and invention. Rodney shows the sort of flair that made Parker hire him while Swope again impresses (although his facility had improved by the time he did the things with Getz on Side A). Wallington puts not a hand wrong and his introductions are attractive and apt. The alternate takes, by the way, come first, followed by the originals in each case. Dig Tiny Kahn's resourceful drumming throughout. The Brew Moore selections are a revelation. First we have three takes of Blue Brew (not a blues, but based on Pres' Blue Lester) which get successively faster. All contain prime Moore. Then there are two takes each of Brew Blew and More Brew, and one of the aptly titled No More Brew-as this was the final cut of the session and, naturally, it is a relaxed blues. Brew is heavily into Pres on all the performances. DiNovi produces an interesting pianistic blend of George Wallington and Lennie Tristano. His comping is unorthodox and adventurous and seems to inspire Brew. We can be certain, now, that the proper recording date for these selections was October 22, 1948 - when the recording ban was still officially on! Date aside, this was some of the finest playing that Brew ever committed to wax.

Finally to the engaging and essential early work of Allen Eager, represented by the first eight sides that he made as a leader. The quartet titles are very rare - only one has appeared on 12" L.P. before. Three of the numbers have been issued under different names: Vot's Dot = Static; Booby Hatch = Pogo Stick; Symphony Sid's Idea = Zadah. On the exuberant numbers with Terry Gibbs, Eager is backed by Charlie Parker's rhythm section, and it is smooth sailing all the way in such propulsive company.

If any musical student in the future should dispute the immense and lasting influence of Lester Young on a generation of young white saxophonists, he will find the answers here. But it was how these men absorbed the Pres message, retained their identities and emerged with something of their own - that is the intriguing story of The Brothers And Other Mothers. Those of us digging now will be aware that herein is contained an indispensable and closely related portion of jazz history which, first and foremost, is to be enjoyed . . . then studied."

- Mark Gardner

"Magna-Tism:" Pete Christlieb and Warne Marsh in "Conversation"

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


“By far the most loyal and literal of the Tristano disciples, Warne Marsh sedulously avoided the 'jazz life', cleaving to an improvisatory philosophy that was almost chilling in its purity. Anthony Braxton called him the 'greatest vertical improviser' in the music, and a typical Marsh solo was discursive and rhythmically subtle, full of coded tonalities and oblique resolutions. He cultivated a glacial tone (somewhat derived from Lester Young) that splintered awkwardly in the higher register and which can be off-putting for listeners conditioned by Bird and Coltrane. Marsh's slightly dry, almost papery tone is instantly recognizable.”
- Richard Cook and Brian Morton, The Penguin Guide to Jazz on CD, 6th Ed.

“Influenced by Sonny Rollins and Zoot Sims, Christlieb plays with power even at the fastest tempos, yet his delivery of ballads invariably shows fine feeling; he is also a convincing interpreter of the blues. His proficiency on a number of reed and woodwind instruments and his strength as a tenor saxophone soloist explains his popularity with the leaders of studio bands.”
- Mark Gardner, Barry Kernfeld, ed., The New Grove Dictionary of Jazz

I’ve always been a great fan of two tenor saxophone front lines backed by a piano/guitar, bass and drums rhythm section.

This fondness dates back to the great “chases” between Dexter Gordon and Wardell Gray, to the duels between Gene Ammons and Sonny Stitt and to the less fractious more melodic versions headed up by Zoot Sims and Al Cohn and by Tubby Hayes and Ronnie Scott.

If you were going out looking for two saxophonists who would play well together it’s a safe bet that you wouldn’t come up with the pairing of Warne Marsh and Pete Christlieb.  Marsh is one of the genuine mavericks of the tenor saxophone. He perfected his art under the influence of Lennie Tristano’s cool, rigorous discipline, but very early on he managed to develop a style of his own that was [and remains to this day] wholly unpredictable.

He will play double time, half-time and apparently out of time in the course of a single phrase; just when he seems to be lagging lethargically behind the beat, you blink your eyes and find him right on top of it.

Pete Christlieb, whose father is a concert classical bassoonist, now at work recording the complete works of Hindemith, is a big toned, technically awesome, straight-ahead swinger. He was a member of The Tonight Show Band for several years, and while those who have been lucky enough to hear him play small group Jazz have come away mightily impressed, it is unlikely that any of them came away thinking about pairing him with Warne Marsh.

Pete and Warne actually came up with the idea of playing together.

They made a recording of tenor duets, backed by bass and drums, that eventually found its way to Walter Becker and Donald Fagen, who are better known as the multi-platinum winning rock group Steely Dan. Again the combination is not the kind of thing that spontaneously comes easily to mind.

Fagen and Becker are adroit masters of traditional Jazz harmonies, and more than that, they are interested in and perhaps obsessed by the iconology of Jazz, They’ve written a song about Charlie Parker [“Parker’s Band”], rearranged Duke Ellington’s “East St. Louis Toodle - Oo” for a rock band and pedal steel guitar and conducted a particularly knowing examination of what can only be termed the impulse of Jazz in their song “Deacon Blues.” That song features a tenor sax solo by Pete Christlieb.

And so, circuitously, but inevitably, we come to Apogee [Warner Brothers BSK 3236; CD version 8122-73723-2],the first Jazz album produced by Fagen and Becker, Christlieb’s first record on a major label, and Marsh’s first record on a major label in years, And, it should be added before we go any further, a spectacular record by anybody’s standards. For it turns out that the two principals make a spectacular team. Their very different styles offer a refreshing contrast, and they play together with impressive savvy, projecting a deceptive but extremely invigorating impression of total abandon. This is winging, exceptionally inventive Jazz of a kind that isn’t even found on obscure collector record labels very much anymore. Despite Fagen’s remark that the album is “basically for tenor freaks,” it’s got enough spirit to appeal to just about anybody.

It’s evident that a lot of care went into the making of Apogee. To begin with, the right rhythm section had to be found. Lou Levy, the pianist turned in an astonishing performance of Warne Marsh’s album All Music [Nessa Records]. His rich, deftly placed, chording frames the tenor solos brilliantly and his own improvisations are fresh and consistently inventive. Bassist Jim Hughart and drummer Nick Ceroli kick things along without getting in the way of the soloists. They are a living embodiment of that “good and forward propelling directionality” as Gunther Schuller once called swing, but not once are they overbearing about it.

The Warner Brothers LP version of Apogee was released in 1978 but tapes with more music from the September 15, 1978 sessions on which bassist Jim Hughart also served as recording engineer eventually found their way to Gerry Teekens who in 1991, released them as two CD’s on his Criss Cross Jazz label: Conversations with Warne: Pete Christlieb Quartet Vol. 1 [Criss 1043] and Conversations with Warne: Pete Christlieb Quartet Vol. 2 [Criss 1103].

The three discs contain 25 tracks of some of the most astonishing two tenor saxophone ever produced in the context of modern Jazz, especially for its harmonic content and approach which is what distinguishes Warne and Pete from previous tenor saxophone duos.

Yet, for all their harmonic density, a lightness of touch and agility shines through each of these performances which serves to demonstrate some rather capricious intelligence at work here.

Very few musicians have the talent and ability to create Jazz on this level: “Magna-tism,” indeed.


Pete Christlieb explains how it all came about in the following insert notes to
Conversations with Warne:

“During the 1970's in Los Angeles, I met Warne Marsh at a rehearsal with Clare Fischer's Big Band. The tenors sat together so we shook hands while Clare counted of Lenny's Pennies. Playing Tristano's line for the first time was like trying to change the fan belt on a car while it's running. We traded choruses and eights, which provided our formal introduction as I remember. Aware of Warne's reputation I was thrilled when he mentioned that one of his students had brought in my first album. I thought he was going to be critical about it, and rightfully so but to my surprise, he said that by analyzing the solos, he was able to teach with it.

After the rehearsal, we talked for awhile and he told me things about my playing I didn't know I was doing.

[Alto sax/flutist] Gary Foster was there when our meeting took place ten years ago, and just the other day he reminded me that I mistakenly addressed Warne a ‘Warno' during that conversation. We all knew a saxophone player by the name of Arno Marsh. Consequently, his great sense of humor kept me from looking even dumber. He asked for some extra copies of my album; and I told him this would be no problem because most of them were still in my garage.

Months later I received an invitation from my friend Jim Hughart to come by and listen to a trio recording session he was producing for Warne. Hearing this group with Jim on bass and Nick Ceroli on drums, I noticed that the absence of piano made Warne sound more abstract and complex white creating a melodically defined harmonic atmosphere.

Warne and Jim were creating enough of the harmonic image to make me realize that they actually didn't need piano. I asked Warne if he had any plans to add piano later and his reply swiftly nailed the question to the wall. 'I like to work this way because it gives me more freedom and avoids any harmonic conflict with an unfamiliar player. Do you realize that every time he puts his hands on the keyboard he's telling you what to do? Lenny was my piano player, and if I can't get him, I would just as soon work alone.' Then jokingly he added, 'Besides we're splitting his bread.'

Limping back to the booth, I began to ponder my first lesson about asking questions and during the next take, my ears told me everything I wanted to know anyway.

Playing together, this trio sounded as if they were controlled by one mind. Utilizing complete control of a seemingly endless source of melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic options, Warne Marsh created, without sounding mechanical, and his music was an inspiration.

After the session, we listened to the tape several times, allowing Warne the opportunity to making a decision. He was very critical of himself and that decision was made after several hours of 'Well, I don't know, play the first one again.'

When they decided to end this incredibly artistic evening, I couldn't hide my feelings toward being left out. I asked Warne if he would consider making an
album with me. His reply to my question was 'Yes!’ We decided to use the same rhythm section and start a month later.

It is important to mention that all of the material for the trio album was improvised over the chord changes from standard tunes and our quartet album was planned the same way. I learned here that having this artistic freedom placed enormous responsibility upon all of us during take-offs and landings. Needless to say, we crashed a few before attaining that synchronization.


With high expectations, we began our first album by recording several tunes in a row without repeating. This helped to avoid boredom and the inevitable case of 'the claw.’

The intensity within our combined efforts drove us to the point of mental and physical exhaustion. As a result, none of us felt that Jazz history had been made that night, however we all agreed to the fact that something good was going to happen. Considering this first session as an opportunity for group familiarization and direction, we decided to quit for the night.

A few days later with fresh ears, Jim and I got together and listened to the tape. We then realized that our efforts had in fact measured up to those high expectations. Warne and I traded thoughts during improvisation throughout the entire session, making me believe that this was no fluke. I can attribute this uncanny rapport to the fact that we had mutual intentions for the creation of music, rather than ‘note-atomic war'.

Considering all of the great players Warne had worked with, it would be presumptuous of me to say that this was a first for him. To me, however, this meant that many of those records in my collection featuring two well known tenor players, now represented the sword fight in a pirate picture. These records did provide many hours of inspiration, and besides, it was a chance to get two great players for the price of one. Having this melodic form of conversation as another creative option, we made it a point to have Jim and Nick lay out periodically during our second session. At one point we began to improvise together in harmony and after hearing this back, we all got goose bumps.

Over the next few months, we were able to develop a telepathic relationship and our communication remained constant even during 180 MPH tempos.

While our working relationship grew stronger over these months so did my curiosity of his unique approach to improvising. One day he played something very melodic and dissonant at the same time while offsetting or displacing the phrase in double time feel. 'How did you do that?' I asked him. He said, 'You don't want to get involved, it will only confuse you.' He did however agree to write out a lesson plan for me to look at later.

The plan called for a phrase to be composed four bars long and memorized. You start the metronome at a reasonable tempo and begin playing your phrase an eighth of a beat later. Now start your phrase on the quarter and so on. Be sure to take plenty of change along with you to call home [when you get lost].

Designed to develop your mental dexterity, this exercise was set aside because it was, in fact, confusing to me at the time, I needed to be fluent and uninhibited.

Another option I learned from him, was to build on a phrase by imitating or inverting the previous one. Connecting them will improve your melodic flow and even more important, make you think.

There were many other things Warne did that became an influence on my playing as a result of our association, I am reminded of that fact every time I get the opportunity to play.

My influence on his playing, I feel, after listening to the tape was a combination of two things. His tone became brighter and my time feel persuaded him to play with more intensity. This subtle influence comes as an enormous compliment and those who knew him can tell you that Warne Marsh was a dedicated innovator.

Warne's early influences were probably the same great players we all listened to for inspiration, but he never let them dictate his thoughts. My tribute to this kind and dedicated man lies in the fact that Warne Marsh was to the Jazz tenor saxophone, truly an original.”

Forever his student,
Pete Christlieb

Ahmad Jamal on Mosaic Records

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.



Kenny Washington: “How did you come up with your concept of less-is-more?”

Ahmad Jamal: “… I think it has to do with philosophy and how I approach the disciplines. There’s a discipline in music. There’s an amount of showiness and showing off in front of musicians, which is always a mistake. So I kind of backed off sometimes and I think it’s part of the discipline that I’ve employed through the years. I still have that. Some people call it space, but I call it discipline.”

“These sides are glistening examples of the polished skill and remarkable interplay that are the hallmarks of the Jamal trio.  Israel Crosby is on-hand to give imaginative and rock-steady support. Vernel Fournier is, as ever, fluid and quick as mercury. Jamal displays all the qualities that have elicited so much vociferous respect from fellow musicians, critics and records buyers ….”
- Jack Tracy/Original liner notes to Jamal at The Pershing, Vol. 2

“The mid fifties was a fertile time for Jazz; fresh, original ensembles were taking shape all over the country. The Modern Jazz Quartet, the Dave Brubeck Quartet, The Jazz Messengers and the Ahmad Jamal Trio immediately come to mind. Among musicians, each group had its imitators and its creative disciples who took its innovations one step further.

But no group in this era was as pervasive as the 1957 incarnation of Jamal’s trio with bassist Israel Crosby and drummer Vernel Fournier. Like the Nat King Cole Trio of the previous decade, its influence penetrated so many different aspects of music.

Jamal is first and foremost a pianist with a natural gift for the instrument. His technique, dynamics and control are something to behold, but the mind that manipulates what comes out of the piano is extraordinary.  Like only the greatest of improvising artists, Jamal is a master architect, realizing with his mind conceives with seeming ease.”
- Michael Cuscuna, Mosaic Records

 

My feelings about the music contained in this nine-CD set [MD9-246] can be summed up with the expression on Ahmad’s face in the following photo:


Click on this link to Mosaic Records for more information about the set’s discography.

Around 1958, when I first heard pianist Ahmad Jamal on many of the trio LP recordings that make-up the Mosaic boxed set, I was immediately reminded of Erroll Garner.

I was vaguely aware that both Ahmad and Erroll were born and raised in Pittsburgh, but I didn’t know that Garner was his “biggest influence” [Jamal speaking to drummer Kenny Washington during a 2003 KBGO radio interview, a transcription of which is included in the insert notes to the Mosaic boxed set].

For those readers who are not familiar with Erroll Garner’s inimitable piano playing, perhaps the following description of it may prove helpful:

Unique is an inadequate word to describe Erroll Garner. He was a musical phenomenon unlike any other. One of the most appealing performers in jazz history, he influenced almost every pianist who played in his era, and even beyond. Self-taught, he could not read music, yet he did things that trained pianists could not play, or even imagine. Garner was a one-man swing band, and indeed often ac­knowledged that his main inspiration was the big bands of the thir­ties—Duke, Basie, Lunceford, et al. He developed a self-sufficient, extremely full style that was characterized by a rock-steady left hand that often sounded like a strumming rhythm guitar. Juxtaposed against this was a river of chordal and single-note ideas, frequently stated in a lagging, behind-the-beat way that generated terrific swing.”
- Dick Katz, Pianists of the 1940’s and 1950’s in Bill Kirchner, ed. The Oxford Companion to Jazz [New York: Oxford, 2000, p. 365]

The point in comparison between Garner and Jamal styles had to do with this part of the above quotation: “rock-steady left hand that often sounded like a strumming rhythm guitar. Juxtaposed against this was a river of chordal and single-note ideas, frequently stated in a lagging, behind-the-beat way that generated terrific swing.”

You can listen Erroll’s distinctive approach in the following YouTube.


But why did this comparison between Ahmad and Erroll come to mind as Jamal does not do what Garner does with his left-hand?

The “…river of chordal and single-noted ideas, et al.” struck a responsive chord [bad pun intended] as both pianists seem to gush forth with improvisatory ideas, but only Garner emphasized the rhythmic pulse of a piece by playing four-beats to the bar with his left-hand.

And then it dawned on me!

Jamal had substituted bassist Israel Crosby and drummer Vernel Fournier in place of Garner’s left-hand thus freeing up both hands so that he could dart in and out of the time and play over the time using astounding runs, arpeggios, quotations from other tunes, counter-melodies and even counter-rhythms.

What sets all of this off is Jamal calculated use of space, something that rarely enters into Garner’s style because Erroll is always playing – there is no space.

As you can hear in the audio track to the above video, Garner can’t wait to finish one improvised phrase before starting another while Jamal, on the other hand, might play an idea, let it linger, leaving a space in which the bassist and the drummer continue to play before coming back into the tune again and exploring how other ideas might work. Jamal now had both hands free to build Garner-like orchestral creations.

Put another way, no Erroll Garner no Ahmad Jamal: Ahmad replaced Erroll’s always driving left hand with the always driving Israel Crosby-Vernel Fournier rhythmic pulse that he darted in and out of or played Erroll like orchestral phrases over.

But this wasn’t just any rhythm section that Ahmad was abandoning responsibility for the time to. With bassist Israel Crosby and drummer Vernel Fournier he had a well-oiled rhythm machine.


Crosby was a master of the walking bass which Gunther Schuller defines as: “In Jazz, a line played pizzicato on a double bass in regular crotchets in 4/4 meter, the notes usually moving stepwise or in intervallic patterns not necessarily restricted to the main pitches of the harmony. The style arose as the use of stride piano patterns declined, …, it has since become lingua franca for Jazz bass players, allowing them to contribute pulse, harmony and countermelody simultaneously.” – The New Grove Dictionary of Jazz [p. 1257].

John Voight describes Crosby as “… one of the earliest virtuoso double bass players, capable of improvising melodic solos, rhythmically exciting accompaniment and scalar walking bass lines.”  – The New Grove Dictionary of Jazz [p. 257].

Although he was one of the busiest drummers in Chicago by the time he joined Ahmad in 1958, Vernel Fournier was born and raised in New Orleans and his drumming never lost some of the syncopated, cadence feeling associated with the famous marching bands of the CrescentCity.

According to Jack Chambers in Milestones: The Music and Times of Miles Davis:

“Despite his exposure in Ahmad’s trio, Fournier never received full credit and remains relatively unknown, but he is a percussionist of extraordinary delicacy. Jack DeJohnette, a much younger Chicago drummer says, ‘One day I heard Ahmad Jamal at the Pershing [a Chicago nightclub], and I heard Vernel Fournier on drums. His brushwork was so incredible – I mean just impeccable.’” [New York: William Morrow, 1960,p.202]
-
Vernel’s drumming has a bounce, a jauntiness and a swagger to it that seems so characteristic of New Orleans in its heyday.

His brush work has a big fat, meaty sound, his stick work is clean and crisp and his time is flawless.

Fournier is from a  period in Jazz drumming when it was almost an inviolable rule that whatever rhythmic figures you played on the snare and bass drum, you had to intersperse them within the cymbal beat.

No matter what else you played as accents, you had to keep the insistent chang-a-dang, chang-a-dang, chang-a-dang going.

This was also true of licks, kicks and fills; you played these in such a way as to return the music as neatly to the cymbal beat as possible.

[When using brushes on the snare drum, the “cymbal beat” was replicated with by crossing the right brush over a swirling pattern being made by the left brush.]

Momentum, swing, metronomic time – whatever you want to call it – were all driven off of a cymbal beat, preferably one that was in lock step with a walking bass line.

No bassist and drummer in the history of Jazz ever locked-in better in a trio format than Israel Crosby and Vernel Fournier.

Vernel also feathers the bass drum, another technique that was very much a part of modern drumming before the advent of the Elvin Jones and Tony Williams freer or looser style.


Feathering involves using the bass drum petal and the beater ball to lightly tap the bass drum, four-beats to the bar.  It is a vestige of the earliest time in the history of Jazz when drummers carried the beat on the bass drum in a more pronounced manner.

Beginning with the bebop era in the 1940s, especially with some of the more frenzied tempos associated with bop, drummers took carrying the beat off the base drum and brought it up to the ride cymbal, using the hi-hat or sock cymbal to heavily accent only the second and fourth beat of each bar.

In effect, this loosened up the sound and the feel of the rhythm so that it fit better within bebop’s melodic and harmonic framework.

It also helped prevent the poor drummer’s foot from falling off while trying to play the bass drum constantly during some of bebop’s wickedly fast tempos.

Some drummers got caught up in the changer-over from traditional Jazz and swing to bop with the result that while they could play the looser feeling time on the cymbal or with brushes, they never got away from playing four-beats-to-the-bar with the bass drum.

Instead, they toned-it-down, hence the advent of feathering.

Given how quietly it is played, the feathered bass drum generally went unnoticed particularly with the loudness of brass and reed instruments in a bop combo.

However, in a piano-bass-drum configuration, the net effect of the feathered bass drum was to give depth to the pulse of the beat, make it more insistent and drive it more.

I always thought that that the combination of Israel Crosby’s superb walking bass and Vernel’s fat sounding brush work gave Ahmad’s trio a driving propulsion and forceful swing that other trios rarely achieved.

But whether it was due to my wonky ears, the manner in which the original LPs were recorded, or my under-performing audio playback system,  I missed actually “hearing” the added ingredient in the Jamal’s trio swing: Fournier’s feathered bass drum.

However, because of the improved sound quality made possible by Mosaic’s digital transfers, the feathered bass drum is no longer hidden and is revealed throughout these recordings.

For example, as the time switches from a “two” feeling to a straight "four," you can hear Vernel’s feathering of the bass drum beginning at 1:55 on Angel Eyes, the Matt Dennis tune from the Mosaic series which is used as the audio track for the following YouTube tribute to the classic Ahmad Jamal Trio of 1957-1962.



Here’s are Kenny Washington’s thoughts about the tune:

“The Matt Dennis song Angel Eyes is one of the great torch songs of all time. Ol' Blue Eyes owned this one. I especially love the last lyric "scuse me while I disappear." A year earlier, Gene Ammons had had a hit with this standard. This tune is usually done as a ballad, but Ahmad takes it at a nice medium tempo. Ahmad reshapes the form of this standard like a sculptor, to fit the needs of the trio playing a chorus and a half of the melody. He uses the intro as an interlude. For the first chorus of his improvisation, he switches to the regular A-A-B-A song form of the tune. He then goes directly to the bridge and last A section with the interlude. This form is repeated again (bridge, last A and interlude). Listen to how he changes his dynamics to a pianis­simo and brings back the bridge melody. The Gershwin classic It Ain't Necessarily So is quoted for a second time at the last A before the intro is again stated for a powerful ending. This is another one of those performances where there's a lot happening. This marvelous arrangement sounds so natural and the trio pulls it off with such ease.”

Listening to the recordings on the Mosaic 9-disc set, it’s hard to understand why a number of critics rejected Ahmad and the trio’s music at the time of their original release. John Hammond put it more strongly when he stated that Ahmad’s music during the period from 1957-1962 was “scorned by the critics but worshipped by musicians and public alike ….”

Even the enormous appeal of his music to the likes of Miles Davis was derisively described by the noted Jazz critic, Gary Giddins, as an “… overbaked … fascination.”

Martin Williams, another Jazz literary luminary, went even further when he stated that:

“Pianist Ahmad Jamal is a success: he has several best-selling LP's, a supper-club following (which otherwise displays little interest in jazz), and several direct imitators. He has also re­ceived the deeper compliment of having admittedly affected the work of an important jazzman. His success should surprise no one, and his effect on Miles Davis should prove (if proof were needed) that good art can be influenced by bad.

Clearly, Davis responds to some of Jamal's interesting and very contemporary harmonic voicings and the very light, and impecca­bly accurate rhythmic pulse of Jamal's trio, particularly in the support he got from his bassist, the late Israel Crosby, and from his drummer, Vernel Fournier. Further, Jamal has the same interest in openness of melody, space, and fleeting silence that Davis does. But for the trumpeter these qualities can be aspects of haunting lyric economy. For Jamal they seem a kind of crowd-titillating stunt work. Indeed, in a recital like "Ahmad Jamal at the Blackhawk," recorded in a San Francisco night club, it appears that Jamal's real instrument is not the piano at all but his audience. On some numbers, he will virtually sit things out for a chorus, with only some carefully worked out rhapsodic harmo­nies by his left hand or coy tinklings by his right. After that, a few bombastic block chords by both hands, delivered forte, will absolutely lay them in the aisles. And unless you have heard Ahmad Jamal blatantly telegraph the climax of a piece, or beg applause en route with an obvious arpeggio run which he drops insinuatingly on the crowd after he has been coasting along on the graceful momentum of Crosby and Fournier, then you have missed a nearly definitive musical bombast. …” Jazz Changes [New York: Oxford, 1992, p. 281].


But while Giddins, Williams and others thought Jamal’s approach to be limited and limiting, drummer Jack DeJohnette observed:

"Ahmad's always been his own man - way ahead of his time in terms of using space and chord voicings, which is one of the reasons Miles liked him so much. Ahmad knew how to get the most out of his instrument, so that a piano trio sounded like a symphony orchestra. He's a great organizer, and his concept is so sophisticated and intelligent, yet so loose and funky." [Jack Chambers, Milestones: The Music and Times of Miles Davis, pp. 202-203]

And Jack Chambers offers these engaging explanations by Ahmad:

To his persistent critics, Jamal replies, "Sometimes people don't identify with pur­ity - that's what my music was then and that's what it is now. I've endured some of the harsh statements, but for every harsh statement there have been 99 compli­mentary ones. What I've done and am still doing is a product of years of blood, sweat and tears, and as long as I am completely secure in the knowledge that what I am doing is valid, then eventually even the most stupid critic has to acknowledge the validity of my work."

Part of the problem critics have with his music, according to Jamal, is that it is understated. "Anybody can play loudly," he says. "It is more difficult to play softly while swinging at that same level of intensity you can get playing fortis­simo. To swing hard while playing quietly is one of the signs of the true artist." Almost completely overlooked by the most negative critics is Jamal's flawless technique. It is a virtue that other musicians, especially piano players, talk about with reverence. Cedar Walton says, "I never heard Ahmad even come close to playing anything without a great deal of technique, taste and timing. When he goes across the piano, he just doesn't ever miss a note - there's never any question. For me, that's still a great thrill, just to hear somebody do that."Milestones: The Music and Times of Miles Davis, p. 203]

Summing up Jamal genius, his influence and the significance of the Mosaic set, Michael Cuscuna offered these observations:

“He certainly exercised a profound influence on pianists and his trio set a new standard for what the piano trio in jazz would aim for and achieve. His knack for finding obscure but viable material which lent itself to a jazz treatment was equal to that of Sonny Rollins and Jimmy Rowles. But when Ahmad put an overlooked tune into circulation, it often stayed in the jazz repertoire forever thereafter. And with songs like "Poinciana" and "Billy Boy," it was Jamal's unique and imaginative re-arrangement of the tune which would become the standard form with which to play the piece.

Much like Miles Davis (who incidentally was greatly influenced by him), his influence is felt in music that attempts to replicate his and in great music that sounds nothing like his. But unlike musicians of similar or even lesser impact, the music of the 1957-62 Ahmad Jamal Trio has been mysteriously and distressingly hard to come by, even in the "reissue everything" era of the Compact Disc.

Literally years in the making, this set introduces 23 previously unreleased gems approved by the artist himself. It was delayed by a fire on the Universal Studios lot in California which took much of the original Jamal trio LP masters with it and our search to reconstruct the music on the set from a variety of analog and digital sources sitting in vaults around the world.

It's been a heck of a long time coming and we hope you enjoy The Complete Ahmad Jamal Trio Argo Sessions.”

Paul and His Pals - Waiting for the Next Trane

$
0
0

© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.

The editorial staff at JazzProfiles received a message from Jocelyn B. informing us of the passing of tenor saxophonist George Allgaier on September 29, 2017 at the age of 57.

We never met George and knew him only through his recorded work with bassist Paul Brusger's Quintet.  Of George, Paul said: "George was a semi-finalist at the Monk competition behind [alto saxophonist] Jon Gordon and [tenor saxophonist Jimmy Greene]. I've known George for a long time and he is a tremendous player with great ears and a full understanding of the history of the saxophone."

As a way of remembering George Allgaier on these pages, we thought we would reprise the two previous essays on Paul and his music, combine them into one posting and add an audio file at the end that offers a sampling of George's wonderful tenor sax playing.

George Allgaier, July 15, 1960 - September 29, 2017: R.I.P.



Musicians are often better known through the company they keep and bassist Paul Brusger keeps very good company.

To drop a few names: trumpet players Valery Ponomarev, John Swana, baritone saxophonist Ronnie Cuber and pianists Dado Moroni, Hod O’Brien and John Hicks.

All of these fairly well-known Jazz performers have appeared at one time or another on Paul’s recordings along with his constant companions: the startlingly brilliant young tenor saxophonist, George Allgaier and the very dependable drummer, John Jenkins. [“Dependable” in the way that every horn players wants a drummer to be – “felt” more than “heard.”]

Paul’s association with these superb musical “pals” helps give the title of this piece one of its meanings.

The other implication which makes the title into a double entendre is that Paul’s major influence as a bassist was the late, great Paul Chambers.

Of course, to the Jazz cognoscenti, Paul’s Pal - the basis for the play-on-words in the title - is a Jazz standard penned by tenor saxophonist Sonny Rollins and is named after … you guessed it … bassist Paul Chambers!

This now completes the circle of allusions inherent in the heading.

When combined, all of these references – working with first-rate musicians, being influenced by one of the great Jazz bassist and the compositions of legendary Jazz players - form the larger context for a visit with the music of Paul Brusger.

Put another way, Paul is the sum of all these parts: he plays well, writes well, and associates himself with exceptional musicians who all get to play on some excellent music that he has composed.

When listening to Paul’s CD’s, its almost impossible to separate these, three unifying threads.

Maybe its because the human mind seems to grasp things better when they appear in sets of three: red, green and blue are the basic color palette; according to Zen Masters the entire universe can be described by, and contained in, a circle, a triangle and a square; with Paul Brusger you get to listen to original Jazz compositions played by superb musicians all of which is held together by strong bass playing.

Of course, I could push this analogy even further by explaining that to date, Paul has issued three CD’s under his own name, but I think it would probably be more appropriate to talk specifically about the music itself at this point.


Scott Yanow opens his insert notes to Paul’s 1997 CD You Oughta Know It [Brownstone BRCD-2-002] by observing:

“Paul Brusger will be a new name to many listeners but it is obvious, listening to his particularly strong debut, that he is not just a fine bassist in the tradition of Paul Chambers, Doug Watkins and Oscar Pettiford but an up-and-coming com­poser too.


Of the ten songs, two are standards, two are his own blues and his six other originals have chord changes that are viable vehicles for solos in the hard bop tradition.

‘I'm amazed how fast it came together,’ says the bassist.’ I gave each of the players the charts one day, we rehearsed for three hours and then we went into the studio the next day. Particularly because so many of the songs are original, I was very impressed by how quickly the musicians made the music their own.’”

To give his listeners a basis in familiarity, Paul does include standards such as Do Nothin’ ‘Till You Hear From Me, Love Letters, and Falling in Love With Love on his disc, but, in the main, what’s on offer here is Brusger Bop – Jazz compositions written in the straight-ahead, hard-bop style often associated with Tadd Dameron, Gig Gryce and Sonny Clark, to name only a few.

Joining Paul, George Allgaier and John Jenkins on You Oughta Know It are trumpeter Valery Ponomarev and pianist Dado Moroni.

Because of Valery’s heavily influenced Clifford Brown style of playing and George Allagier’s deep affinity for Sonny Rollins, the front-line soon adopts a trumpet-tenor sound that is very reminiscent of the original Clifford Brown- Max Roach quintet.

But influences and comparisons aside, this is Paul Brusger’s music.  It is new and it is fun to play on.  Paul knows what he’s doing and in doing it he doesn’t lose sight of the fact that he has to create compositional vehicles that make it possible for other musicians to create inspired solos.

Whether it’s the rhythmically challenging Urban Lullaby or the medium tempo blues homage contained in Paul’s Chamber [which appropriately leads off with a bass solo – how often do you hear that happen these days?], or the up-tempo burner, Swing Street, with its finger-poppin’ notations, Paul’s composition just lay so right that you can hear everybody having a ball playing on them.

And although Paul’s originals have a familiarity to them [Swing Street, for example, is closely related to I’ll Remember April], they are structured in such a way as to make it possible for the musicians to take chances.

What comes through is the joy, happiness and excitement – the infectious energy of Jazz being created at the highest musical level.

I can imagine the looks of satisfaction that the musicians exchanged with one another after safely navigating through the complexities of Swing Street’s theme, each having had a few “seafaring adventures” along the way in the form of the solos they created based on the tune’s changes.


More of the same can be found on Paul’s 2006 release Go To Plan B [Consolidated Artists Productions CAP 998]. This time, Paul, George and John are in the company of Ronnie Cuber on baritone saxophone and John Hicks on piano.

In bringing the musicians on this album together, Paul noted:

“I love the baritone sax and I thought it would be a nice blend with tenor, a dark and rich ensemble sound particularly since Cuber has a hard sound while George's tone is softer. I have a very good rapport with John Jenkins and George Allgaier, both of whom I knew from Florida. We have a good kinship and camaraderie; they really have a feel for my music."

And Scott Yanow commented:

“Paul Brusger's latest set is a delight for hard bop and modern mainstream jazz fans. On Go To Plan B, he contributed six of the selections, with one original apiece from Cuber and Hicks plus the standard "Love Letters." The musicians were challenged by the new material yet sound quite comfortable, swinging hard and with constant creativity.”

Ronnie Cuber has been the subject of a previous profile on the blog which you can find by going here.

On Paul’s recording he absolutely soars.  In musician parlance, he plays his backside off. I’ve always been impressed with Ronnie’s ability to get around the baritone saxophone, but on this CD he does so with a fleetness and a ready invention of ideas that is breathtaking at times.

On this outing, Paul puts together an unusual and varied program of originals including a chart that is based on the changes of Coltrane’s Giant Steps [Paul’s Don’t Stop Now] as well as one based on these same changes although this time played backwards – Is What It Is. Talk about challenges!

There’s also a beautiful waltz [Waltz for Lady Nancy], a flag-waver based on the changes to Night and Day [Paul’s Listen Today for Tomorrow’s Answer] and an original from pianist John Hicks [Peaceful Moments] and Ronnie Cuber’s [Ponta Grossa].

Special mention needs to be made of tenor saxophonist George Allgaier who comes at the instrument in a way that features ever-changing approaches and styles. And talk about taking chances! George is all over the horn with beautiful and sometimes scarily put together solos.  No wonder Paul records with him whenever possible. George’s improvisational journeys really serve to keep the music alive.

Hicks comps beautifully and does what he does best – creates musical solos that fall so softly on the ears.

With Paul and John Jenkins rock solid on the time, the album is a pleasure to listen to from beginning to end.


Paul’s continues this old and new friends format on his next CD – Definitely released on Philology [W733.2] in 2008.

Along with tenor saxophonist George Allgaier and drummer John Jenkins, Paul brought along veteran pianist Hod O’Brien and Philadelphia-based trumpeter John Swana to the date.

Philology’s owner, Paolo Piangiarelli offered these reflections on the music and the musicians in his insert notes:

“This beautiful cd is the tangible, even touching evidence, proving that the new generation of US young jazzmen respects and loves the great tradition of modern jazz developed in the legendary forties by their ingenious precursors: Bird, Diz, Bud, Monk... Respect, love, but also a conscious practice getting deep into a music that was - and stays - complex, well-constructed, tough, delicate and powerful, to be handled and checked with the fundamental creativity and technical skills that these guys have.

So here's a quintet of modern beboppers whose overwhelming sensibility and ability allow them to launch into important solos, of the kind that remains impressed in your memory. The band is directed by wonderful bassist Paul Brusger, who draws new melodic lines of charming, intriguing beauty, in which reminiscences of a great past - never to be denied - add new colours and strengthen the impact with the listeners. The musicians' skills can consequently stand out: John Swana's agile and expressive trumpet, George Allgaier's luxuriant and imaginative sound of tenor sax, the piano lesson offered by the mythical Hod O'Brien and the rhythmic subtlety owned by the agile and propelling drummer John Jenkins, the group's engine. …

Paolo Piangiarelli
Philology"

Once again the listener is treated to a varied program of Paul’s originals all written more or less in the style of hard bop championed by groups such as Art Blakey and the Jazz Messengers.

But here again, although the manner of writing has much in common with the modern Jazz of the decades of the 1950s and 1960s, Paul makes the tunes sound fresh through small adjustments to the harmonies, being careful to play them in the right tempos and by creating melodic platforms for today’s young players like John Swana and George Allgaier to express their newer approaches to improvising.

There’s a lot of new music here. With the exception of a repeat of Waltz for Lady Nancy, Paul contributes nine, previously unrecorded tunes to the date; not an easy thing to do while still keeping the music interesting and distinct.

Some guys have a gift for composition and Paul Brusger is one of those guys.

One hears so often these days about Jazz not being what is used to be and that today’s players don’t have anything appealing to offer.

The music on these CDs by Paul Brusger and his pals provide over three hours of Jazz composed and played at the highest levels of professionalism and artistic expression, all of which serve as a living contradiction to such a nonsensical assertion.

If these recordings are any indication, Jazz is in good hands.

It must be nice to have friends, er… pals like Paul’s!

The following video contains a sample track from one of Paul’s CDs.



© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.

Today - October 8, 2014 - is the release date of bassist, composer and arranger Paul Brusger's latest CD on Nils Winther's venerable Steeplechase label.

Entitled Waiting for the Next Trane [SCCD 33115] it features Gary Smulyan on baritone sax, Mike LeDonne on piano and Louis Hayes on drums along with more of Paul's inventive, hard-bop inflected, original compositions. If you like the music of Horace Silver, Sonny Clark and Hank Mobley, then you will feel right at home with Paul's writing.

Paul kindly asked me to put together some insert notes for the CD and I thought you might enjoy reading them, too.


"Musicians are often better known through the company they keep and bassist Paul Brusger keeps very good company.

To drop a few names - trumpet players Valery Ponomarev, John Swana, baritone saxophonist Ronnie Cuber and pianists Dado Moroni, Hod O’Brien and John Hicks - all have played on Paul’s previous recordings.

Paul’s major influence as a bassist was the late, great Paul Chambers and one can also hear echoes of “Mr. P.C.” and that of bassists Oscar Pettiford, Wilbur Ware and Doug Watkins in the way he lays down his bass lines and in the notes he chooses to frame the chords.

Paul is also a gifted composer who writes in a style that could be called “Brusger’s Bop” as his Jazz compositions are written in the straight-ahead, hard-bop style often associated with Tadd Dameron, Horace Silver, Gigi Gryce and Sonny Clark.

When combined, all of these ingredients – working with first-rate musicians, being influenced by one of the great Jazz bassist and a writing style that is closely patterned after the style of legendary Jazz composers - form a larger context for a visit with the music of Paul Brusger.

Paul is the sum of all these parts: he plays well, associates himself with exceptional musicians who all get to play the intriguing and interesting music that he has composed.

These unifying threads all come together once more on Waiting for The Next Trane.

On his first outing for the legendary Steeplechase label, Paul continues to put himself in good musical company, this time with the musical talents of baritone saxophonist Gary Smulyan, pianist Mike LeDonne and drummer Louis Hayes.

Gary plays the baritone saxophone with verve, vigor and vitality. He is a risk-taker. Gary expresses what he hears in his head and feels in his heart, not always an easy thing to do when you have to take a deep breath and blow it through the equivalent of a compressed central plumbing system to make music.

But that's the nature of Jazz: overcoming the technical problems of playing an instrument while at the same time creating interesting melodies on the spot.

You can't take anything back that you've just put out there. There's is no safety net.

The Act of Creation is rarely seen for what it really is - An Act of Courage.

And no one on today's Jazz scene has more sang-froid than Gary Smulyan.

Gary’s sound on baritone sax is very reminiscent of that of the late, Pepper Adams. But while Pepper is certainly a point of departure for him, Smulyan has moved well-beyond Adams’ influence and has established his own style on the instrument, one that also displays a considerable and very advanced technique.

If truth be told, as much as I enjoy Gary Smulyan’s playing, I have to “take it in small doses” as he puts so many ideas into his improvisations and swings so hard all the time that he [figuratively] wears me out.  The marvel is that he doesn't wear himself out!

Quite the contrary, it seems, as each in-person performance or recording is better than the previous one. Gary’s work continually grows in stature and complexity; signs of a mature artist at work.

There appears to be no limits to his artistic creativeness; he’s a veritable musical fountain from which well-constructed phrases and lines come bubbling forth to form chorus-upon-chorus of interesting solos.

All this imaginative energy no doubt stems from his passion for playing Jazz, a zeal that apparently knows no bounds.

Like Paul Brusger, pianist Mike LeDonne is an extremely skillful composer, whose services have been in such great demand that he has appeared on over 50 recordings as a leader or as a sideman during the past 25 years.

It’s nice to hear him back at the piano as many of his recent recordings have featured Mike’s exceptional abilities as a Hammond B-3 organist.

Over the years, Mike has studied with fabled Jazz pianists Jaki Byard and Barry Harris while checking out major piano stylists like Teddy Wilson, Al Haig, Tommy Flanagan, Hank Jones, Ray Bryant and Cedar Walton in some of the smaller, more intimate clubs when he first arrived on the New York Jazz scene.

In the introduction to a 2009 interview with Mike for Jazz.com, Thomas Pena wrote:

“What a career it’s been for Mike. Speaking to him is like taking a crash course in the history of Jazz. It seems that he has performed, recorded, and/or rubbed elbows with everyone in the world of jazz at one time or another.”

The list of Jazz luminaries with whom Mike has worked includes Benny Golson, Milt Jackson, and Scott Robinson and, more recently: Eric Alexander, Wycliffe Gordon, Jim Snidero and five recordings under Gary Smulyan’s leadership.

Mike also commented in the 2009 Jazz.com interview: “I feel good. I still want to improve, and I wanted to get to another level. There are always guys that you listen to, guys like McCoy Tyner and say, ‘Wow! I would like to be able to play like that…..’”

Judging by his work on this CD, it sounds like all of Mike’s wishes about improving and getting to another level have been granted, including the one about McCoy Tyner because in some of his soloing, McCoy’s influence is very apparent.

And what more can be said about Louis Hayes - Paul’s choice for the drum chair on this date? I’ve lost count of the number of memorable groups Louis has worked with and recordings that he has appeared on over the last half century including his long associations with Cannonball Adderley, Horace Silver and Oscar Peterson.

His profile on drummerworld.com contains the following description of his gifts:

“For more than fifty years, Hayes has been a catalyst for energetic unrelenting swing in self-led bands, as well as, in those whose respective leaders reads like an encyclopedia of straight-ahead, post-bop modern Jazz. ….

With so much activity in his past, Louis could easily rest comfortably on his laurels. But being a forward thinker and doer, Hayes operates in the present with his current group boasting some of the cream of the recent crop of Jazz artists. Louis Hayes possess and embarrassment of riches. His story, still being told, contains a glorious past, a vibrant present and an ever promising future.”

Bassist, Chuck Israels once described the relationship he wanted to achieve when working with a drummer this way:

"When I listen to the drummer and the bass player together, I like to hear wedding bells. You play every beat in complete rhythmic unity with the drummer, thousands upon thousands of notes together, night after night after night. If it’s working, it brings you very close. It’s a kind of emotional empathy that you develop very quickly. The relationship is very intimate.”

Paul and Louis develop such a marriage between bassist and drummer on this outing and it represents another testimony to Louis adaptability and flexibility as a masterful musician.

Whatever the setting, Louis just makes it happen.


The music on this recording is made up of eight originals by Paul and a beautiful rendition of Quincy Jones’ Quintessence. Listeners often wonder what the source of inspiration is for original compositions, but rarely get the chance to ask the composer where the music comes from. With this in mind, I asked Paul if he would make some comments about each of his tunes.

In a Minor Funk “is simply my take on the kind of groove Art Blakey and the Jazz Messengers would come up with.

It’s In There Somewhere“is a play on words on Out of Nowhere. My song uses the same changes and I wrote it in the style of Tadd Dameron and Gigi Gryce, two of my favorites composers.”

When Will You Ever Learn “is aimed at me because sometimes I tend to be too stubborn and looks for a perfection that gets in the way of the music. Like Gary Smulyan is fond of saying: “Jazz has warts.’”

Waiting For The Next Trane “is my tribute to John Coltrane. “Will there be such an influence as great as his ever again?”

Andrea’s Delight“was written for my youngest daughter. It has a pretty melody with a demanding harmonic sequence that descends in a seemingly never-ending spiral of minor thirds.”

“I choose Quincy Jones’ Quintessence for the date because it has a main ingredient that all good music must have - it’s got soul.”

Bird’s In The Yard “is my tribute to Charlie Parker, the first and foremost influence in all of modern Jazz.”

Bringing Home The Silver “is written as a samba because I wanted it to be an ideal showcase for the great Louis Hayes who held down the drum chair in Horace Silver’s quintet for many years.”

All But One “is the very first composition that I ever wrote. It is spiritual in nature and is meant to convey that we all come from different cultures, ethnicities and backgrounds, yet we are all part of this human experience called Life.”

In characterizing Paul’s music for Definitely, a compact disc that he released on his Philology label [W733.2] in 2008, Paolo Piangiarelli said:

“This beautiful CD provides tangible, even touching evidence which proves that
the new generation of US young jazzmen respects and loves the great tradition of modern jazz developed in the legendary forties by their ingenious precursors: Bird, Diz, Bud, Monk... Respect, love, but also a conscious practice of getting deep into a music that was - and stays - complex, well-constructed, tough, delicate and powerful, to be handled and checked with the fundamental creativity and technical skills that these guys have.

The band is directed by wonderful bassist Paul Brusger, who draws new melodic lines of charming, intriguing beauty, in which reminiscences of a great past - never to be denied - add new colours and strengthen the impact with the listeners. The musicians' skills can consequently stand out….”

Although the manner of writing has much in common with the modern Jazz of the decades of the 1950s and 1960s, Paul makes the tunes sound fresh through small adjustments to the harmonies, being careful to play them in the right tempos and by creating melodic platforms for Gary and Mike to express their own approach to improvising.

Some guys have a gift for composition and Paul Brusger is one of those guys.

One hears so often these days about Jazz not being what is used to be and that today’s players don’t have anything appealing to offer.

The music on Waiting for The Next Trane is Jazz composed and played at the highest levels of professionalism and artistic expression by Gary, Mike, Paul and Louis.

If this recording is any indication, Jazz is in good hands as it goes forward into the 21st century."

-Steve Cerra
www.jazzprofiles.blogspot.com/






Charlie Parker - A Remembrance by Orrin Keepnews

$
0
0
© -Steven Cerra, copyright protected; all rights reserved.


"He was an artist who paid a great price to be able to get out of himself some of the things that most disturbed him. He might have cheated a little, he might have stolen from some, he might have hurt many. But he cheated, stole and hurt himself more than anybody. And he did give us something far more wonderful than he took from us."”
- Frank Sandiford, a writer, on Charlie Parker


No one did more to help the cause of Jazz in the second half of the 20th Century than Orrin Keepnews.


And not only in the ways usually associated with him as a record producer for many Jazz labels that he either founded or was in some way affiliated with including Riverside, Jazzland, Milestone, Landmark, and the Fantasy - Concord Group.


Although not as well known, his writings about Jazz were numerous and well-informed.


Some of these were collected as a compilation and published by Oxford University Press as The View From Within: Jazz Writings 1948-1987.


Included among the essays in this work is Orrin’s first-rate treatment of the life and times of Charlie Parker which was first published in 1956, a year after Bird’s.


Since then, there have been a number of book length treatments on the life and times of Bird including: Ross Russell, Bird Lives! The High Life and Hard Times of Charlie (Yardbird) Parker, Chuck Haddix, Bird: The Life and Music of Charlie Parker, Robert Reiser, Bird: The Legend of Charlie Parker, Carl Woideck, Charlie Parker: His Music and His Life, Gary Giddins, Celebrating Bird: The Triumph of Charlie Parker, and Stanley Crouch, Kansas City Lightning: The Rise and Times of Charlie Parker, Brian Priestley, Chasin' the Bird: The Life and Legacy of Charlie Parker and Ken Vail, Bird's Diary: The Life and Legacy of Charlie Parker. Also of interest might be Chan Parker's autobiography My Life in E-Flat.


All of these biographies have something to commend them, not the least of which is that they were all written many years after Bird’s death which allowed for a broader perspective in which to assess his significance.


As the author Mark Bowden [Blackhawk Down and Hue 1968] has stated: “For a journalist interested in history, the sweet spot is about fifty years. Enough time has gone by for a measure of historical perspective, and yet there remains many living witnesses.”


The remarkable thing about Orrin Keepnews’ recounting and evaluation of the life of Charlie Parker is that despite its immediacy it stands up well in comparison to the latter works on Bird’s life.


See what you think.


Charlie Parker
1956


“Charlie Parker died quietly, shortly before nine o'clock on the evening of March 12, 1955, having been seriously ill for only three days. The doctor attending him had seen him no more than a half hour earlier and had expressed the opinion that he was much improved; and Parker was propped up in an armchair watching television when death came. He was not yet thirty-five years old, but considering that he had led a physically punishing life and had a poor medical history, it was not notably surprising that he should die so young. Described this way, then, it was the sort of death whose circumstances must have been duplicated countless times.


But it must also be noted that this man was very probably the most significant jazz figure of his time, that he died in the New York apartment of a wealthy and titled woman, that his body lay unclaimed in the morgue for two days, that the precise cause of death is still open to argument. With such additions, the passing of the man known as "Bird" (a nickname of at least three supposed derivations and no vital significance, but consistently used), can be seen as mysterious or even sinister, as part of a contradictory, colorful, seething legend about a foredoomed folk-hero.


Actually, there are rather unsensational explanations for most of the elements of "mystery" associated with Parker's death, but the really important point may be that most people have automatically elected to accept at face value the assumption—and this is true with anecdotes about his life as well as his death — that the weirder stories were the truer ones.


There is no question that Bird is going to be one of the larger-scale jazz legends; he was well on his way to that status long before he died. It cannot be denied that Parker himself, by his attitudes and by many of his quite verifiably non-standard activities, did much to help create and build the legend. But it is equally undeniable that a great many people (including many who knew him closely, in addition to those who merely knew of him as a public figure) seem to have shown a positive desire to turn him into legend as quickly as possible. In part, this tendency can be seen as no more than the very familiar urge to romanticize the "artist." Bird is just one, and certainly not the last, of a very long line of writers, painters, musicians, and what-have-you to be quickly converted into myth.


But it may also be that it is more comfortable to accept Parker as fiction, rather than as reality. It is not without importance that at this writing there are at least four people or sets of people reported at work on books about Bird and that, of the four, the only one that has been completed is a novel! (Its author is Ross Russell, who in the 1940s operated the independent jazz label, Dial, for which several of Parker's first important recordings were made. Russell, on the other hand, is today reluctant to reinvolve himself emotionally with the facts by discussing such rather strained circumstances as Bird's committal to Camarillo State Hospital in 1946, immediately following a Dial recording session in Los Angeles. For the record, the other three Parker works currently in progress are by his last wife, Chan, with a collaborator; by a musician-turned-writer friend who also helped handle Bird's business affairs in his last years; and, jointly with a professional writer, by a New York librarian who has doubled as a jazz night-club operator and promoted a number of public "jam sessions" that were among Parker's last appearances.)


The diversity of approaches to the man's life that can be assumed as forthcoming from such a list of potential authors is a fair clue to the diversity of opinion, fact, and pseudo-fact that currently exists about Bird. There is, by now, little argument about his position in jazz history: he was a (very possibly the) major force in the creation of current modern-jazz forms; his approach, his tone, insofar as possible his musical ideas have been followed, adopted, understood, imitated, aped, unintentionally parodied and misunderstood by performers on all manner of jazz instruments in a way that far transcends any cliche about "the sincerest form of flattery." Musically, there is near unanimity. But concerning the man, it is something else again.


The major problem faced by any researcher into Parker lore is a problem of overabundance. It is almost literally true that everyone involved with modern jazz in the '40s and thereafter feels, whether justifiably or not, that he really "knew" Bird and is entitled to make definitive, strongly felt statements. Asked for suggestions as to helpful subjects for interview, one musician, who actually did know Parker well, came up with a list of twenty-two names almost without pausing for breath, and then apologized that with a little thought he could make the list much longer.


And, no matter how many or how few sources are actually turned to, there is such a welter of conflicting report and reaction that it hardly seems possible that everyone is discussing the same man. Of course, to a great extent there is truth in that contradiction: few men are fully consistent; the sensitive creative artist is apt to be far less so than most and far more inclined to be reshaped over and over again by subjective pulls; and Parker, addicted to narcotics for a substantial portion of his life, could easily be considered to have been several men.


Do you accept French jazz critic Charles Delaunay's impression of him as a sort of Rousseauian Noble Savage: "a big, dreaming child; a natural inspired force . . . good-natured, shy and quite boyish, (with) curiously juvenile thoughts?" Or do you turn to other writers who have been impressed with the "searching clarity" of his comments on music and have quoted him as discussing with considerable insight why Bartok had become his favorite composer or the possible similarities of aim between his own work and Hindemith's? How much attention do you pay to friends' reports on how intelligently he could discuss philosophy or science? What valuation do you place on Chan Parker's conclusions that "he was very mature and wise about the world and life; just immature about himself," and that "Bird was a very gentle man, although he hid it much of the time"?


There are stories of his having been crudely cruel and openly contemptuous towards musicians he considered not up to his standards; but there are other stories to balance against those. Pianist Randy Weston recalls a night in the late 1940s — he was not yet even a professional and Bird had heard him play only once — when he was literally snatched up from the bar at one New York club, hustled over to another on Fifty-second Street ("where, of course, they treated Bird like a god when he walked in") and installed on the bandstand with Parker for almost an hour of playing with the band — "the most wonderful thing that could have happened to me."


And Bird's close friend, alto player and arranger Gigi Gryce, insists that his awareness of music was so strong that he could "hear right through to something good" in the most unlikely places. "We might be walking along and pass someplace with a really terrible rock and roll band, for instance, and he'd stop and say 'Listen to what that bass player's doing,' when I could hardly even hear the bass. And then he might go inside and play with that band and try to teach them things."


There are stories that can't be ignored of his borrowing money and even instruments and never returning them ("You had to pay your dues with Bird"), but Gryce, who says simply, "I lent him my horn plenty of times and always got it back," can tell of Parker's visiting him in Boston with a little money in his pocket, finding a bar in the "really poor" part of town and spending all he had on whipping up an impromptu party for the patrons there. "Of course, then he'd have to find someone to lend him the money to get back home. . . ."


Doris Parker, who met him in 1945 (when his impact both on musicians and on the jazz-listening public was at its first high point) and thus was with him both during that "up" period and the extreme "down" period that followed it rather closely, expresses deep, hurt surprise at a number of prevalent attitudes and stories. She is an admittedly prejudiced source ("To me he was Charlie, not 'Bird,' not the fantastic character . . . but the guy I loved . . . gentle, soft-spoken, withdrawn") but presumably not interested in whitewashing his memory ("Really, he did so many things that were bad, they don't need to manufacture any"). Commenting on an article in one of the shock-value men's magazines, a piece that claimed in reasonably lurid, if non-specific, anonymous-quote detail that Parker "may have had the most advanced case of satyriasis ever known," Doris has remarked: "This I find very hard to believe. For long periods of time I'd be with him twenty-four hours a day. ... At no time did I know Charlie to be vulgar about sex . . . and I can't believe he could ever change so completely." She similarly discounts stories about his inventing "new" ways of drug-taking: "Let's not let anyone kid about that. He didn't invent addiction — everything he did has been done many times before, even the destruction."


If the stories fail to balance, there is at least little difficulty in setting forth the basic facts of Parker's life (although there is some clouding at both ends). He was born in Kansas City, Kansas, and brought up in the larger city of the same name across the river in Missouri. The usually accepted birthdate is August 29,1920. There has been some claim that he must have been born earlier (trumpeter Harold Baker has been quoted as saying he recalls Bird playing with a Kansas City band in about 1931), but Doris reports that his mother verified the 1920 date. His mother bought him an alto saxophone when he was about eleven. He subsequently told interviewers that he had become interested in this instrument by hearing Rudy Vallee on the radio, but it's questionable that this should be taken seriously, particularly since it later seemed important to him to stress that he was not influenced by any of the noted horn players of his youth, Lester Young in particular. Parker has also spoken of taking up the baritone horn in high school because "it was loud and boisterous and dominated the band so much the judges could scarcely ignore it" in awarding prizes, another comment that can be taken as indicating more about Bird's later cynicism than about early motivations.


At about age fifteen he left school and decided to take up music professionally. As much as has ever been stated about his reasons was set forth in a 1949 Down Beat interview, in which he noted the necessity of earning a living and that music "seemed easy, looked glamorous, and there was nothing else around." But it doesn't call for much guesswork to add to this another reason, one that can be equated with his mother's motives in so readily buying a saxophone for an eleven-year-old presumable Rudy Vallee fan. This was Missouri; as in the Deep South, then and earlier, a great many Negro parents were more than willing to encourage any musical leanings in their children: however dubious its moral reputation, at least the entertainment business was one of the very few open avenues leading to other than menial jobs.


But if music "seemed easy" to young Parker, that decidedly was a wrong impression. It is clear that he was not much of a musician at the start. Bassist Gene Ramey, who came to know Parker very well in later years, has written that when he first met Bird, "he was barely fourteen years old (and) wasn't doing anything, musically speaking." Ramey wrote of one early humiliation when Parker began to play during a jam session with members of Count Basie's band. "Jo Jones, ... as an expression of his feeling, took his cymbal off and threw it almost the complete distance of the room. . . . Bird just packed up his horn and walked out." Parker himself has told of a similar incident at the High Hat club when "I tried doing double tempo on "Body and Soul." Everybody fell out laughing. I went home and cried and didn't play again for three months."


Parker's main reaction to all this, according to Ramey and others, was a "just you wait and see" kind of determination. Bird has noted that he had first seriously learned to read music at about this time, and Ramey has written of the "unbelievable" transformation that came about during his sixteenth summer, which was spent at a summer resort with George E. Lee's band, where a guitarist named Efferge Ware ("a great chord specialist, although he did no solo work") educated him on "the cycles — the relationship of the chords and how to weave melodies into them. . . . After which, of course. Bird expanded on his own. , . . After this sudden development in his style. Bird began to get lots of work."


There is a theory that Parker was a "natural genius." Gigi Gryce, for example, believes that he just "happened" to take up music, and would have made an important mark in any field. ("If he had become a plumber, I believe he would have been a great one.") In support of this, there is his late enthusiasm for painting. (I have seen an impressive sketch of his friend Baroness Nica Koenigswarter and have been reliably informed of highly interesting, more ambitious work.) The accounts of his rough start in music might seem to weaken this natural-genius theory, but under the circumstances perhaps the wonder is not that Parker did not play better, but that he played at all well.


He lacked any sort of formative jazz background: he had heard little if anything of the music of early jazz greats; it seems clear that the swing of the mid-'30s meant little to him musically; and his immediate reaction to the heavily vibrato-filled style of just about all jazz saxophonists of the time was simply, "I didn't like it." In addition, he had been introduced to narcotics almost as soon as to music. The accounts vary, but whether it was "an actor friend (who) told me about a new kick," or older musicians, or "a stranger in a washroom," the fact is that, by 1935, he was firmly addicted. Bird's own statement to writer Leonard Feather was that "It all came from being introduced to nightlife too early. When you're not mature enough to know what's happening — well — you goof."


Perhaps that doesn't really say it all, but there seems no need to get overly devious about a sensitive fifteen-year-old, working as a musician in the heart of Kansas City (then in its Pendergast heyday and probably the most wide-open town of all), trying to be as hard a guy as the next and accepting heroin as part of the "glamor" of it all. Very little is known about Bird's childhood. (Doris Parker, denying that he was particularly "close mouthed" about his youth, makes the point that "he didn't have much youth to talk about. What can you say about being 'hooked’ at fifteen? That rather limits the conversation.") It does seem reasonable to take the known teenage circumstances and add to them whatever you care to accept of the sexual-appetite stories and also his later strongly demonstrative affection for children — his own or those of friends — and conclude that he was looking for a warmth and acceptance he had been unable to find in childhood. Chan Parker has been quoted as saying, "He had been hurt early and he had been hurt bad. He was cynical sometimes as a result, but he was also sentimental. When he came home, whether he had much money or barely any, he'd bring presents for the kids."


As for the practical problems of addiction, Parker later commented forcefully that "any musician who says he is playing better either on tea, the needle, or when he is juiced, is a plain straight liar." For a Bird who was just learning his trade, this must have been true many times over.


Nevertheless, he was developing as a musician, accepted by that time at the plentiful jam sessions, and working briefly with Jay McShann's band, a top local group. Then came a now-cloudy unpleasantness involving his refusal to pay a cab fare. Apparently his mother refused to help him out, and he spent twenty-two days in jail, after which he abruptly left town — leaving his horn behind. One story places him briefly in Chicago in 1938, where (as singer Billy Eckstine has told it) he walked into the Club 65 during a "breakfast dance" and sat in, using a borrowed horn and looking "like he just got off a freight car, . . . but playing like you never heard." A short time later he was in New York, still without an instrument. For three months he was a nine-dollars-a-week-and-meals dishwasher at a Harlem after-hours spot; then he just "bummed around awhile." He had been in town eight months when some by-now-anonymous musicians bought him a horn (presumably after hearing what he could do on a borrowed alto at some session); shortly thereafter he was hired at Clark Monroe's Uptown House, soon to become known as one of the key breeding grounds for the new jazz.


This was in 1939, which seems to have been the year in which things really began to jell. On one subsequent occasion (during a Down Beat interview ten years later) he was inclined — or induced —  to pin it down to a specific month (December 1939) and place (the back room of a Harlem chili house, where he was jamming with a guitarist named Biddy Fleet). Bored with "the stereotyped changes being used then," Parker is quoted as thinking "there's bound to be something else. ... I could hear it sometimes, but I couldn't play it." Then, while playing "Cherokee,""Charlie suddenly found that by using higher intervals of a chord [the difference between two pitches] as a melody line and backing them with appropriately related changes, he could play this thing he had been 'hearing' . . . and bop was born."


This somewhat technical version is a good deal more apocalyptic and less plausible than the way Bird told it on other occasions, when it was merely that he used to "hang around with Fleet at ... spots uptown" and "we'd play around with flatted fifths" and the like. But both ways of putting it have their merits. The assumption that Parker's new approach came about gradually jibes with accounts that trace at least some elements of his eventual style back to his Kansas City days. Both Jo Jones and Ben Webster have mentioned an alto player named Buster Smith, who played with Bennie Moten and then with Count Basie's earliest band, as being (in Webster's words) "the only man I ever heard to whom you could attribute anything Bird ever did." Jones has flatly called Smith "Charlie Parker's musical father."


Doris Parker recalls Bird telling her of "a tenor (?) player who influenced him greatly" at the start, and some of Bird's friends have cited mention of "a guy who played alto in an old band." Unquestionably, Parker's "modernism" did not suddenly spring into full-blown life one fine day; but on the other hand, the Down Beat sudden-flash account does have the virtue of dramatically indicating that, by the end of 1939, Parker had found himself. For by early 1940 he had returned to Kansas City and rejoined Jay McShann; and his sound on his first records with McShann, as well as stories of how he was a leading force in the band, make it clear that he had come a long way since he ran home and cried in 1935.


It does seem strange that Bird found himself during a period of rootless wandering and odd jobs, not even owning a horn most of the time, but it is simply a fact that must be accepted. It must also be kept in mind that he was certainly on narcotics at this time, that this was part of a period in which, as he once put it, he was "always on a panic." Pain, poverty and loneliness were among the ingredients —  whether because of them, in spite of them, or both, Charlie Parker was about to become a focal point of the new jazz forms that were just beginning to take shape.


For many reasons, among them various personal jealousies and some musicians' tendency to supply interviewers with answers they think are the ones wanted, regardless of accuracy, the precise beginning of the music first known as "be-bop" will most probably always be shrouded in confusion, contradiction, and double-talk. It was not necessarily recognized by the participants as a glamorous period of creativity: as Thelonious Monk puts it, "Nobody was sitting there trying to make up something new on purpose. The job at Minton's was a job we were playing, that's all."


But at Minton's Playhouse, the number-one proving ground for bop, the job was at least one where men could play as they pleased, with a sympathetic club manager (ex-bandleader Teddy Hill) and a growing crowd of interested musicians eager to listen or to sit in. There, and at Monroe's and at other side-street Harlem spots, Monk could play as he had always wanted to; drummer Kenny Clarke, another member of the Minton's band, could work on the ideas that had been frowned on when he was with Hill's band; Dizzy Gillespie and guitarist Charlie Christian and so many others could come by. (Monk does not recall Parker having been there at the very start, nor that there was any single memorable moment when he first appeared; but he does say that Bird's ability and authority were immediately accepted as exciting and important additions.)


Their various new concepts were similar enough to merge — or perhaps it was something like the classic stories of inventors separately, but almost simultaneously, achieving identical results. Clarke has been quoted on this subject of mutuality, noting that he, Monk, and Gillespie would often end up at Monroe's after Minton's closed for the night: Bird had left the limited confines of McShann's rather routine Kansas City riff-and-blues outfit and returned to New York, and "we went to listen to Bird," although at first it was "for no other reason than that he sounded like Pres." ("Pres"— Lester Young — was perhaps the only no-vibrato sax man before Parker, and Bird had spoken of admiring his "clean and beautiful" sound, although disclaiming any influence from Young's jazz ideas, which "ran on differently" than his own.) But they found, Clarke added, that Bird also had something new to offer: "Things we'd never heard before—rhythmically and harmonically," and it aroused the interest of Dizzy and Monk because they "were working along the same lines" (my italics—O.K.).


Earl Hines's band was becoming a home for several members of the bop clique; men like Eckstine and Gillespie helped persuade Hines to hire Parker. The only opening was on tenor, so Bird played that instrument exclusively during the ten months of 1943 he spent with Hines. But, although there is a story that Ben Webster was moved to open admiration the first time he heard him. Bird was never at home with the tenor; and when he joined Billy Eckstine's big band in 1944, as one of several ex-Hines men involved in that musically ambitious but short-lived orchestra, he was back on alto for good.


After 1944 bop broke out into the open, beginning its rather brief, hectic, and heavily publicized period of more-or-less acceptance by the public. Parker was making his first important records with small groups for the small jazz labels and no one since Louis Armstrong's early heyday had ever had so overwhelming an impact on his fellow musicians. Parker was working on Fifty-second Street, first with Dizzy and then heading a group that included eighteen-year-old Miles Davis. He was, everyone around him agreed, playing wonderfully well. He was also living hard; but so were most of his coworkers, and so have most jazzmen of most eras, particularly when times are good for them and the clubs are crowded. When you spend each night working hard at playing what you want, when your work is being enthusiastically received, and when your setting is a place that does nothing but serve drinks all night long — well, the atmosphere is hardly conducive to sedate living, or to rationing either your emotions or your appetites.



There are stories of eccentric behavior (with the Hines band he had once missed a theatre show because he arrived early and was asleep under the bandstand throughout the performance), and it can be said with hindsight that Bird was close to a breakdown late in 1945 when he went to Los Angeles with a group that included Gillespie and vibist Milt Jackson. But the unanswerable question is whether he would have gone over the line at that time if Los Angeles had not turned out to be a terrible place to play. "Worst of all," Parker told Leonard Feather in an interview a few years later, "was that nobody understood our kind of music out on the Coast," in sharp and bitter contrast to the Eastern scene, where he and Dizzy were the newest of idols. And through it all there was the narcotics habit, which among other things is expensive, so that even when he was working regularly, he was painfully unable to "buy good clothes or a place to live."


It all came to a head on the night of July 29, 1946. At a record session for Ross Russell's Dial label, Bird, despite having drunk "a quart of whiskey to make the date," was beset by uncontrollable muscle tics. He cut only two numbers, one of them an almost incoherent "Lover Man." (Parker's later comment was: "Lover Man" should be stomped into the ground," but it was released, and an embarrassing number of listeners didn't seem to know enough to dislike it.)


Later that night he broke down completely, was arrested and then committed to Camarillo State Hospital. He was released seven months later, seemingly quite recovered: he was playing well on records made in February 1946. There are contradictory details concerning his release; although he worked for Dial again, there was some feeling that Russell had taken advantage of him by insisting that he sign a recording contract before agreeing to help gain his release, although, according to Doris's account, they later determined that he could have been released, and even sent back to New York by the state of California, without outside aid.


In any event, the next few years were successful and seemingly happy and stable, although by taking a long hindsight view again it is possible to say that the road was leading down towards its end. Bird was in demand at New York clubs, and was a big enough name to make it a commercially appealing idea for a club that opened in 1950 to be called "Birdland." He was in Paris and the Scandinavian countries in 1949 and '50, was featured on several of promoter Norman Granz's "Jazz at the Philharmonic" tours, and eventually recorded (for Granz's Clef label) an album with a rich string background. This, Doris Parker says, "had been one of Charlie's pet dreams . . . for so long."


But the with-strings recordings can be taken as marking another turning point. Although some have found these selections, especially a version of "Just Friends," among his most moving work, others considered them a sign that he was going "commercial"— always the most insulting word in jazz.

Bird had for some time been talking about the potentialities of the "variety of coloration" and "new sound combinations" offered by strings and other primarily symphonic instruments, and several friends were aware that he was deeply disturbed by the negative reactions. He went ahead with plans for a tour with a string group, but it was unsuccessful. Entering the '50s, he was moving into a period of personal confusion and erratic behavior.


Bookers and club owners were growing impatient with his unreliability; there was a falling out with the management of Birdland (in his last years he played in "his" club only twice; both times with disastrous results). He apparently was fighting to keep "straight" as far as narcotics were concerned, but there are conflicting reports as to how successful he was.


One prevalent self-cure among musician addicts has been to drink heavily as a sort of substitute (what medical authorities might say about the effectiveness of this is another matter), and it is a fact that Parker drank more heavily at this time than ever before, to the point where he was hospitalized by a serious ulcer attack. For the first time (except for the actual breakdown in 1946) his physical condition was affecting his playing, and although he was still vastly appreciated and widely copied by musicians, many of them placed him in a sort of emeritus status that didn't sit at all well with him.


Bird had left Doris, and Chan had borne him two children. Early in 1954, the girl, Pree, died of pneumonia. Many people consider this tragedy to have been the real finisher. Leonard Feather has called the next few months a "pattern of apparently intentional self-destruction." The immediate culmination came in September of that year, when he was booked into Birdland with a string group. The strings began playing one tune; Bird began on an entirely different one, screamed wildly at the musicians, and fired them on the spot. Later that night he drank iodine in an apparent suicide attempt.


There was one last attempt at regeneration, sparked by Chan. She rented a house in Bucks County, Pennsylvania; Bird attempted to stop drinking and for a while actually commuted to New York, over an hour away, almost daily for sessions with a psychiatrist. But this rather demanding routine didn't last too long. He went back to work, usually as a "single," backed by a local rhythm section. It was an oddly unreal existence; Baroness Nica Koenigswarter (in whose apartment he was to die), who came to know him well during his final months, insists that he was not moody — except when Pree was mentioned — but was for the most part quite cheerful, warm, and witty, But she also notes that he told her, "I've been dead for four years." And there were times when he would ride the subways all night long, alone.


There was no question but that he had deteriorated badly. Frank Sandiford, a Chicago writer who was a close friend for several years, tells of a night at The Beehive in Chicago, "just before he left . . . to go back East and die."


"It began with the owner begging me to go to the room behind the bar to get Charlie to go on the stand. It was a small room used to store cases of beer and other things. . . . Bird met me at the door by throwing his arms around me as though I were the only person left in the world to whom to plead for rest. He couldn't go on, he said. Didn't want to, was in no condition. He looked it. The house was packed. I reminded him that there were many people out there who had come just to hear him play. I opened the door and ... he glared at them. ‘They just came out here to see the world's most famous junky,’ he grumbled. I will always feel guilty about this, but I did get him to get up and face the crowd. He couldn't play. All he did was to make a few awful bleating sounds . . . spilling out his disgust, his fears, his frustrations. He made a pitiful figure. ... He was a beaten man and he knew it. That made it most painful."


Birdland tried him again, on March 4, 1955, but someone misguidedly arranged to have his group include pianist Bud Powell, who was far from fully recovered from his own mental illness. It was, according to eyewitnesses, a thoroughly painful experience, with a full-scale verbal battle between Bird and Bud on the bandstand the first night.


The following Wednesday, just before he was to leave for a Boston engagement, Parker stopped at the Baroness Koenigswarter's apartment. While there he had a bad coughing spell that brought up blood and left him breathing with difficulty. The baroness called a doctor, who asked a few briskly routine questions (including "Do you drink?,” to which Parker answered: "Sometimes I have a sherry before dinner") and recommended hospitalization. Bird refused insistently, and the baroness agreed to keep him there; she and her daughter could nurse him. He was very weak for two days, tried to eat only a few canned peaches during that time, couldn't retain even that, but drank great quantities of water from a jug at his bedside. He remained very alert, however. The doctor knew, if somewhat unclearly, who he was, and there was much discussion as to which of Bird's records would be most suitable to play first for the doctor. (Parker finally decided on "April in Paris," from the with-strings album.) He also talked, near the end, about the future: about forming a large new band "that would knock them all dead.""On that third day," Nica Koenigswarter says, "he seemed much better; then he died." (He died while watching the Dorsey Brothers' television program; he had always admired the Dorseys as technicians.) As the baroness recounts it, the doctor was called three minutes later; he immediately sent for the medical examiner; and thereafter it was out of her hands. She says she was most anxious that Chan not learn of Bird's death from the radio or newspapers, but it was more than a day later before she could locate Chan. (Bird had refused to tell her Chan's whereabouts, saying that he didn't want her or anyone else to know where he was until he was better.)


As for the cause of death: the baroness knew of no heart attack or pneumonia, which were mentioned by most newspaper accounts, and says that the doctor specified ulcers and cirrhosis of the liver. Doris Parker, on the other hand, says, "The district attorney told me they did a very thorough autopsy on Charlie and he died from lobar pneumonia and nothing else was mentioned." This mystery may never be fully clarified, but there is no doubt that it can be said, without excessive sentimentality, that Charlie Parker, like more than a few others before him, died of being a naked, inevitably unadjustable genius.


"Genius" has become a rather cheapened word in our times, but it tends to have its old, formal dignity when musicians talk about Bird. What might be called the omnipresence of music in his life is something on which several have commented. Gene Ramey has been quoted as saying, "Everything had a musical significance for him. He'd hear dogs barking, for instance, and he would say it was a conversation and ... he would have something to play that would portray that thought to us." Similarly, Gigi Gryce has noted his ability to "augment anything. You might be humming a couple of bars of something, without thinking about it, and in a couple of minutes he'd be giving it back to you so changed and developed you wouldn't even recognize it."


Yet, like many artists to whom creativity is, at least in part, a sort of natural function, he tended to minimize his own abilities. This might have been simply a not-uncommon urge toward perfection. "Basically, he was never satisfied with what he did," Doris has said. "There wasn't a record he didn't think could have been better." And Bird himself once answered a question as to what he'd recommend to anyone wanting to buy his three best records by saying, "Tell him to keep his money." Gryce, however, feels that he was bothered by his lack of formal training, that he thought, incorrectly, that the fact that he could write and arrange so readily without schooling did not just mean that it came easily to him, but rather than he wasn't doing it as well as he might. Yet, Gryce notes, he had a phenomenal ability to read, and even to transpose, music at sight.


The extent to which he was disturbed by imitators, or made unhappy by varying degrees of non-acceptance by the public, is hard to define and obviously was itself quite variable. Gryce believes that part of the unhappiness of his last years stemmed from a feeling of "What's the use? People didn't really dig him," and there is agreement that he felt his "disciples" were overdoing it to the point of stultifying their own creative potentials.


But any opinions about Parker must be looked at with an understanding that, to an amazing extent, people saw in him what they wanted to see. Take even so apparently simple a matter as whether he was more, or less, reliable during his best periods. Doris says, "When Charlie was on his feet, he made time" (i.e., showed up on time for engagements). But Gigi feels that he was simply unable to adjust to business routine — "he wanted to create like a painter, when he wanted to; not like a commercial artist working on schedule"— and that, when he was feeling best, he was most apt to get wound up in a session someplace and just neglect to show up for work.


Of one thing there can be little doubt: he had given up the fight towards the end. He spoke often about his death as close and inevitable ("I'm just a husk," he told Nica Koenigswarter); and in 1954 he sent Doris a poem, which he may have written but more probably had copied down (judging from the rather ornate style), and which he seems to have considered fitting. In part it sets forth a credo that might easily have been his own ("Hear the words! Not the doctrine. Hear the speech! Not the meaning. . . Don't look at the sun! Feel it!") and in part is concerned with dying ("death is an imminent thing"), though also with hope ("My fire is unquenchable").


There can also be little doubt that he was a tortured man, and there are several who emphasize the loneliness. One friend of the last years, Chips Bayen, never thought it unusual that he had long talks with Bird, and discovered only after his death that most people considered it something unique. Gigi Gryce puts the blame on Bird's position of eminence: "The pressure of being on a pedestal, which he didn't like at all." Gigi feels that he wanted and needed companionship, but that many musicians were wary of approaching him on a personal level: "People wouldn't talk to him because they didn't know what to say — but, really, all they had to do was say 'Hello.’”


Although so many writers of fiction have turned the concept of the artist as a soul in torment into something approaching a stereotype, it still seems the clearest way to sum up this man. The basic paradox must be that the same qualities that made him play as he did made him unable to find "normal" happiness and acceptance. Frank Sandiford calls him "a man of violently opposing urges: one towards greatness . . . the other towards defeat." In a letter, Sandiford tells of seeing him at his worst: ", . . when he would beg dimes and quarters, anything, from those that came to hear him play . . . sweaty and looking sick and tired [and trying] to keep his words together so as to make some sense. There were times when I would see him sneer, trying hard to believe in the cynical statements he made, when I knew he made them only to keep pain at a safer distance."


This is a friend speaking, of course, and perhaps being considerably more tolerant than, say, someone at whom the cynicism was directed or from whom the money was begged. But at the very least a man is entitled to have a friend speak the final words. And there is another portion of Sandiford's letter that seems a suitable epitaph for Bird (and probably for more than one other musician whose living presence was sometimes less than pleasant for those who knew and worked with him):


"He was an artist who paid a great price to be able to get out of himself some of the things that most disturbed him. He might have cheated a little, he might have stolen from some, he might have hurt many. But he cheated, stole and hurt himself more than anybody. And he did give us something far more wonderful than he took from us."”



Viewing all 3897 articles
Browse latest View live